Home

Panasonic FP2/FP2SH Series PLCs User`s Manual

1. Ve is I ae Y160 Y170 Y180 Y190 Y200 Y210 X220 260 to to to to to to to to YI6F Y17F Y18F Y19F Y20F Y21F X25F 26F 16 point type 64 point relay output unit type DC input unit 3 20 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH I O Allocation 3 6 1 0 Numbers of Free Slots 3 6 2 3 When Automatic Allocation is Used When automatic allocation is executed 16 points are uniformly assigned to each free slot With automatic allocation the contents of allocation are not registered Assignments are performed each time the power of PLC is turned on based on the units actually mounted Advantage Automatic allocation is convenient when frequent structural changes are conducted such as during trial runs and testing of the program It is convenient when using a large number of standard I O units units that occupy 16 points 16 points are assigned to free modules free slots 16 point type transistor output unit Slots that do not actually exist 16 point type CPU DC input unit backplane Slot No 0 1 2 S 13 0000000 pasanna rA a r a a r O EEEN E EAE E AA EE A
2. Type of Backplane 10 module type Expansion system only FP2 BP10EH Approx 470g i Note The color of letters on the printed board is yellow to make easier to distinguish the FP2 backplane H type from the FP2 backplane 2 6 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 1 Backplane and Expansion Cable 2 1 4 Expansion Cable Lent FP2 EC 60 cm 1 Approx 200 g FP2 EC2 2m 2 Approx 400 g Note With the backplaine H type the total cable length can be arranged within 3 2 m Ferrite core ia Note Connect the connector on the side of the ferrite core to the CPU backplane 2 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 2 FP2CPU 2 2 FP2 CPU 2 2 1 Standard Type CPU FP2 C1 Parts Terminology and Functions Status indicator LEDs page 2 9 display the operating condition and error statuses 2 Initialize test switch page 2 9 is used to clear the errors initializes the operation memory and set the test operation 3 Mode selector page 2 10 is used to change the operation mode of the PLC 4 COM port RS232C page 2 11 is used to connect a computer or g
3. mw next page 10 4 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Specifications Pee Multi wire link unit 10 1 Specifications Weight Approx 120g ET LAN unit ET LAN2 unit FP2 ET1 FP2 ET2 MEWNET VE link unit MEWNET VE2 link unit FP2 VE FP2 VE2 Remote I O Slave Unit FP2 RMS FNS Unit FNS Unit Transistor output type FP2 FNS PROFIBUS Device Net CAN open AFPN AB6201 AFPN AB6218 FMU Unit PROFIBUS Device Net FP2 DPV1 M FP2 DEV M FP2 CAN M Expansion cable FP2 EC FP2 EC2 FP2 Performance Specifications FP2 CPU FP2 C1 AFP2211 FP2 C1D AFP2212 FP2 C1SL AFP2214 Program control method Relay symbol cyclic operation Controllable I O points Basic construction Using Backplanes Max 768 points 12 modules Using Backplanes H type Max 512 points 8 modules Expanded construction Using Backplanes Max 1 600 points 25 modules Using Backplanes H type Max 2 048 points 82 modules Using remote I O system Max 2 048 points using S LINK or MEWNET F system Program capacity Note 1 Internal memory Approx 16k steps Using expansion memory Approx 32k steps Note 2 Number of instruc tions Basic instructions 96 typ
4. x 72 z gajaj tes x lt a Num Name Boolean Ope Description gliele Bla i oe ber rand o iul e s uejy4 z a g fa L F235 16 bit binary GRY S D Converts the 16 bit binary data of P235 data Gray PGRY S to gray codes and the 6 x O O0 0 0 C code conversion converted result is stored in the D F236 32 bit binary DGRY S D Converts the 32 bit binary data of P236 data gt Gray PDGRY S 1 S to gray code and the 8lxlololololo code conversion converted result is stored in the eee a a Wo a D 1 D F237 16 bit gray code GBIN S D Converts the gray codes of S to P237 gt binary data PGBIN binary data and the converted 6 x O O0 O 0 0 conversion result is stored in the D F238 32 bit gray code DGBIN S D Converts the gray codes of S 1 S P238 gt binary data PDGBIN to binary data and the converted 8 1x Oolojojojo conversion result is stored in the D 1 D F240 Bit line to bit COLM S n The values of bits 0 to 15 of S are P240 column PCOLM D stored in bit n of D to DC 15 8 x ojojojojo conversion F241 Bit column to bit LINE S n The values of bit n of S to S 15 slxlololc P241 line conversion PLINE D are stored in bits 0 to 15 of D ay ese T F250 Binary data gt BTOA S1 Converts multiple binary data to ASCII S2 n multiple ASCII data 12 x B 4
5. I elo 2 ae Ko a C a X o a Name Boolean Symbol Description a 5 n o fre m giaj u D a Push stack PSHS Stores the operated result up to this E mH Sg 1 lololol aoaolool instruction 2 Read stack RDS p Reads the operated result stored by 1 lolololololo the PSHS instruction 2 gt Pop stack POPS Reads and clears the operated result 1 lolololololo stored by the PSHS instruction Leading edge DF Turns on the contact for only one differential i scan when the leading edge of the 1 O0 O0 0 0Q 0 C trigger is detected Trailing edge DF Turns on the contact for only one differential DFI scan when the trailing edge of the 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 trigger is detected Leading edge DFI Turns on the contact for only one differential DF scan when the leading edge of the vylealalaleala initial execution trigger is detected The leading edge 1 xE g type detection is possible on the first scan Set SET YRLE Output is set to and held at on s 3 lolololololo Reset RST Y RLE Output is set to and held at off lt R gt 3 olo O O B al Keep KP pe L Outputs at set trigger and holds until 1 olololololo reset trigger turns on 2 No operation NOP No operation 1 lolololololo Basic function instructions On delay timer TML After set value n x 0 001 seconds 3 falalo 5 a timer contact a is set to on 4 ai leis at 3 TMR i
6. F300 BCDtypesine BSIN S D SIN S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D Be Se eae aes age a P300 operation PBSIN F301 BCD type BCOS S D COS S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D P301 cosine PBCOS 6 XxIxXIxXxIx OJjo operation F302 BCD type BTAN S D TAN S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D P302 tangent PBTAN 6 xX x x x O Cc operation F303 BCD type BASIN S D SIN S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D P303 arcsine PBASIN 6 x x x x Oo operation F304 BCD type BACOS S D cos S1 1 1 gt D 1 D P304 arccosine PBACOS 6 x x x x OT operation F305 BCD type BATAN S D TAN S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D P305 arctangent PBATAN 6 x x x x O C operation Floating point type real number operation instructions F309 Floating point FMV S D S 1 S gt D 1 D f P309 type data PFMV 8 2 O O 0 0 C move F310 Floating point F S1 S2 S1 1 1 S2 1 S2 D 1 D P310 type data PF D 14 2 0O0 Oojojo addition F311 Floating point F S1 S2 S1 1 1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D f P311 type data PF D 14 P ojlojololjo subtraction F312 Floating point F S1 S2 S1 1 S1 x S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D P312 type data PF D 14 5 9 O 0 0 0 multiplication F313 Floating point F S1 S2 S1 1 1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D P313 type data PF D 14 9 O O 0 0 C division O Available X Not available A Not available partially 1 This instruction is onl
7. T no F ola Num Name Boo lean OP Description a S iy ai a ic ber rand Hl P l el H l es re a i F15 16 bit data XCH D1 D2 D1 gt D2 D2 gt D1 slolololololg P15 exchange PXCH a F16 32 bit data DXCH D1 D2 D1 1 D1 gt D2 1 D2 Hlo a el olev P16 exchange PDXCH D2 1 D2 gt D1 1 D1 A F17 Higher lower SWAP D The higher byte and lower byte of D P17 byte in 16 bit PSWAP are exchanged 3 0 O0 O0 0 0 C data exchange F18 16 bit data BXCH D1 Exchange the data between D1 and P18 block PBXCH D2 D3 D2 with the data specified by D3 71x100 0j j a exchange Control instruction F19 Auxiliary jump SJP S The program jumps to the label instruction specified by S and 3 ixx xix ojo continues from there Binary arithmetic instructions F20 16 bit data S D D S gt D 5 lolololololo P20 addition P aaa F21 32 bit data D S D D 1 D S 1 S gt D 1 D zlololololole P21 addition PD F22 16 bit data S1 S1 S2 gt D zlolololololo P22 addition P S2 D i F23 32 bit data D S1 S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D lolololololc P23 addition PD S2 D gt gt F25 16 bit data S D D S gt D 5 lolololololo P25 subtraction P eo fiat i F26 32 bit data D S D D 1 D S 1 S gt D 1 D zylolololololo P26 subtraction PD A i F27 16 bit data S1 S1 S2 gt D zlolololololo P27 subtraction P S2
8. Address APAI Name Descriptions acca tad a FP3 FP2SH ing ing FP10SH Station number where the send area DT9170 DT90170 address for the PC link is overlapped with this station is stored here Test result in the optical transmission path DT9171 DT90171 test mode for MEWNET P link system is stored here DT9172 DT90172 Counts how many times a token is lost DT9173 DT90173 ease many times two or more tokens DT9174 DT90174 Counts how many times a signal is lost DT9175 DT90175 Counts how many times a synchronous abnormality is detected DT9176 DT90176 Send NACK DT9177 DT90177 Send NACK DT9178 DT90178 Send WACK DT9179 DT90179 Send WACK DT9180 DT90180 Send answer DT9181 DT90181 Send answer DT9182 DT90182 Unidentified command ME WHET Counts how many times a parity error is DT9183 DT90183 W P link detected status A N A DT9184 DT90184 W P link 1 End code receiving error DT9185 DT90185 Note Format error DT9186 DT90186 Not support error DT9187 DT90187 Self diagnostic result Counts how many times loop change is DT9188 DT90188 detected Available PLC FP3 FP10SH DT9189 DT90189 Pai many times link error is Counts how many times main loop break is DT9190 DT90190 detected Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Counts how many times sub loop break is DT9191 DT90191 detected Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Loop reconstruction condition DTS 132 0130197 Available PLC FP3
9. FP2 CPU rear side m a C a SW2 Program memory selector eB RAM operation on ROM operation O jo 5 Reattach the CPU to it original position on the back plane B Clearing the program within the CPU re Note If inputting of the program is done without first performing this operation the contents of the internal RAM of CPU may become improper Operations using FPWIN GR 1 On the Online menu select Online Edit Mode 2 On the Edit menu select Clear Program 6 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 4 Writing to ROM C Reading a program from disk Operations using FPWIN GR On the File menu select Open and load the program from disk D Writing the program from the CPU to the optional memory FROM Operations using FPWIN GR 1 On the Online menu select Online Edit Mode 2 On the Tool menu select ROM amp RAM Service SOMERAM Service Urtitles i gt x C AOM o AAM a e ONE Los Trardfer the pogram system register eb stored in the niemal RAM of PLC into the ROM __ Dae 3 Select ROM lt RAM and click Execute button For information on operating the menus please check the Help menu E Writing to the optional memory EPROM with the ROM writer 1 Remove the optional mem
10. Input Input indicator LED AA Input 5 6kQ idi O 2 5602 3 2avpc 44K 3 aS COM Output Wea ae th egy a Output indicator l LED 5 to 24V DC L Pin Layout l CN2 gt A B 0 8 amp 0O 00 HO 0 3 BHO a 0 3 BHO 24V DC T O18 LO i O78 O O OT H 5to24VDC 12 Sk Shisa o oF Oloo O 07O Bso aca 9 m one Oe BO olse 09 OO OIL OO oles OWS OO ales Oe OO Q 19 19 20 20 OO The COM pins of each connector are Although and terminals are connected internally connected internally with the same connector It is recommended that they also be connected externally 2 60 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 11 1 O Mixed Units Specifications 2 11 3 32 point Type DC Input with On Pulse Catch Input Function 32 point Type Transistor Output NPN Unit Specifications ee Part number FP2 XY64D7T Input specifica tions Insulation method Optical coupler Rated input voltage Rated input current 24V DC Approx 4 3mA at 24V DC Input impedance Approx 5 6kQ2 Input voltage range 20 4 to 26 4V DC Min on voltage Min on current Max off voltage Max off current 19 2V 4mA 5 0V 1 5mA Response time off on on off 0 2ms or less for XO to X1F 0 3ms o
11. ia Note Signal name Signal direction Destination Field device 1 Frame ground FG 2 Send data SD gt 3 Received data RD 4 Request to send always on RS gt 5 Clear to send cS 6 Not used 7 Signal ground terminal SG 8 Not used z 9 Equipment ready always on ER gt The serial data communication control instruction F144 cannot be executed unless pin 5 is turned on Communications specifications Electrical characteristics conform to EIA RS232C The baud rate and transmission format are decided by system registers The table below shows the settings in the default state Mode selection Computer link Baud rate Description 19200 bps Data bit length 8 bits Parity check Odd parity Start bit length 1 bit Stop bit length 1 bit The starting and ending codes when using a computer link are determined by the MEW TOCOL COM When using the general purpose communication function serial data communication control instruction F144 the setting of system register 412 should be changed The serial data communication control instruction can be used to switch between the computer link function and the general purpose communication function If the transmission speed is 38 400 bps or higher the transmission distance over which communication is possible is limited to within 3m 9 84ft Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web
12. Parts Terminology and Functions Q Input and output indicators Indicate the input and output on off states Terminal block release lever By lowering this lever the terminal block can be removed from the unit without removing any of the wiring After installation push in the lock button at the bottom of the unit to lock in the terminal block 3 Terminal block This is the terminal block for the inputs outputs and power supplies This terminal block uses M3 sized crimping pressure connection terminals For more information regarding the crimping pressure connection terminals refer to section 4 5 1 Unit installation screw Secures the unit to the backplane Connector This is the connector for input output and power supply wiring This allows the connector of discrete wire and the connector of flat cable For more information regarding the suitable connectors refer to section 4 4 1 For terminal connection an exclusive cable is available For more information refer to section 4 4 3 Indicator selection switch Switches between the first 32 points CN1 position and second 32 points CN2 position of the LED display for the 64 point type unit 2 30 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 8 Input and Output Units Table of Input Unit Types Type Number of Connecti
13. XO X10 20 Y30 Y40 50 60 150 to to to to to to to to XF X1F 2F Y3F Y4F 5F 6F 15F 16 points are assigned to free modules free slots TIIT 7 SEN SS SS y ai SN E Y160 Y170 Y180 Y190 Y200 Y210 X220 260 to to to to to to to to Y16F Y17F Y18F Y19F Y20F Y21F X25F 26F Free slot 16 point type relay output unit 64 point type DC input unit 3 21 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net I O Allocation FP2 FP2SH 3 6 I O Numbers of Free Slots 3 22 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 1 Installation 4 1 Installation 4 1 1 Installation Space and Environment Dimensions g DIN rail fa DIN EN50022 width 35 1 378 100 3 937
14. IC memory card Create a data table in the IC memory card such as outlined above so that the data is read to the CPU every time you switch data When using the IC memory card as an expanded memory the DIP switches do not need to be set but the access enable switch should be set to on Configuration of Expanded Memory Field Fields of the IC memory card that are not formatted can be used as expanded memory field 1 Using the entire IC memory card as expansion memory when there is no DOS formatted field The Card capacity 1 word portion can be used The data of one word two bytes can be stored in one address As the following example calculation in 2MB area data of 1 048 575 words can be stored 2 x 1048576 bytes 5 1 1 048 575 words In the expanded memory field the addresses are numbered by word units and regardless of the size of the formatted area the starting address is numbered as 0 HO For example the addresses for 1MB 512k words area are from as HO to H7FFFE A tf Example When 1MB of SRAM type IC memory card is designated as ex pansion memory Address H 0 Expanded memory field 524 287 words H7FFFE 7 23 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH 7 4 For Use as Expansion Memory 2 Using the remaining DOS formatted fiel
15. control S1 and S2 and execute Output off FCAL When the trigger is on Executes the type FOAL n subroutine 4 subroutine When the trigger is off Not execute the 5 x x x x x O call subroutine But the output in 2 the subroutine is cleared Subroutine SUB lt r Indicates the start of the subroutine 1 olololololo entry J j program n Subroutine RET T i j Ends the subroutine program 1lolololololo return Interrupt instructions Interrupt INT 4 rr asl Indicates the start of the interrupt program j a ee ena n n S a ee Interrupt IRET T RET f Ends the interrupt program 1lolololololo return E Interrupt ICTL Select interrupt enable disable or clear in O Available X Not available Z Not available partially 1 Available for FP e only 2 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n of a subroutine program has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net I 2 S A Name Boolean Symbol Description Ey 5 S amp A a i EIE mai 5 UL N Special setting instructions Communica SYS1 Change the communication conditions tion condi for the COM port or tool port based on xlo ojo ET tions setting the contents specified by the character 1 1 constant Passwor
16. J 50 mm 1 97 in or more Duct Incorrect Stacked up Incorrect Horizontal installation 50 mm 1 97 in installation or more poooce 50 mm 1 97 in or more Duct Incorrect Upside down Correct Proper installation installation 100 mm 13 937 in or more Other device 4 4 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 1 Installation Space of Programming Tool Connection Leave a space of at least 170mm 6 693in from the mounting surface for programming tool connections and wiring Approx 110mm 4 331in Peripheral connection cable 170mm 6 693in or more Operating environment Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when installing Ambient temperatures 0 to 55 C Ambient humidity 30 to 85 RH at 25 C non condensing For use in pollution Degree 2 environment Do not use it in the following environments Direct sunlight Sudden temperature changes causing condensation Inflammable or corrosive gas Excessive airborne dust metal particles or saline matter Benzine paint th
17. 4 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 1 Installation FP2 backplane H type Three expansion backplanes H type can be added on for expansion Connect a cable from the connector of the basic backplane to the outside connector of the expansion backplane with the smallest number and then connect a cable from the inside connector to the outside connector of the next expansion backplane Basic backplane Expansion ian cable inside m con h lol lu nector Expansion backplane 2 To 9 5 outside con nector Expansion To 9 2 outside con nector g eel eal er 939 69 I i 3 o 8 Removing the expansion cable Hold down the buttons on the side of the connector to release it from the locked condi tion and pull out the expansion cable Hold down the buttons and pull outward 4 12 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 1 Installation 4 1 4 Preparing the Backup Battery With the FP2 be sure to remove the insulating sheet of the backup battery before instal ling the CPU onto backplane With the FP2SH connect the connector of backup battery Make sure the connector terminals are positioned in the correct directions
18. Turn off the power supply and detach the CPU If using the FP2 C2 insert the expansion memory unit FP2 EM7 into the CPU and install the master memory AFP5208 or the memory AFP5209 containing the pro grams Procedure 1 Set the DIP switches on the back of the CPU to ROM op eration SW2 on SW4 off CPU rear side 2 Return the CPU to its original position on the backplane When the power supply is turned on the contents of the ROM will be transferred to the internal RAM Note Be careful when switching the DIP switches on the back of the CPU When the power supply is turned on any contents stored in the RAM up to that point will be lost 6 20 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation 6 7 3 Precautions When Operating the ROM Precautions Before Turning On the Power Supply At the point when the ROM is installed be aware that operation differs as described below depending on the setting of the DIP switches on the back of the CPU If the power supply is turned on when DIP switch SW2 is on and SW4 is off When the power supply is turned on the contents of the memory ROM are automati cally transferred to the internal RAM and written there Be aware that the previous contents of the RAM will be lost at that point If the power supply is turned on when DIP switch SW2 is off Even if the m
19. 0 0 02 02 0 2 33 2 9 2 32 point Type DC Input Unit 0 eee eee 2 35 2 9 3 64 point Type DC Input Unit 00 eee 2 37 2 10 Output Units Specifications 0 0 eee 2 39 2 10 1 16 point Type Relay Output Unit 0 0002 2 39 2 10 2 6 point Type Relay Output Unit 0 0000 2 41 2 10 3 16 point Type Transistor NPN Output Unit 2 43 2 10 4 16 point Type Transistor PNP Output Unit 2 45 2 10 5 32 point Type Transistor NPN Output Unit 2 47 2 10 6 32 point Type Transistor PNP Output Unit 2 49 2 10 7 64 point Type Transistor NPN Output Unit 2 51 2 10 8 64 point Type Transistor PNP Output Unit 2 53 2 11 I O Mixed Units Specifications 0 cece ees 2 55 2 11 1 32 point Type DC Input 32 point Type Transistor NPN Q tp t UNIN scatters atin ies cute E a bee EI 2 55 2 11 2 32 point Type DC Input 32 point Type Transistor PNP Output UNIT rere tisr ie cet eria tow fea ene eae E 2 58 2 11 3 32 point Type DC Input with On Pulse Catch Input Function 32 point Type Transistor Output NPN Unit 2 61 2 11 4 32 point Type DC Input with On Pulse Catch Input Function 32 point Type Transistor Output PNP Unit 2 64 2 11 5 On Pulse Catch Input Function 0 0 0 c eee eee 2 67 Chapter 3 I O Allocation 3 1
20. ri Program Autoexec spg IC memory card i Note This method can only be used with an SRAM type IC memory card 6 33 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 8 FP2SH IC Memory Card Operation for FRP2 C2P FP2 C3P 6 34 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 IC Memory Card Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH 7 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 7 1 Using the IC Memory Card 7 1 Using the IC Memory Card 7 1 1 Types of IC Memory Cards There are two types of IC memory cards an SRAM type and an FROM type The user can select the appropriate type for the application at hand FROM type AIC50020 SRAM type AIC52000 AFP2209 FROM type No battery backup is required so this type is ideal for saving programs Programs are written using the Copy File to IC Card function in the FPWIN GR When used as an expansion memory this type is a read only card The Data Editor is used to write data SRAM type This is ideal for use in expanding the data memory area When used as an expansion memory the F13
21. 5 6 Chapter6 FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 1 FRZ Op ratiom o hn p a sea pusweees oe eedars ane aeleeactenidesh ans 6 3 6 1 1 FP2 RAM and ROM Operations 0 0c eee eee eee 6 3 6 1 1 1 Comparison of RAM and ROM Operations 6 3 6 1 1 2 Retaining the Data During Power Outages 6 4 6 1 1 3 Setting the Battery Error Warnings 6 4 6 2 FP2 RAM Operation sci sire ae beta ee ede eee ees a tae wet 6 5 6 2 1 RAM Operation Method 0 0 cece eee eee 6 5 6 2 2 Precautions When Operating the RAM 0 00 6 5 6 3 FP2ROM Operation sun sews eae Se es ee ee ea ee E 6 6 6 3 1 ROM Operation Method 0 0 cece eee ees 6 6 6 3 2 Verifying the ROM Contents in RAM Operation 6 7 6 4 Writing to ROM nss ginenean e ees Ree ees See bedwets 6 8 6 4 1 Writing to EPROM Using Programming Tool Software 6 8 6 4 2 Writing to EPROM via FROM 0c eee eee 6 10 65 FP2SH Operation oesie eie Eaves teed a Met eG ate caked 6 13 6 5 1 Comparison of RAM ROM and IC Memory Card Operation 6 13 6 5 2 Retaining Data If the Power Fails 2 0005 6 14 6 5 3 Comment Function 4uder eee Sete eat eee es estate 2 6 16 6 6 FP2SH RAM Operation 2 0 4 esse knee ectenie dd oistane dean ey fs 6 17 6 6 1 RAM Operation Method 00 c eee eee eee 6 17 6 6 2 Precautions When Operating the RAM 0 6 18
22. slots free Number of slots where units can be installed 1 4 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Overview 1 1 System Configuration FP2 backplane H type 1 module type CPU and 1 module type power supply unit 2 module type CPU and 1 module type power supply unit 1 module type CPU and 2 module type power supply l E unit AN EER A ars ae A maximum of eight I O units including the unit built in the CPU 2 module type can be controlled per backplane Even if further I O units are CPU and Gi ranar saan installed they are not recognized 2 module type f 7 re eae Note When using the CPU unit with S LINK seven slots are free power supply Ei tbe Wd however the units actually usable are only six Refer to Chapter 3 unit ic aa oath 1 0 Allocation 1 1 2 Expansion of Backplane FP2 backplane CPU backplane Expansion backplane rect Twa Qs m 8 o m Expansion cable Only one backplane can be added on for expansion Expansion is simply connecting a new backplane with a special expansion cable Any backplane other than a 5 module type can be used for expansion F Notes A 5 module type backplane cannot be expanded A 5 module type backplane cannot be
23. Shift register Max 253 points Master control relay points MCR 256 points Number of labels JP and LOOP 256 points Number of step ladder 1 000 steps Note 3 Number of subroutine 100 subroutines Number of interrupt program 1 program periodical interrupt allows setting of the time interval within the range from 0 5ms to 1 5s Comment input function Available Note 6 Sampling trace function Max 1 000 samples 4 000 words for 16 contacts and 3 words Note 2 Clock calendar function Available year month day hour minute second and day of week Notes 6 and 7 Link functions Self diagnostic functions Inter PLC link computer link remote programming modem and data transfer Watchdog timer memory malfunction detection I O malfunction detection backup battery malfunction detection program syntax check etc Other functions ROM operation function Note 8 program block edition during RUN mode forced input output interrupt processing test run constant scan and machine language program Memory backup time lithium battery storage time CPU only Min 10 000 hours typical approx 13 000 hours FP2 EM1 Min 9 000 hours typical approx 12 000 hours When installed expan sion memory unit FP2 EM2 FP2 EM3 Min 8 000 hours typical approx 12 000 hours FP2 EM6 Min 8 500 hours typical approx 12
24. 2 1 Backplane and Expansion Cable 0c cece ee 2 3 2 1 1 Backplane iiia tirsir asked dated are eect a ata a ates 2 3 2 1 2 Basic Backplane H Type FP2 BP Mh 05 2 5 2 1 3 Expansion Backplane H Type FP2 BP EH 2 6 2 1 4 Expansion Cable is sca ity ewe heated dot ba ate leled aes 2 7 22 PP2CPW is tiis ca Sheegs aba sete acu nbia a Bakroins bk coeds 2 8 2 2 1 Standard Type CPU FP2 C1 0 eee 2 8 2 2 2 CPU with 64 Points Input FP2 C1D 2 12 i Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Table of Contents FP2 FP2SH 2 3 Expansion Memory Unit and ROM for FP2 CPU 2 15 24 IFP2SH CPU A ee net et Ea Rete Sok tie E E a tate 2 18 2 4 1 32k 60k Step Standard Type CPU FP2 C2L FP2 C2 2 19 2 4 2 CPU with IC Memory Card Interface FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 2 20 2 5 Expansion Memory Unit and ROM for FP2 C2L FP2 C2 2 22 2 6 IC Memory Card for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 0 0 eee eee 2 23 2 7 Power Supply Units 4i ees Gl ene Bee art ens iy ae ee ea Kh 2 28 2 7 1 Power Supply Specifications 0 cee eee eee 2 28 2 8 Input and Output Units s unnan aaa 2 30 2 8 1 Common Specifications of Input and Output Units 2 30 2 9 Input Units Specifications seis 00 ieee cee eee ene he cus eeu ee eke 2 33 2 9 1 16 point Type DC Input Unit
25. 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units Correspondence table of 32 point input 32 point output type I O mixed unit When the I O mixed unit is next to the standard type CPU on the right side Examples for the CN1 group Terminal Terminal number number number number mo O A2 J B2 S A3 pe B3 XA O At S Ba B O AS X SX A6 BS w o O Ko Bs CoM mooo NC PAT po mo o p mo o pe mao p LS me p me por mo feom e em C NC B20 Examples for the CN2 group Terminal O Terminal O number number number number mo po Je a Az pa Be veo PAS pz JB _ ver Aa pa Ba pa PAS pa BS vec Ae ps Be a m pr AS a SB o OE E moo o m a Bia v9 m p e aa ma s a pe ms a e vac CS D Bie aD me var C a a a 4 30 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units RT 2 Relay Terminal For 64 point type output unit FP2 Y64T you can connect four sets of the RT 2 relay terminals with 16 outputs by using two branch type cable For 32 point type output unit FP2 Y32T and output connector side of I O mixed unit FP2 XY64D2T FP2 XY64D7T you can connect two sets of the RT 2 relay terminals with 16 outputs by using two branch type cable For connecting the terminal to the terminal block use M3 sized pressure connection terminals RT 2 rel
26. 1 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Overview FP2 FP2SH 1 1 System Configuration Restriction on the number of modules of the backplane For master backplane The number of units that can be installed is determined by the number of modules of the backplane used the power supply unit to be installed and the CPU 1 module type CPU Standard type CPU 2 modules type CPU CPU with 64 point input CPU with S LINK 1 module type power supply unit 100V 2 5A 200V 2 5A 2 modules type power supply unit 100 to 240V 5A 24V DC 5A CPU backplane FP2 backplane 5 module type 7 module type module type 12 module type 14 module type Ei as fom OTT oom 1 module type CPU and 3 slots free 7 slots free 10 slots free 12 slots free 1 module type 7 Tq TH power supply gm MATTI pamm Lio LTT unit 2 modules type CPU and soverscoy in fied ied Goo unit 2 slots free 6 slots free 9 slots free 11 slots free 1 module type CPU and 2 slots free 4 slots free 6 slots free 9 slots free 11 slots free 2 dule t i il O il oS i Ti CS sower supply EHN 1 po Doom i i oo unit 2 modules type CPU and 2 module type TAL TAL T Al cower Supply min h kim bh bio ll tt gio 7 unit 1 slot free 3 slots free 5 slots free 8 slots free 10 slots free
27. 15 3 0 602 unit mm in Type of FP2 backplane Type of FP2 backplane H type L mm in 5 module type 140 5 512 7 module type 209 8 228 9 module type 265 10 433 12 module type 11 module type Basic backplane 349 13 740 10 module type Expansion backplane 14 module type 405 15 945 The 5 module type backplane has no connector for expansion Installation to a DIN rail is possible 4 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 1 Installation Installation location Be sure to maintain a sufficient distance from wiring ducts and other machines below and above the unit for proper ventilation Do not install the units stacked up or horizontally Doing so will prevent proper cooling of the unit and cause overheating inside the PLC programmable controller Do not install the unit above devices which generate heat such as heaters transformers or large scale resistors In order to eliminate any effects from noise emission power wires and electromagnetic devices should be kept at least 100 mm 13 937 in away from the surfaces of the unit When installing the unit behind the doors of the operation panel be especially careful to maintain these distances Duct _ i 50 mm 1 97 in 7 sar or more eoesod
28. 7 2 Formatting and Erasing 7 2 2 Procedure for Formatting the IC Memory Card Formatting an FROM type When using this type formatting is done at the same time that the program on the disk is copied to the IC memory card with the FPWIN GR Procedure 1 Boot the Copy File to IC Card function On the Tool menu select IC Card Service and then Copy File to IC Card First the Specify Format win dow opens Specify Format Copy File gt IC Card Flash x m next page 7 8 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 7 2 Formatting and Erasing 2 Specifying and running the format size Press the button next to Format Size to select the size Next click on the Execute button to open the Select File window at FFWIN GR NPST GR Fie tp7sp0 go 3 Selecting the file to be copied Select the file to be copied to the IC memory card and click on OK The IC memory card is formatted and the file is written to the card 7 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH 7 2 Formatting and Erasing Formatting the SRAM type With this type of card the IC memory card must be formatted before the program is saved to it and a program memory field must be ass
29. 19 2V 4mA 5 0V 1 5mA Response time off on 0 2ms or less on off 0 3ms or less Internal current consumption at 5V DC 100mA or less Common method Input points per common 32 points common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal Operating indicator 32 dot LED display lit when on switching External connection method Connectors MIL type two 40 pin Weight o Aprox 120g Min on voltage Min on current Max off voltage Max off current Note Keep the number of input points per common which are simulta neously on within the following range as determined by the input voltage and ambient temperature 64 Number of 46 points per common which are simulta neous on 50 55 127 4 131 Ambient temperature C F 2 37 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 9 Input Units Specifications Internal Circuit Diagram Input Input indicator LED AA Input 5eko eas O O 2 hie 5602 ce 24VDC 4 z g 4 COM Pin Layout Input XO to X1F Input X20 to X3F Pin layout of first 32 points Pin layout of last 32 points Left side connector CN1 Right side connector CN2 CN1 CN2 24V DCT EE ae The COM pins of each connector are connec
30. D 1 F271 Maximum DMAX S1 Searches for the maximum value in P271 value double PDMAX S2 D the double word data table between word data 32 the area selected with S1 and S2 8 i olojlojolo bit and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 F272 Minimum value MIN S1 Searches for the minimum value in P272 word data 16 PMIN S2 D the word data table between the area bit selected with S1 and S2 and 8 E o0olojolojo stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 1 F273 Minimum value DMIN S1 Searches for the minimum value in P273 double word PDMIN S2 D the double word data table between data 32 bit the area selected with S1 and S2 8 F 9 O0 C and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 F275 Total and MEAN S1 The total value and the mean value of P275 mean values PMEAN S2 D the word data with sign from the area 8 Alolc alale word data 16 selected with S1 to S2 are qo i bit obtained and stored in the D F276 Total and DMEAN S1 The total value and the mean value of P276 mean values PDMEAN S2 D the double word data with sign from sl lolololoalo double word the area selected with S1 to S2 a data 32 bit are obtained and stored in the D F277 Sort word SORT S1 The word data with sign from the P277 data 16
31. FP2 FP2SH Memory area External input relay WX Code for specifying 16 exter 128 words 512 words nal input points as one word WX0 to WX127 WX0 to WX511 16 bits of data External output WY Code for specifying 16 exter 128 words 512 words relay nal output points as one word WYO to WY127 WYO to WY511 16 bits of data Internal relay WR Code for specifying 16 inter 253 words 887 words nal relay points as one word WRO to WR252 WRO to WR886 16 bits of data Link relay WL Code for specifying 16 link 128 words 640 words relay points as one word 16 WLO to WL127 WLO to WL639 bits of data Data register DT Data memory used in pro 6 000 words 10 240 words Note 1 gram Data is handled in DTO to DT5999 DTO to DT10239 Link data register Note 1 Timer Counter set value area Note 1 16 bit units one word This is a shared data memory which is used within the MEWNET link system Data is handled in 16 bit units one word Data memory for storing a tar get value of a timer and an ini tial value of a counter Stores by timer counter number 256 words LDO to LD255 1 024 words SVO to SV1023 8 448 words LDO to LD8447 3 072 words SVO to SV3071 Timer Counter elapsed value area Note 1 and Note 3 Data memory for storing the elapsed value during opera tion of a timer counter Stores by timer counter numb
32. 2 a Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 AND lt gt D lt gt S1 S2 aE Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 2 AND gt gt 1 82 4 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 AND gt D gt S1 S2 a Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 1 S2 1 2 AND lt D lt S1 82 HE a Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 AND lt D lt S1 S2 5 JE als Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 S2 1 2 32 bit data compare OR ORD Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 ORD lt gt Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparativ
33. Optical coupler 5 to 24V DC Load voltage range 4 75 to 26 4V DC Maximum load current Maximum surge current 0 1A at 12 to 24V DC 50mA at 5V DC Note 0 3A Off state leakage current 1uA or less On state maximum voltage drop 1 5V or less at 6 to 26 4V DC 0 5V or less at 6V DC or less Response time off on 0 1ms or less on off 0 3ms or less Power supply for Voltage 4 75 to 26 4V DC driving internal circuit Current 130mA or less at 24V DC Surge absorber Zener diode Fuse ratings None Common method Output points per common 32 points common Common specifi cations Internal current consumption at 5V DC 150mA or less Operating indicator 32 dot LED display lit when on switching External connection method Connector two 40 pin Weight Approx 120g next page 2 64 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 11 1 O Mixed Units Specifications ia Notes e With a periodical interrupt function ims it is possible to read an on pulse input signal with a minimum pulse width of 0 4ms For detailed information about the on pulse catch input func tion section 2 11 5 Keep the number of input and output points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as de termined by the in
34. noua feu13 U S G c T 5 RAR ok gt ide sd g To 4 oN amp Lee 9 O gt 5 JO a 6 9 O Ji The COM pins of each connector are connected internally 2 14 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 3 Expansion Memory Unit and ROM for FP2 CPU 2 3__ Expansion Memory Unit and ROM for FP2 CPU Expansion Memory Unit Parts Terminology Q Mounting knob 2 Connector rear side 3 ROM IC socket for FP2 EM3 FP2 EM6 and FP2 EM7 Install the optional memory FROM or EPROM Type of Expansion Memory Unit Part number Description FP2 EM1 FP2 EM2 FP2 EM3 FP2 EM6 FP2 EM7 aaa Available Available Available Not Not Writes the I O comments re nee on available available marks and block comments in flash ROM 128k byte 128k byte 512k byte the program to the FP2 CPU Calendar Available Available Available Not Not Allows operations using the cal timer func available available endar timer function tion Expansion Not Available Available Available Not Increases the program memory RAM available available from approx 16K to approx 32K Also enables use of the trace function ROM IC Not Not Available Available Available Enables the program to be co socket available available pied to ROM for ROM opera tion Type of RO
35. or S14 1 1 gt S2 1 2 4 4 STF gt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 A STF gt m P Si S24 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 1 S2 1 2 4 4 STF lt mF S1 S2 4 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S 1 lt S2 1 S2 d d STF lt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 1 S2 1 2 4 4 Floating point type real number data compare AND ANF Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 4 4 ANF lt gt Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 2 1 4 ANF gt Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 4 4 ANF gt Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition
36. trace stops F157 Time addition CADD S1 S2 The time after S2 1 S2 P157 PCADD D elapses from the time of S1 2 9 SAlalalalaloa 1 1 S1 is stored in D 2 D 1 ki D F158 Time CSUB S1 S2 The time that results from P158 subtraction PCSUB D subtracting S2 1 S2 from the l lololololo time S1 2 S1 1 S1 is stored 4 in D 2 D 1 D F159 Serial port MTRN S n D This is used to send data to an P159 communication PMTRN external device through the zlxlololo 4 4 specified CPU COM port or MCU E j z j SZ 2 COM port F161 MCU serial port MRCV S D1 Data is received from external P161 reception PMRCV D2 equipment via the COM port of 7 hX a 9 the specified MCU BIN arithmetic instruction F160 Double word DSQR S D P160 32 bit data PDSQR S gt D 7 x O Q oa a a square root High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FPO FP e FO High speed MV S Performs high speed counter and counter and DT9052 Pulse output controls according Pulse output to the control code specified by 510 controls S The control code is stored in DT9052 1 Change and DMV S Transfers S 1 S to high speed read of the DT9044 counter and Pulse output elapsed 7 O elapsed value value area of high speed DT9044 Transfers value in high speed counter and D counter and Pulse output elapsed 7 O Pulse output value area to D 1 D F166 High speed HC1S n S Yn Turns output Yn on when the counter outpu
37. 0 not executing 1 executing cess 448 to 463 Step ladder pro Example A A DT9089 DT90089 Bit position 15 12 11 87 4 3 0 aara ama dad gt DT 0800T90080 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 010 0 010 0 0 1 DT9090 DT90090 cess 480 to 495 Step ladder pro Since bit position 0 of ei eal ashe cess 496 to 511 DT9080 DT90080 is 1 step ladder Step ladder pro process 320 is executing DT9092 DT90092 cess 512 to 527 Step ladder pro A programming tool software can be DT9093 DT90093 cess 528 to 543 used to write data Step ladder pro DT9094 DT90094 cess 544 to 559 Step ladder pro DT9095 DT90095 cess 560 to 575 Step ladder pro DT9096 DT90096 cess 576 to 591 Step ladder pro DT9097 DT90097 cess 592 to 607 Step ladder pro DT9098 DT90098 cess 608 to 623 Step ladder pro DT9099 DT90099 cess 624 to 639 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address eee Name Descriptions neado iid FP3 FP2SH E ing ing FP10SH Step ladder pro DT9100 DT90100 cess 640 to 655 Step ladder pro DT9101 DT90101 cess 656 to 671 Step ladder pro DT9102 DT90102 cess 672 to 687 Step ladder pro DT9103 DT90103 cess 688 to 703 Step ladder pro DT9104 DT90104 cess 704 to 719 Step ladd
38. 6 30 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 8 FP2SH IC Memory Card Operation for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 6 8 2 Creating Files for Automatically Run Programs In order to automatically execute programs stored on the card when the power supply is turned on the following procedure must be used to convert the programs to programs that will run automatically Procedure 1 On the FPWIN GR tool software menu select the follow ing Tool gt IC Card Service gt Auto Run File Conversion 2 Select the program to be started up automatically 3 Select the destination to which the program is to be stored after it is converted Auto Run File Conversion Select the destina kd E tek omens I AN ol Fee al Lox Fesolbpe F y d 4 An auto run file is created and a confirmation message displayed A AutoRun file AUTOEXEC SPG was created in the specified folder The auto run file created in this procedure can be read using the various IC card menus The following shows the screen displayed for Copy File to IC Card Flash Memory Select File Copy File gt IC Card Flash Mem Kd EA TEE EE ool el Fone Fa Files of type FPN cr NPST GR Fie fp epg 5 Cancel cc ll 6 31 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH
39. 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation lt 2 e220 cc sheen is eek ek eee eek ee 6 19 iv Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Table of Figures 6 7 1 ROM Operation Function 0000 cece eee eee 6 19 6 7 2 ROM Operation Method 0 cece eee eee eee 6 20 6 7 3 Precautions When Operating the ROM 6 21 6 7 4 Checking the ROM Contents While Using RAM Operation 6 22 6 7 5 Sending Data from the RAM to the FROM 6 23 6 7 6 Writing Data to the ROM AFP5209 only the FP2 C2 can be installed sonc stale kd ie Be ees oe eee 6 25 6 7 7 Writing Data to the ROM Using the FPWIN GR 6 27 6 8 FP2SH IC Memory Card Operation for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 6 29 6 8 1 Operating Using the IC Memory Card 2 0005 6 29 6 8 2 Creating Files for Automatically Run Programs 6 31 6 8 3 How the IC Memory Card is Operated 0005 6 32 6 8 4 Transferring Data From the RAM to the IC Memory Card 6 33 Chapter 7 IC Memory Card 7 1 Using the IC Memory Card 000 c cece 7 3 7 1 1 Types of IC Memory Cards 0 06 c cee ee 7 3 7 1 2 Using the IC Memory Card 0 00 eee eee eee 7 4 7 2 Formatting and Erasing lt scicusctecamenece base ewees eas ea teaoiae vast 7 6 7 2 1 Program Memory Field and Expanded Memory Field 7 6 7 2 2
40. 8 192 points YO to Y511F Internal relay R Note 1 Relay which turns on or off only within pro gram 4 048 points RO to R252F 14 192 points RO to R886F Link relay Note 1 This relay is a shared relay used for MEWNET link system 2 048 points LO to L127F 10 240 points LO to L639F Timer Notes 1 and 2 If a TM instruction has timed out the con tact with the same number turns on Counter Notes 1 and 2 If a CT instruction has counted up the contact with the same number turn on 1 024 points TO to T999 C1000 to C1023 3 072 points TO to T2999 C3000 to C3071 Pulse relay This relay is used to turn on only for one scan duration programmed with the OT and OT instructions 1 024 points PO to P63F 2 048 points PO to P127F Error alarm relay If turned on while the unit is running this relay stores the history in a dedicated buff er Program this relay so that it is turned on at the time of abnormality 2 048 points E0 to E2047 Special internal relay Relay which turns on or off based on spe cific conditions and is used as a flag 176 points R9000 to R910F 176 points R9000 to R910F 10 10 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Specifications Item 10 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants Function Numbering
41. 8 448 words Timer counter set value area SV 1 024 words 3 072 words 3 072 words Timer counter elapsed value area EV 1 024 words 3 072 words 3 072 words Index registers 10 to ID 14 words 14 words x 16 banks 14 words x 16 banks Comment input function Optional function Built in Internal function Optional function Clock calendar function Optional function Built in Internal function Built in Internal function ROM operation function Optional function FP2 C2L FP2 C2 Optional function FP2 C2P FP2 C3P Built in Internal function Optional function xii Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Table of Figures Compatibility of FP2SH and FP2 and Precautions Hardware Compatibility Most of the units and related products used with the FP2SH can be used with the FP2 but the following differences should be noted Some optional memory units cannot be used The only memory unit that can be used with the FP2SH CPU FP2 C2 or FP2 C2L is the Part number FP2 EM7 or Model number AFP2208 The FP2 memory units Part numbers FP2 EM1 FP2 EM2 FP2 EM3 and FP2 EM6 cannot be used The types of optional ROMs are different The only ROM that can be used with the FP2SH CPU unit FP2 C2 is the Model number AFP5208 or AFP5209 The nonv
42. OOOOOOOO 00000000 5 to 24V DC 5 to 24V DC j INTO jo j jo ir j j a o o gt jo ro Ss 6 Bis ajr Bis als HOOHOHOHOHDOHOOMOOOOO OHGOOSO OHOMOHOODSOeOOORAHOOOOHO a DHOOO MDQOQOOQHDOQQOOOHOHOO a a amp a a OOOOOOOO OOOOOOOO OOOOOOOO rr Sle 8 DHO D QODOOQDOQHDOAANQDO OOOO Although amp and terminals are connected internally with the same connector It is rec ommended that they also be connected externally For more information regarding the applicable connectors and terminals refer to sec tion 4 4 1 2 54 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 11 1 O Mixed Units Specifications 2 11 1 O Mixed Units Specifications 2 11 1 32 point Type DC Input 32 point Type Transistor NPN Output Unit Specifications tem i eseription i Part number FP2 XY64D2T Input specifica tions Insulation method Optical coupler Rated input voltage 24V DC Rated input current Approx 4 3mA at 24V DC Input impedance Approx 5 6kQ2 Input voltage range 20 4 to 26 4V DC Min on voltage Min on current 19 2V 4mA Max off voltage Max off current 5 0V 1 5mA Response time off on 0 2ms or less on off 0 3ms or less Common method Input points per common 32 point
43. Operation settings when communication error occurs in the MEWNET F system 27 Stop Stop continuation Operation settings when error occurs in the slave station of the MEWNET F system 28 Stop Stop continuation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Item ads Name perau Descriptions ress value Operation time setting for Oto 9228 HS 29 comMm nication 240 us If the response of the connected processing programmable display is show please make the value bigger Time out time setting of 30 system watching dog 100 ms 0 4 to 640 ms timer Multi frame communication time gi setdngs Inthe computer eso nis 1046819175 nis link and communication time setting for data sending buffer Time setting Time out time setting for for the F145 SEND P145 FP2SH RECV P146 PRECV FP10SH 32 F152 RMRD P152 10000 ms 10 to 81917 5 ms PRMRD and F153 RMWT P153 PRMWT instructions 33 Effective time setting for 163837 5 2500 to 163837 5 ms monitoring ms 0 to 640 ms Scans once each specified time Constant scan time 9 ms interval 34 setting Normal Set 0 Normal scan scan Setting time can be obtained using the formula Set time Set value x 0 1 ms Multi frame Bt ona ete 6500 ms_ 10 0 to 8190 0 ms settings in the computer link Time out time setting for the F145
44. P138 utes and sec PHMSS data of S 1 S to seconds data and 5 4lololololc onds to the converted data is stored in D 1 D i nn pp seconds data F139 Seconds to SHMS S D Converts the seconds data of S 1 S P139 hours PSHMS to hour minute and second data 5 Aen aeli e eave es minutes and and the converted data is stored in 4 i seconds data D 1 D F140 Carry flag STC Turns on the carry flag R9009 1 nalala lale P140 R9009 set PSTC Al aa a e set alt F141 Carry flag CLC Turns off the carry flag R9009 1lolololololo P141 R9009 reset PCLC ene ka F142 Watching WDT S The time allowable scan time for the P142 dog timer PWDT system of watching dog timer is 3 xIxXx xIx x O update changed to S x 0 1 ms for that scan F143 Partial I O IORF D1 D2 Updates the I O from the number P143 update PIORF specified by D1 to the number 6 O O 0 0 0 0 specified by D2 F144 Serial data TRNS S n The COM port received flag R9038 is communica set to off to enable reception 51olxlxlxlolc tion control Beginning at S n bytes of the data 2 a E registers are sent from the COM port F145 Data send SEND S1 S2 Sends the data to another station in the lxlxixlxlolo P145 PSEND D N network MEW NET via link unit a eee p F146 Data receive RECV S1 S2 Receives the data to another station alxixixtlxlolo P146 PRECV N D in the network MEWNET via lin
45. SV Timer counter 3 072 words elapsed value area EV Index registers 14 words x 16 banks I0 to ID 10 8 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Specifications Differential points 10 1 Specifications FP2SH CPU FP2 C2L AFP2221 FP2 C2 AFP2231 FP2 C2P AFP2235 FP2 C3P AFP2255 Unlimited number of points Auxiliary timer Unlimited number of points down type timer 0 01 to 327 67s Shift register Master control relay points MCR Max 887 points 256 points For FP2 C3P 1st program 256 points 2nd program 256 points Number of labels JP and LOOP 256 points For FP2 C3P 1st program 256 points 2nd program 256 points Number of step ladder 1 000 steps For FP2 C3P 1st program only Number of subroutine 100 subroutines Number of interrupt program 25 program Comment input function Available internal function Clock calendar function Available year month day hour minute second and day of week Note 5 Link functions Self diagnostic functions Inter PLC link computer link remote programming modem and data transfer Watchdog timer memory malfunction detection I O malfunction detection back up battery malfunction detection program syntax check etc Other functions ROM operation function Note 6 forced input output interrupt p
46. Scan time required for program execution exceeds the setting of the system watching dog timer System Check the program and modify it so that watching Selec the program can execute a scan within the dog timer table specified time error Selection of operation status using system register24 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 E43 Slave The time required for slave station station connection exceeds the setting of the system connecting Selec Tegister 35 E44 time error Selection of operation status using system AJAJA for table register25 MEWNET F to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 system Operation became impossible when a high level instruction was executed Selection of operation status using system register26 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO The address of operation error can be confirmed in either special data registers Operation Selec DT9017 and DT9018 or DT90017 and error table DT90018 It varies according to the model to be used DT9017 DT9018 FP e FPO FPOR FPO mode DT90017 DT90018 FP FP X FPOR FPOR mode FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function E45 A Available Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Error code Name Oper
47. are stored in ascending order the smallest 8 X X XIXJOJO word is first or descending order the largest word is first F354 Scaling of FSCAL S1 S2 Scaling linearization on a real P354 real number PFSCAL D number data table is performed and wzlxlo AJAJAJA data the output Y to an input value X i 1 2 3 3 is calculated O Available X Not available A Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FPZ 32k type 2 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 1 13 or later 3 This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net x 2 o Num Name Boolean S Description Ey E S iy Al a ber rand laele E leS m a it Time series processing instruction F355 PID processing PID S PID processing is performed depending on the control value mode and parameter specified ai ad a a by S to S 2 and S 4 to S 10 E and the result is stored in the S 3 F356 Easy PID EZPID S1 Temperature control PID can be S2 easily performed using the image 9 9 x S3 S4 of a temperature controller Compare instructions F373 16 bit data DTR S D If the data in the 16 bit area P373 revision PDTR specified by S has changed detection since the previous execution inter
48. went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH DT90408 DT90409 DT90410 A N A DT90412 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address are Name Descriptions acca tad a FP3 FP2SH ing ing FP10SH Fifteenth alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH DT90415 Sixteenth error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH DT90416 Seventeenth The error alarm relay number which went error alarm on is stored To reset the specified error relay which j l relay use an RST instruction only DT90417 went on oe y y Available Relay number PLC FP2SH p E12 to reset FP10SH A N A X1 Eighteenth Leori Rs error alarm relay which DT90418 went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Nineteenth error alarm relay which DT90419 went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address ie Name Descriptions Reads wit FP3 FP2SH ing ing FP10SH Time at which the first error alarm relay DT90401 went on for minute and second data Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Time at which the f
49. x X conversion D F251 ASCII gt binary ATOB S1 Converts multiple ASCII data to data conversion S2 n multiple binary data 12 x O 4 OIXJ X D F252 ASCII data ACHK S1 Checks the ASCII data strings to be wlx lo Aly x check S2 n used in F251 ATOB instruction ae ees 2 i Character strings instructions F257 Comparing SCMP S1 These instructions compare two P257 character S2 specified character strings and 1olxlololololo strings output the judgment results to a Aan a special internal relay F258 Character string SADD S1 These instructions couple one wlxlololololc P258 coupling S2 D character string with another ite is j F259 Number of LEN S D These instructions determine the P259 characters in a number of characters in a character 6 x O O O0 0 0 character string string F260 Search for SSRC S1 The specified character is searched 17olxlololololo P260 character string S2 D _ in a character string iie aie e ce a a F261 Retrieving data RIGHT S1 These instructions retrieve a P261 from character S2 D specified number of characters from sixlolololol strings right the right side of the character string C gt side F262 Retrieving data LEFT S1 These instructions retrieve a P262 from character S2 D specified number of characters from g x lololololo strings left the left side of the character string ne hoe le side F263 Retrieving a MIDR S1 These instructions retrieve a P263
50. 1 O points construction Using Backplanes H type Max 512 points 8 modules Expanded Using Backplanes Max 1 600 points 25 modules construction Using Backplanes H type Max 2 048 points 82 modules Using remote Max 8 192 points using S LINK or MEWNET F system 1 0 system Program Internal memory FP2 C2 FP2 C2P approx 60K steps capacity FP2 C8P approx 120K steps Using expansion memory unit Number of Basic 95 types instructions instructions High level 434 types instructions Operation Basic From 0 03us per instruction speed instructions nee High level From 0 06us per instruction instructions Operation External input 8 192 points Note 1 memory relays X ponis for External output 8 192 points Note 1 y relays Y Internal relays 14 192 points Note 2 R Timer counter Total 3 072 points Note 2 T C Timer units of ims 10ms 100ms and 1s counts up to 32 767 x each unit Counter 1 to 32 767 counts Link relays L 10 240 points Notes 2 and 3 Pulse relays P 2 048 points Note 2 Alarm relays E 2 048 points Note 2 Operation Data registers 10 240 words Note 2 memory DT points for memory areas File registers FP2 C2L 32 765 words FL FP2 C2 FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 32 765 words x 3 banks Note 2 Link data 8 448 words Notes 2 and 4 registers LD Timer counter 3 072 words set value area
51. FP10SH Loop operation mode PIS194 P TA0199 Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Loop input status DANBA TANTAS Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Note For MEWNET W system available PLC type FP2 FP2SH FP3 FP10SH For MEWNET P system available PLC type FP3 FP10SH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address dc Name Descriptions Be ad Welk FP3 FP2SH Ing Ing FP10SH MEWNET H The link status for the MEWNET H link is link status monitored as link unit Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits D19195 P T0129 number H DT9195 DT90195 link 1 Note1 i ae MEWNET H_ The link status for the MEWNET H link is link status monitored as pT9196 DT90196 link unit Higher 8 bits _ Lower 8 bits A N A number H link 2 Note1 nar We MEWNET H The link status for the MEWNET H link is link status monitored as link unit Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits DT9197 DT90197 number H link 3 Notet ee DT9198 DT90198 Not used DT9199 DT90199 Not used NA bis Station number where the send area DT9200 DT90200 address for the PC PLC link is overlapped with this station is stored here Test result in the optical transmission path DT9201 DT90201 test mode for MEWNET P link system is
52. IC memory card AFP2209 The battery has been removed from the battery holder before shipment Install the bat tery before mounting the CPU unit 1 Move to the lock switch to the RELEASE position to ward the battery holder RELEASE position Lock switch WH a 2 Remove the battery holder 4 13 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 1 Installation 3 Place the battery in the battery holder with the side with a sign facing up CO 4 Insert the battery holder with the battery all the way seated in the IC memory card The lock swich is automatically back to the LOCK posi tion when removing the battery holder In this state insert the battery holder all the way seated Confirm the lock switch is in the LOCK position 4 14 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 2 Power Supply Wiring 4 2 Power Supply Wiring 4 2 1 Wiring of Power Supply Pin layout of power supply unit FP2 PSA1 is used for the example below Power supply terminals Supplies 100 to 120V AC Use separate systems for the power devices and the input devices Use 2mm AWG14 twisted pair cable or larger LS 100 120V 0 4A 50 60Hz Ground terminal Use an
53. M4 screw C y 4 6 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 1 Installation Installation to a DIN Rail Procedure 1 Attach the railing on the rear of the backplane to the DIN rail 2 Push the backplane in the direction of the arrow as il lustrated below so that it attaches securely ry Removal from a DIN Rail Procedure 1 Place the tip of a flat headed screwdriver into the slot for the DIN rail attachment lever 2 Pull out the DIN rail attachment lever with the flat headed screwdriver and remove the backplane from the DIN rail ry A 4 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 1 Installation 4 1 2 2 Units Be sure to install the unit according to the following procedures Notes 1 Do not remove the dust proofing label that is attached to the upper portion of the unit until the unit is completely installed and the wiring is completed However be sure to remove the dust proofing label prior to operation section 4 3 3 Complete the backup battery installation and operation condi tion switches setting prior to installing the CPU sections 2 2 1 and 4 1 4 FP2 backplane With the CPU
54. Management of an SRAM type of IC Memory Card Before using the card Format IC Card The IC memory card is formatted and a program memory field is assured in which pro grams can be saved The remaining area assured as the program memory field then serves as an expanded memory area Writing data to the IC memory card Download Program to IC Card Programs are written from the FPWIN GR to the IC memory card Copy File to IC Card The contents of a floppy disk or hard disk are copied to the IC memory card This func tion can also be used to select multiple programs and write them to the IC memory card as a batch all at once 7 25 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH 7 5 Othe Menus Related to Tool Software r file management menus Delete File This deletes programs from the IC memory card This function can also be used to se lect multiple programs and delete them as a batch all at once Rename File This is used to change the file name or title of a program on the IC memory card Change File Attribute This is used for dedicated reading of programs stored on the IC memory card or to change the attributes of a hidden file Writing to an FROM Type IC Memory Card Copy File to IC Card Programs are written to an FROM type of IC memory card by cop
55. Note 1 Max 0 2 ms delay in Ki 1 to 5ms reception of external SSeS Reception of external signal at I O mixed unit Signa the CPU resulting from the periodical interrupt I O update Note 2 Ie signal on St l Eoo ea reception status of Interval of periodical interrupt set in the program Notes 1 Reception of external signal at the I O mixed unit Within 0 2ms of the leading edge of the external signal the I O mixed unit will go on This on status will be held for 1 to 5ms the length of time the status is held will depend on the unit 2 Reception of input at CPU that is executing a periodical inter rupt The signal from the I O mixed unit is read by the periodical in terrupt 2 68 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 I O Allocation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net I O Allocation FP2 FP2SH 3 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH I O Allocation 3 1 Fundamentals of I O Allocation 3 1 Fundamentals of I O Allocation 3 1 1 I O Allocation and Registering I O allocation is the process of assigning an I O number to each unit Registering refers to registering the I O allocations in the system register of the CPU 3 1 1 1 Types of I O Allocation
56. Option menu select Allocate I O Map 2 Click Mount button The following message appears and then select Yes the senate VO allecation in te coment mount Saio ol unis Sure Led The appearance of the allocation of the mounted units will be read into and displayed on the FPWIN GR screen At the same time the contents of allocation will be registered in the system registers of CPU 3 14 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH I O Allocation 3 4 Automatic Allocation 3 4 Automatic Allocation 3 4 1 Using Automatic Allocation After turning on the power I O numbers are determined by the I O unit installation posi tions and assigned in order beginning from the left side of the CPU backplane If an expansion backplane has been added on the FP2 backplane the number of slots for I O units on the CPU backplane is taken as 16 slots The FP2 backplane H type occupies 8 slots only For a slot with no unit mounted an equivalent of 16 points 16E is allocated In the case of automatic allocation I O numbers are assigned based on the installed I O units each time the power is turned on eS Note With automatic allocation the contents of allocation are not reg istered to the system register 3 4 1 1 Example of Automatic Allocation The I O numbers in the illustration are the allocated I O numbers using automati
57. PWBSL D2 D1 and D2 to the left 5 O O O 0 0 0 bit O Available X Not available A Not available partially Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net x 72 Z oe E Num Name Boolean SS Description Ski olea al a ber rand l aujejejtj F ma Q FIFO instructions F115 FIFO buffer define FIFT n D The n words beginning from D are s5 xlololololc P115 PFIFT defined in the buffer F116 Data read from FIFR S D The oldest data beginning from S P116 FIFO buffer PFIFR that was written to the buffer is read 5 xX 1O 0 0 0 0 and stored in D F117 Data write into FIFW S D The data of S is written to the buffer sixlololololo P117 FIFO buffer PFIFW starting from D aie ian Pee e a Basic function instructions F118 UP DOWN counter UDC S D Counts up or down from the value preset in S and stores the elapsed 5 0 0 0 0 0J O value in D F119 Left right shift LRSR D1 Shifts one bit to the left or right with register D2 the area between D1 and D2 as 6 O 0 0 0 0 0 the register Data rotate instructions F120 16 bit data right ROR D n Rotates the n bits in data of D to 5l olololololo P120 rotate PROR the right dee We ole celle F121 16 bit dat
58. RAM Part number AFC8801 CR2450 or equivalent i Note The settings of the operation condition switches become active when the power is turned on CPU with 64 Points Input Specifications tem description S y Number of input point 64 points Insulation method Optical coupler Rated input voltage 24V DC Rated input current Approx 4 3mA at 24V DC Input impedance Approx 5 6kQ2 Input voltage range 20 4 to 26 4V DC Min on voltage Min on current 19 2V 4mA Max off voltage Max off current 5 0V 1 5mA Response time off on 0 2ms or less on off 0 3ms or less Input points per common 32 points per common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal Operating indicator 32 dot LED display lit when on switching External connection method Two 40 pin connectors re Note Keep the number of input points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the input voltage and ambient temperature 64 Number of 46 points which are simultaneously on 50 55 122 131 Ambient temperature C F 2 13 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH CN2 Parts and Functions FP2 CPU 2 2 Internal Circuit Diagram 24V DC Pin Layout Q
59. Rewiring If there is a wiring mistake or the wire is incorrectly pressure connected the contact pull er pin provided with the fitting can be used to remove the contact Press the housing against the pressure connection tool so that the contact puller pin comes in contact with this section Rated current dia 1 5 to dia 1 1 Twisted wire of 12 pcs 0 18 Twisted wire Note The contact suitable for AWG 22 or AWG 24 is supplied with the product For purchasing a contact suitable for AWG 26 or AWG 28 specify AFP7231FP Connector for Wire pressed Terminal Cable 5 Composition of accessories Unit type Semi cover Contact 32 point input unit 32 point output unit 2 pcs 5 pins x 8 64 point input unit 64 point output unit 4 pcs 5 pins x 16 32 point input 32 point output unit Pressure Connection Tool Part number AXY52000FP 4 25 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units Assembly of Connector for Wire pressed Terminal Cable The wire end can be directly press fitted without removing the wire s insulation saving labor Procedure 1 Bend the contact back from the carrier and set it in the pressure connection tool 2 Insert the wire without removing its insulation until it stops and lightly grip the tool 3 4 4 26 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888
60. S3 1 S3 wraixlololololo control S3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D i When S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 lt or S2 1 S2 0 0 gt D 1 D F349 Floating point FZONE S1 S2 When S3 1 S3 lt 0 0 P349 type data PFZONE S3 D S3 1 S3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D zone control When S3 1 S3 0 0 0 0 D 1 17 x a lie ea ies D x When S3 1 S3 gt 0 0 S3 1 3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D F350 Floating point FMAX S1 S2 Searches the maximum value in the P350 type data PFMAX D real number data table between the maxi mum area selected with S1 and S2 rae ee ae ae a _ value and stores it in the D 1 D The i i address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 F351 Floating point FMIN S1 S2 Searches the minimum value in the P351 type data PFMIN D real number data table between the mini mum area selected with S1 and S2 Bell ede Se se we line value and stores it in the D 1 D The f address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 F352 Floating point FMEAN S1 S2 The total value and the mean value P352 type data total PFMEAN D of the real number data from the and mean area selected with S1 to S2 are 8lxlxixixlolo values obtained The total value is stored in i i i the D 1 D and the mean value is stored in the D 3 D 2 F353 Floating point FSORT S1 S2 The real number data from the area P353 type data sort PFSORT S3 specified by S1 to S2
61. SEND P145 PSEND F146 RECV P146 PRECV saan 32 F152 RMRD P152 2000 ms 10 0 to 8190 0 ms for FP2 PRMRD and F153 RMWT P153 PRMWT instructions 33 i eles 10000 us 800 0 to 52428 0 us 0 0 to 640 ms Constant scan time Scans once each specified time 34 P Normal setting scan interval Set 0 Normal scan Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Item Ada Name Default Descriptions ress value Operation settings when connection time error 25 occurs in the remote Stop Stop continuation slave station Available PLC FP2SH Enabled CPU starts operation after Remote all the salve stations are gt z Enabled recognized VO Operation mode setting f i wait for Disabled CPU starts operation control 35 ple ine pea connec without waiting for slave a ac tion station connections Only effective when registering remote I O allocation 36 alc ee Scan syn Scan asynchronous mode chronous Scan synchronous mode system Size of link 40 Paige usedi 0 to 64 words or commu nication Size of link data 41 registers o 0 to 128 words used for commu nication Send area PC link 0 starting 42 settings for address of 0 ee MEWNET link relay W P link Size of link 43 System relays used ig 0 to 64 words PC link Note for send 0 area setting send ar
62. SGS THOMSON MICROELECTRONICS 6 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 4 Writing to ROM 6 4 2 Writing to EPROM via FROM Preparation Prepare the optional memory FROM FP2 EM4 the optional memory EPROM FP2 EMS5 and the expansion memory unit FP2 EM3 FP2 EM6 or FP2 EM7 Also prepare a commercially available ROM writer Procedure Perform the procedures described in A through D below When writing to EPROM continue on to steps E A Passing the program 1 Pass the program within the CPU Operations using FPWIN GR On the File menu select Upload from PLC and read the program from the PLC On the File menu select Save as and save the pro gram to a disk 2 Turn the power off and remove the CPU from the back plane 3 Install the expansion memory unit FP2 EM3 FP2 EM6 or FP2 EM7 to the CPU Attach the optional memory FROM FP2 EM4 to the expansion memory unit section 2 3 Optional memory FROM Expansion memory unit FP2 CPU 6 10 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 4 Writing to ROM 4 Verify that the SW2 of operation condition switches DIP switches on the back of the CPU are set to RAM opera tion position off
63. display DT9001 DT90001 Not used N A N A Communication The slot number where an erroneous error of unit is installed can be monitored here MEWNET TR 4 on is set in the bit position master unit slot corresponding to the slot number when No 0 to 15 one of the errors below id detected Available PLC Communication error MEWNET TR DT9002 DT90002 FP3 FP10SH master unit Position of When a communication error occurs at abnormal I O the MEWNET TR master unit the bit slot slot No 0 corresponding to the slot no of the unit to 15 will be set on 1 Monitor using binary Available PLC display FP2 FP2SH 1 erroneous MEWNET TR master unit Communication 0 normal Me error of Position of abnormal I O slot MEWNET TR When an error occurs at an I O unit the master unit slot bit corresponding to the slot of the unit No 16 to 31 will be set on 1 Monitor using binary Available PLC display DT9003 DT90003 FP3 FP10SH 1 error 0 normal Position of Bit position 15 21 11 el 22 32 2D abnormal I O SlotNo 15 21 11 817 413 0 slot slot No 16 to 31 Bit position j5 12 1 8 7_ Al3 0 Available PLC SliotNo 51 2827 _ 2423 2019 _ 16 FP2 FP2SH orooro TT TT TTT TTT TTI Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address APA Name Descr
64. in a 32 bit data PDSHR area specified by D 1 D to the 5 xX O O O 0 C right F103 Left shift of n bitsin DSHL D n Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data 5 xlololololo P103 a 32 bit data PDSHL area specified by D 1 D to the left F105 Right shift of one BSR D Shifts the one digit of data of D to P105 hexadecimal digit 4 PBSR the right 3 O O0 0 0 0 C bit F106 Left shift of one BSL D Shifts the one digit of data of D to P106 hexadecimal digit PBSL the left 3 O O 0 0 0 C 4 bit F108 Right shift of BITR D1 Shifts the n bits of data range by z7I xlololololc P108 multiple bits n bits PBITR D2 n D1 and D2 to the right fice eae a F109 Left shift of multiple BITL D1 Shifts the n bits of data range by 7x lololololo P109 bits n bits PBITL D2 n D1 and D2 to the left i F110 Right shift of one WSHR D1 Shifts the one word of the areas by 5 lolololololo P110 word 16 bit PWSHR D2 D1 and D2 to the right F111 Left shift of one WSHL D1 Shifts the one word of the areas by 5 lolololololc P111 word 16 bit PWSHL D2 D1 and D2 to the left ee F112 Right shift of one WBSR D1 Shifts the one digit of the areas by P112 hexadecimal digit 4 PWBSR D2 D1 and D2 to the right 5 O O O0 0 0 C bit F113 Left shift of one WBSL D1 Shifts the one digit of the areas by P113 hexadecimal digit 4
65. mode Note When the system registers 46 KO PC link 0 for the link unit with a smaller slot No and PC link 1 for one with a larger slot No When the system registers 46 K1 PC link 1 for the link unit with a smaller slot No and PC link 0 for one with a larger slot No Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Address Name Description Unit Turns on when unit No 1 is communicating properly in the PC R9080 No 1 link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Unit Turns on when unit No 2 is communicating properly in the PC R9081 link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error No 2 occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when unit No 3 is communicating properly in the PC R9082 gnit link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error No 3 occurs or when not in the PC link mode Unit Turns on when unit No 4 is communicating properly in the PC R9083 link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error No 4 g occurs or when not in the PC link mode Unit Turns on when unit No 5 is communicating properly in the PC R9084 link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error No 5 occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when unit No 6 is communicating properly in the PC
66. www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 11 Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 2 FP2 CPU 2 2 2 CPU with 64 Points Input FP2 C1D Parts Terminology and Functions Status indicator LEDs page 2 9 display the operating condition and error statuses 2 Initialize test switch m page 2 9 is used to clear the errors initializes the operation memory and set the test operation 3 Mode selector page 2 10 is used to change the operation mode of the PLC 4 COM port RS232C page 2 11 is used to connect a computer or general serial devices Tool port RS232C is used to connect a programming tool 6 Input indicators 32 points Indicate the input on off states Selector for input indicators switch between the first 32 points and second 32 points of the 64 points input LED display Input connectors CN1 XO to X1F CN2 X20 to X3F 9 Operation condition switches page 2 10 are used to set the baud rate of the programming tool to select the program memory and to select the writing operation for the program memory w next page 2 12 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 2 FP2CPU Memory backup battery for backup of the internal memory
67. 16X to slots 0 through 7 16Y to slots 8 through 15 and 16X to slots 16 through 23 SE me CE Tki I 4 cl 5 T rx Jamik we wh als E 5 T ka 3 13 na 7 g A r jil a 3 Hri iit aaner aa ae ana aaa Registering contents of allocation Write the contents of allocation to the system register of the CPU 1 On the Online menu select Online Edit Mode 2 On the File menu select Download to PLC The program is transferred to the PLC programmable controller and the contents of allocation are simultaneously written to the PLC as part of its system register settings 3 12 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH I O Allocation 3 3 I O Mount Allocation 3 3 I O Mount Allocation 3 3 1 Using I O Mount Allocation The I O allocation state of mounted units is directly registered If an expansion backplane has been added on the FP2 backplane the number of slots for I O units on the CPU backplane is taken as 16 slots The FP2 backplane H type occupies 8 slots only For a slot with no unit mounted an equivalent of 16 points 16E is allocated 3 3 1 1 Example of I O Mount Allocation The I O number in the diagram is the result of execution of I O mount allocation CPU
68. 3 2 Arbitrary Allocation 3 2 3 2 When Using FP2 Backplane H Type Backup battery expansion memory CPU unit Power supply unit I O unit Basic backplane o Basic backplane Power supply unit 1 module I O units 16 point type input 8 units a o 0O A fe o0 Expansion cable SOM port Tool port Expansion backplane Power supply unit 1 O unit lo Expansion backplane No 1 Power supply unit 1 module I O units 16 point type output 8 units loo OO o0 Expansion backplane Board No setting switch 1 Board No setting switch 2 Expansion backplane No 2 Power supply unit 1 module I O units 16 point type input 8 units o0 3 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net I O Allocation FP2 FP2SH 3 2 Arbitrary Allocation Registering with programming tool software FPWIN GR Create allocations 1 In No of Slots add 16 to the number of modules used on the ex pansion backplane and enter the result OE is assigned to each of the specified slots In this case enter 24 CE wii wi ei wi wi we Wi wo S ess MEDEF TADAO iiS EEF W ie Efi TE E 1T aE OE l wW Wi w0 w Wo Wa wd w 2 Assign input X or output Y according to the I O units to be installed in each slot In the example assign
69. 32 point connector type 24V DC FP2 X32D2 64 point connector type 24V DC FP2 X64D2 Output unit Relay output 6 point terminal type FP2 Y6R 16 point terminal type FP2 Y16R Transistor output 16 point terminal NPN type FP2 Y16T 32 point connector NPN type FP2 Y32T 64 point connector NPN type FP2 Y64T 16 point terminal PNP type FP2 Y16P 32 point connector PNP type FP2 Y32P 64 point connector PNP type FP2 Y64P I O mixed unit 32 point 24V DC input 32 point connector NPN output type FP2 XY64D2T FP2 XY64D7T 32 point 24V DC input 32 point connector PNP output type FP2 XY64D2P FP2 XY64D7P Intelligent unit Analog input unit FP2 AD8VI FP2 AD8X FP2 RTD Analog output unit FP2 DA4 High speed NPN FP2 HSCT counter unit PNP FP2 HSCP Pulse I O unit NPN FP2 PXYT PNP FP2 PXYP Positioning unit 2 axis type FP2 PP2 4 axis type FP2 PP4 Positioning unit 2 axis type Transistor output type FP2 PP21 Multifunction Line driver output type FP2 PP22 type 4 axis type Transistor output type FP2 PP41 Line driver output type FP2 PP42 Positioning unit 2 axis type Transistor output type FP2 PP2T Interpolation Line driver output type FP2 PP2L type 4 axis type Transistor output type FP2 PP4T Line driver output type FP2 PP4L Serial data unit FP2 SDU Multi communication unit Main unit FP2 MCU Communication block FP2 CB232 FP2 CB422 FP2 CB485 Computer communication unit FP2 CCU
70. 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 32 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units Flat Cable Connection Diagram for the 32 point Type I O Units 64 point Type I O Units and I O Mixed Unit o 8 ie Cable no 1 side Cable no 1 side Flat Cable Connector Rema Set of flat cable connector AFP2802 Flat cable connector with strain relief pitch of 1 27mm 2 pieces Suitable Wires annene wire Pitch Rated current current Ser REE 27mm 7pcs dia 0 127 4 33 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 5 Wiring the Terminal Block Type I O Units 4 5 __ Wiring the Terminal Block Type I O Units 4 5 1 Wiring the Terminal Block Type Units Suitable Wires AWG22 to AWG14 0 3mm to 2 0mm2 0 5 to 0 6N m Pressure Connection Terminals M3 5 terminal screws are used for the terminals The following pressure connection ter minals are recommended for the wiring to the terminals Fork type terminal Round type terminal 6mm or less 6mm or less 3 2mm or more 3 2mm or more Example of suitable pressure connection terminal Part number Suitable wire JST Mfg Co Ltd Round type 1 25 MS3 0 25 to 1 65mm2 Fork type 1
71. 4 6 Safety Measures 4 6 2 Momentary Power Failures If the duration of the power failure is less than 10 ms the PLC continues to operate If the duration of the power failure is 10 ms or longer the operation changes depending on the combination of units the power supply voltage and other factors If the PLC con tinues to operate the operation may be the same as that for a power supply reset The duration of the power failure is the time that the power to the power supply unit stops 4 6 3 Alarm Output The alarm output goes on when the watchdog timer is activated by a program error or an error in the hardware itself The alarm output terminal has two relay contacts N O normally open and N C nor mally closed This can be used as an external alarm signal when an error occurs Power supply unit Lamp for alarm signal Watchdog timer The watchdog timer is a program error and hardware error detection timer It goes on when the scan time exceeds 640 ms When the watchdog timer is activated at the same time the ALARM LED lights the ALARM contacts on the power supply unit go on all outputs to the output units are turned off and the unit is put in halted state The system is in a non processing state that includes communications with programming tools as well Sa Note The ALARM contacts of the power supply unit installed on the expansion backplane will not also operate 4 37 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 72
72. 40MB or more AFPS10520 English language Windows Me menu Windows 2000 Upgraded version Windows XP AFPS10520R Windows Vista 1 The upgrade version is not available for Ver 6 2 Ver 6 0 can be upgraded to Ver 6 1 or later free of charge at our web site Type of software os Hard disk capacity Product No Operating system FPWIN GR Ver 6 English lan Windows 2000 100MB or more AFPS50560 guage menu Windows XP Windows Vista amp 1 The upgrade version is not available for Ver 6 2 Ver 6 0 can be upgraded to Ver 6 1 or later free of charge at our web site Type of computer and suitable cable For the connection between a computer RS232C and the control unit RS232C D sub connector cable PC side connector PLC side connector Specifications Product No D sub 9 pin Mini DIN round 5 pin L type 3 m AFC8503 Mini DIN round 5 pin Straight type 3 m AFC8503S ia Note A USB RS232C conversion cable is necessary to connect with a personal computer without a RS232C port using a PC connection cable 1 20 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Overview 1 4 Programming Tools 1 4 3 Tools Needed for ROM Creating When Creating ROM with a Commercially Available ROM Writer with Op tional Memory FROM Necessary tools Q Programming tool software and cable section 1 4 1 Use a commercially available co
73. 41 Bank A 140 to 153 Bank 3 42 to 45 Bank B 154 to 167 Bank 4 56 to 69 Bank C 168 to 181 Bank 5 70 to 83 Bank D 182 to 195 Bank 6 84 to 97 Bank E 196 to 209 Bank 7 98 to 111 Bank F 210 to 223 efault value of hold type area setting Type FP2 FP2SH Area Timer All non hold type Counter All hold type Non hold type 200 words Non hold type 500 words Internal relay WRO to WR199 WRO to WR499 Hold type 53 words Hold type 387 words WR200 to WR252 WR500 to WR886 Data register All hold type File register All hold type Link relay for MEWNET W All hold type Link register for MEWNET W All hold type Index register All hold type Type FP10SH Area Timer All non hold type Counter All hold type Internal relay Non hold type 500 words WRO to WR499 Hold type 387 words WR500 to WR886 Data register All hold type File register All hold type Link relay for MEWNET W P All hold type Link register for MEWNET W P _ All hold type Link relay for MEWNET H All hold type Link register for MEWNET H All hold type Index register for FP10SH All hold type Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net MEWNET W PC link setting For PC link W 0 System registers 40 to 45 For PC link W 1 System registers 50 to 55 Regarding the link relays and link data registers specify the range for communication and divide it up for sending and receiving Starting No Receivin for sending area
74. 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units 4 4 3 Connecting the Terminals CT 2 Connector Terminal Use a 40 pin type CT 2 connector terminal For connecting the terminal to the terminal block use M3 sized pressure connection terminals ia Note If using the CT 2 connector terminal for the input connect be tween the COM terminals If using the CT 2 connector terminal for the output 24V DC should be supplied between and terminals Power is sup plied to drive the internal circuit of the output unit Connect between each the terminals and between each the termi nals CT 2 connector terminal connection diagram for 32 point type and 64 point type I O units and I O mixed units FP2 X32D2 FP2 Y32T FP2 Y32P FP2 X64D2 FP2 Y64T FP2 Y64P FP2 XY64D2T FP2 XY64D2P FP2 XY64D7T FP2 XY64D7P Connector terminal cable N 40 pins 40 pins CT 2 connector terminal 40 pins AYC1140 4 27 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units Correspondence table of 32 point type input unit When a 32 point type input unit is next to the standard type CPU on the right side Terminal Terminal Input aan la
75. 8 edition ACG M320E 7 ARCT1F320E 8 Feb 2009 9 edition ACG M320E 8 ARCT1F320E 9 Mar 2009 10 edition ACG M320E 9 ARCT1F320E 10 Jan 2010 11 edition ACG M320E 10 ARCT1F320E 11 Apr 2011 12 edition ACG M320E 11 ARCT1F320E 12 Sep 2012 13 edition ACG M320E 12 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net
76. Computer settings Set to asynchronous For the setting procedure refer to the operation manual that came with the computer 5 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Procedure Until Operation FP2 FP2SH 5 2 Programming with Programming Tool Software 5 2 2 Configuration of Programming Tool Software Depending on the PLC type and conditions of use it is necessary to set the basic configuration for programming tool software Be sure to set these parameters of con figration before beginning programming 5 2 2 1 Parameters and Setting Methods Select PLC type Select the PLC type that is being used PLC Tite FP SIDHA oF 12 FPO CIDC14 C16 27 FPO CISL 5i FP TH 1i FRY 14 015 OSs FPI Caead ie FPI CSEL 5 FFM CVT 05 FPEM CARCATCRT AW FPH CARL CMTC CITC SK E Kaap Durani Gaii None installed FP2 16k The FP2 EM1 or FP2 EM7 is installed FP2 16k The FP2 EM2 FP2 EM3 or FP2 EM6 is installed FP2 32k FPZSH CPU ype Secon E FP2 C2L FP2SH 32k FP2 C2 FP2 C2P FP2SH 60k FP2 C3P FP2SH 120k After your selection you can change the PLC type 5 6 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Procedure Until Operation 5 2 Programming with Programming Tool Software Communication Settings Select the Network type or communication format In case if RS23
77. Configuration by Number of Slots The building block scheme allows you to combine units as desired Five types of backplanes and Two types of backplanes H types are available for the FP2 FP2SH A variety of input output units can be installed as desired on the back plane Although most of the I O units and intelligent units can be combined freely in the layout you should check the following three points when selecting your units Restrictions on unit types section 1 2 2 1 Limitations on the internal current consumption section 1 2 2 2 Limitations on the number of modules of the backplane page 1 4 FP2 backplane all ic STEF R le ie is S fh als 5m ECE ayer T e00000 12 modules Soa sg Be ESS ES a 14 modules j Seocee FP2 backplane H type DE okm ow 1 Basic backplane 11 modules Expansion backplane 10 modules Following two kinds of backplanes are available 1 FP2 backplane AFP25 2 FP2 backplane H type AFP25 H These two backplanes cannot be used in combination Carefully select the type of backplanes before you order
78. FP2 FP2SH 1 2 Unit Types and Combinations 1 2 2 2 Limitations on Current Consumption Power supply unit Rated current at 5V FP2 PSA1 FP2 PSA2 FP2 PSA3 FP2 PSD2 Internal supply power 5V passes through the bus of P E fd IO Commercially available 3 z ower suppl Power goes from a commercially available AA power supply to each I O unit Internal supply power 5V DC The 5V DC power used for driving the internal circuit of each unit is supplied from the power supply unit through the internal bus of the backplane External supply power 24V DC The 24V DC power supply used as the input power supply of the input units and the output circuit driving power of the output units are supplied from the external terminal of each unit For 24V power supply commercially available power supply equipment is used Combining units and selecting a backplane The current consumed by each unit is shown in the following pages Give consideration to the combination of units so that the rated capacity of 5V DC and 24V DC power supplies should not exceeded Example of current consumption calculation The table below shows the combination of typical units o
79. FP2 Y32T Insulation method Optical coupler Rated load voltage 5 to 24V DC Load voltage range 4 75 to 26 4V DC Maximum load current 0 1A at 12 to 26 4V DC 50mA at 5V DC Note Maximum surge current 0 3A off state leakage current 1A or less on state maximum voltage drop 1V or less at 6 to 26 4V DC 0 5V or less at 6V DC or less Response time off on 0 1ms or less on gt off 0 3ms or less Internal current consumption 130mA or less at 5V DC Power supply for driving Voltage 4 75 to 26 4V DC internal circuit Current 140mA or less at 24V DC Surge absorber Zener diode Fuse ratings None Common method Output points per 32 points common common Operating indicator 32 dot LED display lit when on External connection method Connector MIL type 40 pin Weight Approx 100g i Note The load current will vary depending on the power supply for driving the internal circuit and the ambient temperature Adjust the load current referring to the following range T 24V DC T100 z 32 S Number of 26 4V DC 5 points per S i D 50 common which 20 g are simulta Si neous on 4 75 10 2 26 4 46 55 Power supply for driving 114 8 131 internal circuit V Ambient temperature C F 2 47 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 10 Output Units Sp
80. FP2SH FP10SH DT90405 Fifth error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH DT90406 Sixth error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH DT90407 Seventh error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH The error alarm relay number which went on is stored To reset the specified error alarm relay use an RST instruction only Relay number E12 to reset x1 E12 HHor ra N A Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address FP2 ier Read Writ Descriptions FP3 FP2SH Name pap ing ing FP10SH Eighth error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Ninth error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Tenth error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Eleventh error The error alarm relay number which went alarm relay on is stored To reset the specified error S DT90411 Which went on alarm relay use an RST instruction only Available PLC FP2SH Relay number FP10SH E12 to reset Twelfth error X1 E12 alarm relay f H DF R which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Thirteenth error alarm relay which DT90413 went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Fourteenth error alarm relay which DT90414
81. Fundamentals of I O Allocation 0 000 c cece eee 3 3 3 1 1 I O Allocation and Registering 0 0 cece eee eee 3 3 3 1 1 1 Types of I O Allocation Methods 3 3 3 1 1 2 Precautions Regarding Registering of I O Allocation 3 3 3 1 1 3 How to Count the I O Numbers and Express the Occupied Points ac5 case hac cede e cans neice 3 4 3 1 2 Table of Occupied I O Points by Unit 02005 3 5 3 2 Arbitrary AllOGALION ccd see senner E EES 3 7 3 2 1 Using Arbitrary Allocation 0 0 cece eee 3 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Table of Figures 3 2 2 Allocation Example of CPU Backplane 05 3 7 3 2 3 Allocation Example of Expansion Backplane 3 10 3 2 3 1 When Using FP2 Backplane 3 10 3 2 3 2 When Using FP2 Backplane H Type 3 11 3 3 I O Mount Allocation n aa aaeeeo rnnr nanana 3 13 3 3 1 Using I O Mount Allocation eeen nnana 3 13 3 3 1 1 Example of I O Mount Allocation 3 13 3 3 1 2 Procedure for I O Mount Allocation 3 14 3 4 Automatic Allocation 0 ccc tees 3 15 3 4 1 Using Automatic Allocation 0 0 0 e eee eee 3 15 3 4 1 1 Example of Automatic Allocation 3 15 3 4 1 2 Procedure for Automatic Allocation 3 16 3 5 Procedure for C
82. Methods There are 3 types of allocation methods I O mount allocation arbitrary allocation and automatic allocation I O mount allocation Using the programming tool software NPST GR FPWIN GR the allocation condition of the mounted units is recorded as is to the system register of the CPU Arbitrary allocation The programming tool software NPST GR FPWIN GR is used to create I O allocations and register them in the system register of the CPU In this case no deviations in I O numbers will occur if a unit mounting error was made Automatic allocation If units are installed allocation will take place when the power is turned on based on the states of the installed units i Note Automatic allocation only assigns I O numbers to mounted units It does not register the allocations 3 1 1 2 Precautions Regarding Registering of I O Allocation If registering is not performed when using arbitrary allocation Automatic allocation will be performed and allocation will be based on the state of the installed units If I O registration has already been performed If the registered information is different from the actual state of installation such as when a unit is changed to a different type or the installation position is changed normal operation will not take place In this case perform registration once again 3 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net I O Allo
83. Name Boolean Symbol Description EJ 5 S amp al a 0 JAJIL L D u N Data compare instructions 16 bit ST p 5192 _ Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 5 olololololo data bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 i ST lt gt lt 5 1 92 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 compare LE bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 5 O O O O0 O 0 Start or S1 gt S2 ST gt r gt 5452 4 _ Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 5 olololololo bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 STs _ gt 81 825 Begins a ogic operation by comparing two 16 kb bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 5 10 0 ojolollo or S1 S2 ST lt p lt 1825 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 slolo ololo bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 ST lt TEEL Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 LE bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 5 10 0 0 0 0 C or S1 S2 16 bit AN Connects a Form A normally open contact data _f S S25 _ serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the 5 O O OQ O o0 C comparative condition S1 S2 compare aNe gt Connects a Form A normally open contact AND _p S S8 S25_ serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the 5 O 0O ojojo comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 gt S2 AN gt Connects a Form A normally open contact _f S S2 5 _ serially by comparing two 16
84. No 14 is communicating properly in the R906D PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an No 14 error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when Unit No 15 is communicating properly in the R906E Unit PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an No 15 error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Unit Turns on when Unit No 16 is communicating properly n the R906F PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an No 16 A error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Note When the system registers 46 KO PC link 0 for the link unit with a smaller slot No and PC link 1 for one with a larger slot No When the system registers 46 K1 PC link 1 for the link unit with a smaller slot No and PC link 0 for one with a larger slot No Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Address Name Description R9070 Unit Turns on when unit No 1 is in the RUN mode No 1 Turns off when unit No 1 is in the PROG mode R9071 Unit Turns on when unit No 2 is in the RUN mode No 2 Turns off when unit No 2 is in the PROG mode R9072 Unit Turns on when unit No 3 is in the RUN mode No 3 Turns off when unit No 3 is in the PROG mode R9073 Unit Turns on when unit No
85. No 3 Turns off when unit No 3 is in the PROG mode R9093 Unit Turns on when unit No 4 is in the RUN mode No 4 Turns off when unit No 4 is in the PROG mode R9094 Unit Turns on when unit No 5 is in the RUN mode No 5 Turns off when unit No 5 is in the PROG mode R9095 Unit Turns on when unit No 6 is in the RUN mode No 6 Turns off when unit No 6 is in the PROG mode R9096 Unit Turns on when unit No 7 is in the RUN mode MEWNET W P_ No 7 Turns off when unit No 7 is in the PROG mode R9097 PC link Unit Turns on when unit No 8 is in the RUN mode operation mode No 8 Turns off when unit No 8 is in the PROG mode R9098 relay Unit Turns on when unit No 9 is in the RUN mode for PC link 1 No 9 Turns off when unit No 9 is in the PROG mode R9099 W P Note Unit Turns on when unit No 10 is in the RUN mode No 10 Turns off when unit No 10 is in the PROG mode R909A Unit Turns on when unit No 11 is in the RUN mode No 11 Turns off when unit No 11 is in the PROG mode R909B Unit Turns on when unit No 12 is in the RUN mode No 12 Turns off when unit No 12 is in the PROG mode R909C Unit Turns on when unit No 13 is in the RUN mode No 13 Turns off when unit No 13 is in the PROG mode R909D Unit Turns on when unit No 14 is in the RUN mode No 14 Turns off when unit No 14 is in the PROG mode R909E Unit Turns on when unit No 15 is in the RUN mode No 15 Turns off when unit No 15 is in the PROG mode R909F U
86. Procedure for Formatting the IC Memory Card 7 8 7 2 3 Procedure for Erasing the IC Memory Card 7 11 7 2 4 Data Storage Capacity of IC Memory Card 7 12 7 3 For Use as Program Memory 0 cece eee eae 7 13 7 3 1 Writing the Program i vs ses ie te ente emia s kedsGoyened Galees lt 7 13 7 3 2 Reading the Program 2 cece eee 7 18 7 4 For Use as Expansion Memory 0 00 cece eee eee eee 7 22 7 5 Menus Related to Tool Software uaaa eeee eaae 7 25 Chapter 8 Self Diagnostic Function and Troubleshooting 8 1 Self Diagnostic Function sssss saanee eneee eee eee 8 3 8 1 1 LED Display for Status Condition 0 0 cece eee 8 3 8 1 2 Operation When an Error Occurs 0000 cee eee eee 8 4 8 2 TroubleShoounG 2 0 acti oak a Ros bic win Ge a Sg eee Mae cage Bes 8 5 8 2 1 Ifthe ERROR LED Lights 1 ovcs ceveets cesarean et taeten ks 8 5 8 2 2 Ifthe ALARM LED Lights 3 isiit2 c204 ieee cen cess Haines ees 8 7 8 2 3 If the LED POWER of the Power Supply Unit Does Not Light 8 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Table of Contents FP2 FP2SH 8 2 4 If Outputting Does Not Occur as Desired 05 8 8 8 2 5 Ifa Communication Error Message Appears 8 9 8 2 6 Ifa Protect Error Message Appears 2 eee eee ee 8 10 Chap
87. R9085 Unit link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error No 6 occurs or when not in the PC link mode Unit Turns on when unit No 7 is communicating properly in the PC R9086 link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error No 7 occurs or when not in the PC link mode MEWNET W P TY PC link Unit Turns on when unit No 8 is communicating properly in the PC R9087 A link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error transmission No 8 4 A Assurance occurs or when not in the PC link mode rela Unit Turns on when unit No 9 is communicating properly in the PC R9088 y link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error for PC link 1 No 9 occurs or when not in the PC link mode W P Note Turns on when unit No 10 is communicating properly in the R9089 ise 0 PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an Q error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Unit Turns on when unit No 11 is communicating properly in the R908A PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an No 11 error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Unit Turns on when unit No 12 is communicating properly in the R908B PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an No 12 i error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Unit Turns on when unit No 13 is communicating properly in the R908C PC link mode Turns off when operation is s
88. ROM operation off RAM operation 2 Reattach the CPU to the original position on the back plane When the power supply is turned on the program in the ROM is transferred to the internal RAM IESE Note When the power supply is turned on the data that was in the RAM will be erased 6 6 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 3 FP2 ROM Operation 6 3 2 Verifying the ROM Contents in RAM Operation When the operation condition switches DIP switch on the rear side of the CPU is set for RAM operation the CPU reads the contents of the internal RAM To check the con tents of the ROM you must first copy the contents to RAM by following the procedure below Preparation Have programming tool software ready for use Set the CPU to the PROG mode Procedure 1 On the Online menu select Online Edit Mode 2 On the Tool menu select ROM amp RAM Service ROMERAM Service Untitles ROM RAM ROM RAM Transfer the program system register etc sigoter in the ROM into the internal RAM of PLE 3 Select ROM gt RAM and click Execute button The contents of ROM are copied to the internal RAM 6 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2
89. The default value setting is no PC PLC link communication 8 Tool and COM port communication settings System registers 410 to 418 Set these registers when the Tool port and COM port are to be used for computer link general purpose serial communication PC PLC link and modem communication Note that the default setting is computer link mode Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Checking and changing the set value of system register If you are going to use a value which is already set the value which appears when read there is no need write it again Using programming tool software Produce 1 Set the control unit in the PROG mode 2 Option gt PLC Configuration 3 When the function for which setting are to be entered is selected in the PLC Configuration dialog box the value and setting status for the selected system register are displayed To change the value and setting status write in the new value and or select the setting status 4 To register these settings choose OK Precautions for system register setting System register settings are effective from the time they are set However input settings tool portico port and modem connection settings become effective when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN With regard to the modem connection setting when the power is turned off and on or when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN the controller
90. Transfers the program stored in the ROM of the expansion memory unit to RAM and executes the program Comparison of RAM operation and ROM operation Item oOo RAM operation ROM operation Items necessary for operation Nothing in particular since operation is per formed by the RAM built into the CPU Normal maximum number of steps is 16k With the optional expansion memory unit FP2 EM2 FP2 EM3 or FP2 EM6 installed the maximum number of steps is 32k Optional expansion memory unit FP2 EM3 FP2 EM6 or FP2 EM7 ROM with the program written on it Processes inside the CPU Program written in RAM is executed when RUN mode is entered When the power is turned on the program in ROM is transferred to RAM and then execut ed Memory contents backed up by battery Program System registers Hold type data of operation memory Replacement of backup battery is vital Hold type data of operation memory The pro gram and the system register within ROM are saved without battery If program does not use hold type data of op eration memory then operation without a backup battery is possible Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 3 FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 1 FP2 Operation 6 1 1 2 Retaining the Data During Power Outages For the operation memory such as that for internal relays and data registers the data that is set as h
91. added on for expansion Only one backplane can be added on for expansion A power supply unit is also necessary on an expansion back plane next page 1 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Overview FP2 FP2SH 1 1 System Configuration Do not install a CPU on an expansion backplane There is no need to make the number of modules on the ex pansion backplane equal to the number of modules on the CPU backplane FP2 backplane H type CPU unit Basic backplane Power supply unit 1 O unit ma e e woman e oee o eee g Backup battery Expansion memory o o0 f Expansion cable OM port Tool port 1 0 unit Expansion backplane 1 Power supply unit ol bo O0 Board No setting Expansion backplane 2 switches bo OO Expansion backplane 3 The basic FP2 backplane H type that the CPU unit can be installed and the expansion backplane H type that only the I O units and the intelligent I O units can be installed are available A maximum of eight I O units including the unit built in the CPU can be controlled per backplane Even if further I O units are installed they are not recognized Up to three expansion backplanes can be added on for expansion Use the board No setting switches on the board to distinguish the expansion back plane A power supply unit is also necessary
92. ae fines is stored here Scan time he i P is calculated using the F Scan time formula maximum DT9023 DT90023 minimum E 7 and Scan time ms stored aS value minimum data decimal x 0 1 valdes are Example cleared K50 indicates 5 ms i when each The maximum scan time th modeis is stored here Scan time switched Scan tim id coe using the between DT9024 DT90024 maximum a 2 RUN mode Scan time ms stored value and PROG data decimal x 0 1 mode Example f A N A K125 indicates 12 5 ms Mask condition The mask conditions of interrupt unit monitoring initiated interrupts using ICTL instruction register for can be monitored here Monitor using DT9025 DT90025 interrupt unit binary display ini i Bit position 15 12111 8 7 443 0 Note initiated INT programj15 12 11 BI 443 0 interrupts osoro TTT TTT TT TTI ITI INT 0 to 15 O interrupt disabled masked FP2 Not used 4 interrupt enabled unmasked Mask condition The mask conditions of interrupt unit monitoring initiated interrupts using ICTL instruction register for can be monitored here Monitor using DT9026 interrupt unit binary display Note DT90026 e Bit position 15 12 11 SiT 413 0 F INT program 23 20 19 16 IntErTUptS osor TT T TTT INT 16 to 23 O interrupt disabled masked FP2 Not used 1 interrupt enabled unmasked The value set by ICTL instruction is Periodical stored ce DT90027 interrupt KO perio
93. also detected if you attempt to execute a rewrite containing a syntax error during RUN In this case nothing will be written to the CPU and operation will continue Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Error opera x Name tion Description and steps to take TV code a q gt mER status elelelelelslale wly ejele solo yoe se The program is too large to compile in the program memory Compile gt Change to PROG mode and reduce the E6 memory Stops ae ae of steps for the program AlAlAIAIA AlA full error If memory expansion is possible compilation will become possible when the memory is expanded In the program high level instructions which execute in every scan and at the leading edge of the trigger are programmed to be triggered High level by one contact e g FO MV and PO PMV E7 instruction Stops are programmed using the same trigger AJAJAJAJAJA type error continuously gt Correct the program so that the high level instructions executed in every scan and only at the leading edge are triggered separately High level There is an incorrect operand in an instruction instruction which requires a specific combination of E8 operand Stops operands for example the operands must all AJ AJAJAJ AJAJAJA combina be of a certain type tion error Enter the correct combination of operands No Program may
94. and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the slave condition Selection of operation status using system register28 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 E49 Expansion unit power supply sequence error Stops The power supply for the expansion unit was turned on after the control unit Turn on the power supply for the expansion unit at the same time or before the control unit is turned on E50 Backup battery error Conti nues The voltage of the backup battery lowered or the backup battery of control unit is not installed Check the installation of the backup battery and then replace battery if necessary By setting the system register 4 you can disregard this self diagnostic error Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Error Opera x Name tion Description and steps to take IT 9 code status o A gt lt N g a aqa aja aja a a wie l eje fe lose E MEWNET F Terminal station setting was not properly performed E51 terminal Conti Check stations at both ends of the AlA A station nues communication path and set them in the error terminal station using the dip switches Set the INITIALIZE TEST MEWNET F selecto1inmjvbgycfrde892 r to the E52 I O update Conti INITIALIZE position whil
95. are built into the FROM IC memory card operation SW2 on SW4 on FP2 C2P or FP2 C3P and IC memory card with the program written to it Processing in the CPU Program in the RAM is executed when the RUN mode is ac cessed When the power supply is turned on the program in the ROM is sent to the RAM and the program in the RAM is exe cuted When the power supply is turned on the program in the IC memory card is sent to the RAM and the program in the RAM is executed Contents of memory backed up by battery in the CPU unit Programs System registers Hold type data of operation memory Comment data FP2 C2L FP2 C2 only Hold type data of operation memory Comment data FP2 C2L FP2 C2 only Hold type data of operation memory Maintenance Backup battery needs to be re placed If the program is in the operation memory and does not use the hold type memory operation is possible without a battery If the program is in the operation memory and does not use the hold type memory operation is possible without a battery With AlC52000 periodic charg ing or replacement is necessary Charging is done by inserting it in the CPU With AFP2209 the replacement of memory backup battery is necessary Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 13 FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 5 FP2SH Operation
96. backplane install in order from the left to the right the power supply unit the CPU the I O and the intelli gent units With the expansion backplane install in order from the left to the right the power supply unit the I O and the intelligent units Install a power supply unit on to the expansion backplane as well Do not install a CPU on to the expansion backplane FP2 backplane H type The basic FP2 backplane that the CPU unit can be installed and the expansion backplane that other various units can be installed are available The positions to install a power supply unit CPU unit and I O units are fixed When using a 1 module type power supply unit a space of 1 module will be created between the power supply unit and CPU unit or between the power supply unit and I O units Do not put the wiring in the space in order to prevent the effect of radiation noise Set the board No setting switches on the expansion back plane A power supply unit is also necessary on an expansion back plane 4 8 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 1 Installation Procedure 1 Insert the installation tabs on the rear of the unit into the top of the backplane 2 Push the unit in the direction of the arrow and install onto the backplane When installing the unit to the backplane make sure the retaining hook firmly c
97. backplane Slots that do not actually exist Backplane 7 module type backplane J SIENO ae ay lg Sos ce eel Power supply unit 1 module TES Pr meee FP CPU 1 module ape DA I O units Al J ee 16 point type DC input unit 2 units alz f ooo 16 point type transistor output unit 3 units H l gE F eee ere ee a A a ie xo Xio 20 30 Vao 50 60 ji 150 E L XE XIF l yor YSF Yar SF Gk Se Expansion 16 point type 16 point type Expansion backplane backplane DC input unit transistor output unit Backplane 9 module type Sa aa are ES Power supply unit 1 module Foha I O units S de 16 point type relay output unit 6 units H 64 point type DC input unit 1 unit 5 i CI p MA Y160 Y170 Y180 Y190 Y200 Y210 X220 260 to to to to to to to to Y16F Y17F Y18F Y19F Y20F Y21F X25F 26F Se 16 point type 64 point Free relay output unit type DC slot input unit At the expansion backplane I O numbers are allocated continuing from the last number allocated to slots that do not actually exist on the CPU backplane 3 13 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 0 Allocation FP2 FP2SH 3 3 I O Mount Allocation 3 3 1 2 Procedure for I O Mount Allocation Preparations Turn on the power of the PLC and set the mode selector of the CPU to PROG mode Set the programming tool software to online monitor Procedure 1 On the
98. bit PSORT S2 area specified by S1 to S2 are 3 sorted in ascending order the 8 4 O O 0 0 0 smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first F278 Sort double DSORT S1 The double word data with sign from P278 word data 32 PDSORT S2 the area specified by S1 to S2 are bit S3 sorted in ascending order the 8 4 O O 0 0 0 smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first F282 Scaling of SCAL S1 The output value Y is found for the P282 16 bit data PSCAL S2 D input value X by performing scaling 8 4 ojojojojo for the given data table F283 Scaling of DSCAL S1 The output value Y is found for the P283 32 bit data PDSCAL S2 D input value X by performing scaling 10 x O O O0 07 C for the given data table F284 Inclination RAMP S1 Executes the linear output for the N P284 output of 16 bit S2 specified time from the specified 10 x 5 ag x x data S3 D initial value to the target value Integer type non linear function instructions F285 Upper and LIMT S1 When S1 gt S3 S1 gt D P285 lower limit PLIMT S2 When S1 lt S3 S2 gt D 1o al a bee control S3 D When S1 lt or S3 lt or S2 S3 gt D 4 16 bit data O Available X Not available A Not available partially 1 This instruction is only available for FP e Ver 1 2 or later 2 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later and FP Ver 3 10 or late
99. bit data in the 5 io lo lo lo ol o comparative condition S1 gt S2 AN gt Connects a Form A normally open contact _ gt 57 S S25_ serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the 5 O 0 ojojo comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 S2 AN lt Connects a Form A normally open contact _ 82 5_ serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the 51 0 OJOjJojojo comparative condition S1 lt S2 ANe Connects a Form A normally open contact _ S S25_ serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the 5 O O0 O0 0 O 0 comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 S2 16 bit OR Connects a Form A normally open contact in data pe 8 82 5 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the 5 Ollo OJOJ comparative condition S1 S2 compare OR lt gt Connects a Form A normally open contact in OR _Es 1825 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the 5 O O O0 O O0 0 comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 gt S2 OR gt Connects a Form A normally open contact in p 882 5 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the 5 O O 0 0 0 0 comparative condition S1 gt S2 OR gt Connects a Form A normally open contact in gt S parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the 5 0 0j ojlojollo comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 S2 OR lt Connects a Form A normally open contact in _E lt 8182 5 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the 5 O O 0 0 0 C comparative condition S1 lt S2 OR l
100. built in 11 ala channel high speed counter reaches the 7 specification target value of S 1 S F171 Pulse output SPDH S n Positioning pulses are output with channel from the specified channel in specification accordance with the contents of 5 ele Trapezoidal the data table that starts with S control and home return F172 Pulse output PLSH S n Pulse strings are output from the with channel specified output in accordance 5 ale specification with the contents of the data JOG operation table that starts with S F173 PWM output PWMH S n PWM output is output from the with channel specified output in accordance 5 analo specification with the contents of the data table that starts with S F174 Pulse output SPOH S n Outputs the pulses from the with channel specified channel according to specification the 5 als Selectable data data table specified by S table control operation F175 Pulse output SPSH S n Pulses are output from channel Linear in accordance with the interpolation designated data table so that 5 e O the path to the target position forms a straight line F176 Pulse output SPCH S n Pulses are output from channel Circular in accordance with the interpolation designated data table so that 5 G x the path to the target position forms an arc O Available X Not available A Not available partially 1 The elapsed value area differs depending on used channels 2 This instruction is available
101. collector output type points 32 output 5 to 24V DC 0 1A points DC input transistor PNP 32 input Connector 24V DC sink source input FP2 XY64D2P open collector output type points 32 output 5 to 24V DC 0 1A points DC input with on pulse 32 input Connector 24V DC sink source input FP2 XY64D7T catch input function transis points tor NPN open collector 32 output 5 to 24V DC 0 1A output type points DC input with on pulse 32 input Connector 24V DC sink source input FP2 XY64D7P catch input function transis points tor PNP open collector 32 output 5 to 24V DC 0 1A output type points IEN Notes The maximum load current value will differ depending on the operating voltage Refer to the specifications page for each unit For types with the on pulse catch input the four points X1C through X1F of the 32 input points possess the on pulse catch input function section 2 11 5 2 32 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 9 Input Units Specifications 2 9 Input Units Specifications 2 9 1 16 point Type DC Input Unit Specifications tem Cd Deseription S y Part number FP2 X16D2 Insulation method Optical coupler Rated input voltage 12 to 24V DC Rated input current Approx 8mA at 24V DC Input impedance Approx 3kQ Input voltage range 10 2 to 26 4V DC Max input cur
102. for FPE C32T2 C28P2 C32T2H and C28P2H Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net T no q ry eb fee x lt A Num Name Boolean Ope Description olele a 2s is per rand Fae e 2 e TE n N a L Screen display instructions F180 FP e screen SCR S1 S2 Register the screen displayed on s display S3 S4 the FP e 9 a x x x x x registration F181 FP e screen DSP S Specify the screen to be displayed display on the FP e 3 j x x x x x switching Basic function instruction F182 Time FILTR 1 S2 Executes the filter processing for p constant S3 D the specified input 9 x Oo oe 3 x x processing F183 Auxiliary DSTM S D Turn on the specified output and timer 32 bit R900D after 7T O O O O oO 0 01 s x set value Data transfer instructions F190 Three 16 bit MV3 S1 S2 S1 gt D S2 gt D 1 woixlololololo P190 data move PMV3 S3 D S3 gt D 2 F191 Three 32 bit DMV3 S1 S2 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D S2 1 P191 data move PDMV3 S3 D 2 D 3 D 2 S3 1 1e x O O O0 0 0 3 gt D 5 D 4 Logic operation instructions F215 32 bit data DAND S1 S2 S1 1 S1 AND S2 1 7 P215 AND PDAND D S2 gt D 1 x O oO oO o o D F216 32 bit data DOR S1 S2 S1 1 S1 OR S2 1 S2 gt D 1 elxlolololele P216 OR PDOR D D S gt gt j F217 32 bit da
103. from the power wiring as so much as possible Do not route them through the same duct or wrap them up together Separate the wires of input output circuit from the power and high voltage wires by at least 100mm 3 937in Dust Proofing Label Do not remove the dust proofing label that is attached to the upper portion of the unit until the unit is completely installed and the wiring is completed However be sure to remo ve the dust proofing label prior to operation Dust proofing label 4 22 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units 4 4 1 Wiring the Connector Type Units Wiring Method There are 4 methods for wiring to a connector type I O unit Choose the most appropri ate method depending on the installation conditions The set of connector for wire pressed terminal cable is supplied with the unit Cable with pressure connection 1 U H H terminal 40 pins ia MW WY CT 2 connector terminal 40 pins RT 2 relay terminal Connectorfor Flat cable with Used twice for each unit Used four times for wire pressed connector each unit a two terminal cable 40 pins branch cable is 40 pins Used twice for needed for connect Used twice for each unit ing each uni
104. insulated transformer when effects from noise are great ALARM output terminals An alarm output can be output when the ALARM condition occurs section 4 6 3 Grounding Power supply voltage Verify that the power supply voltage connected to the power supply unit is within allow able limits Part number Rated input Operating voltage rage Rated output current voltage AC type FP2 PSA1 100 to 120V AC 85 to 132V AG 2 5A FP2 PSA2 200 to 240V AC 170 to 264V AC 2 5A FP2 PSA3 100 to 240V AC 85 to 264V AG 5A DC type FP2 PSD2 24V DC 20 4 to 31 2V DC 5A Power supply wire Use power supply wire that is thicker than 2mm AWG 14 to minimize the voltage drop Pressure connection terminal The following M3 pressure connection terminals are recommended for the wiring Fork type terminal Round type terminal 6mm 0 236in f 6mm 0 236in or less or less 3 2mm 0 126in or more 3 2mm 0 126in or more mw next page 4 15 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 2 Power Supply Wiring Example of suitable pressure connection terminal JST Mfg Co Ltd Round type 2 N3A 1 04 to 2 63mm2 Fork type 2 MS3 Use wire that is thicker than 2mm2 Power supply system Use separate wiring systems for the FP2 FP2SH power supply unit output devices and motorized devices Motorized D
105. is it will automatically transmit the AT command to set the MODEM for automatic reception Since the reading and writing of the relay conditions and register contents of the pro grammable controller can be performed from the host computer this function is applicable for remote monitoring systems When using the TOOL port you can use programming tool software NPST GR FPWIN GR and perform reading and writing of the programmable controller program and main tenance operations via MODEM During 1 1 communication using the COM port an error alarm can be issued from the programmable controller 1 17 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Overview FP2 FP2SH 1 3 Expansion Function Table of specifications Description 1 1 communication 1 N communication Communication method Half duplex Synchronization method Start stop synchronous system Transmission speed 2 400bps 4 800bps 9 600bps 19 200 9 600bps 19 200bps Baud rate bps Transmission code ASCII Transmission format Character bit 7 bits parity check odd and stop bit 1 bit Character bit 8 bits parity check none and stop bit 1 bit Necessary devices in configuration 1 1 communication 1 N communication FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Commercially available computer Commercially available computer MODEM MODEM Commercially available RS232C cable Commercially available RS232C cable When
106. is stopped when an error No 6 P occurs or when not in the PC link mode Unit Turns on when Unit No 7 is communicating properly in the PC R9066 No 7 link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error MEWNET W occurs or when not in the PC link mode P Unit Turns on when Unit No 8 is communicating properly in the PC R9067 PC link link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error eee No 8 transmission occurs or when not in the PC link mode assurance Unit Turns on when Unit No 9 is communicating properly in the PC R9068 relay for PC No 9 link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error link 0 W P occurs or when not in the PC link mode Note Unit Turns on when Unit No 10 is communicating properly in the R9069 No 10 PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an j error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Unit Turns on when Unit No 11 is communicating properly in the R906A No 11 PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Unit Turns on when Unit No 12 is communicating properly in the R906B PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an No 12 error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Unit Turns on when Unit No 13 is communicating properly in the R906C PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an No 13 error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Unit Turns on when Unit
107. is turned on Programs can be read using the ROM amp RAM service menu on the FPWIN GR Programs can be read using the Upload Program from IC Card menu on the FPWIN GR The F14 PRGRD instruction of the sequence program can be used to read programs 7 4 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 7 1 Using the IC Memory Card Using the Card to Expand the Data Memory Area Data written to data registers and other destinations is written to the IC memory card When the card is used in this way the IC memory card can be used as an expanded memory area that lets data be written and read using the sequence program Data is written using the F13 ICWT instruction of the sequence program and is read from the IC memory card using the F12 ICRD instruction The FROM type of card can only be used for reading data How the IC memory card is used Program memory area Power on automatic operation RAM ROM transmission Program memory a fe AUTOEXEG SPG ie ROM RAM transmissio Internal RAM k Da MORI Bajpai Expanded data F13 ICWT instruction memory SRAM type only ra memory N Expanded memory area 7 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net IC Memory Card FP2 F
108. lolololololo P56 increment PDB 1 ie ee es ee G F57 4 digit BCD data B 1 D D 1 D 3 a l 7 P57 decrement PB 1 F58 8 digit BCD data DB 1 D D 1 D 1 gt D 1 D 3 olololololo P58 decrement PDB 1 Data compare instructions F60 16 bit data CMP S1 S2 S1 gt S2 gt R900A on P60 compare PCMP S1 S2 gt R900B on 5 O O O0 0 0 0 S1 lt S2 R900C on F61 32 bit data DCMP S1 S2 S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 gt R900A on P61 compare PDCMP S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt R900B on 9 O O 0O 0 0 0 S1 1 S 1 lt S2 1 S2 gt R900C on F62 16 bit data band WIN S1 S2 S1 gt S3 gt R900A on P62 compare PWIN 3 S2 lt or S1 lt or S3 gt R900B on 7 QO Q O0O 0 0 0 S1 lt S2 gt R900C on O Available X Not available A Not available partially Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net x 7 9 a Num Name Bee geg Description Ey E B a a ber lean rand w elelee e s m Q it F63 32 bit data DWIN S1 S2 S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 gt R900A on P63 band PDWIN S3 S2 1 S2 lt or S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 13 olololololc compare S3 gt R900B on gt i S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 gt R900C on F64 Block data BCMP S1 S2 Compares the two blocks beginning with zlolololololc P64 compare PBCMP S3 S2 and S3 to see if they are equal 5 Logic ope
109. message 8 9 Communications specifications 2 11 Computer link 1 15 Connecting the terminals 4 27 Connecting with flat cable connector 4 32 Connection of capacitive loads 4 22 Connection of inductive loads 4 21 Connection of LED equipped limit switch 4 20 Connection of LED equipped reed switch 4 19 Connection of sensors 4 18 Connection of two wire type sensor 4 19 Connector 4 24 Connector for wire pressed terminal cable 4 25 Constants 10 12 CPU backplane 1 4 CPU with 64 points input FP2 C1D 2 12 CPU with IC memory card interface FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 2 20 CT 2 connector terminal 4 27 Current consumption 1 13 D Dimensions 4 3 10 3 DIN rail 4 7 Dust proofing label 4 8 4 22 E Eliminating effects from noise 4 16 Emergency stop circuit 4 36 EPROM 6 8 6 10 Erasing 7 6 Erasing the IC memory card 7 11 ERROR LED 8 5 Expanded memory field 7 6 Expansion cable 1 7 2 7 4 11 Expansion memory 7 22 Expansion memory unit 2 15 2 22 l 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Index FP2 FP2SH F Formatting 7 6 Formatting the IC memory card 7 8 FP2 CPU 2 8 FP2 operation 6 3 FP2 RAM operation 6 5 FP2 ROM operation 6 6 FP2SH CPU 2 18 FP2SH operation 6 13 FP2SH RAM operation 6 17 FP2SH ROM operation 6 19 Free
110. minute to erase all the data Once erasing the data starts the IC memory card ac cess LED on the CPU unit lights up The LED is turned off on completion of erasing 7 2 4 Data Storage Capacity of IC Memory Card When storing a program or data in the IC memory card the data storage capacity is as follows Program file fp SPG FAT area see note Total number of bytes Keep the total number of bytes for the files given above less than the format capacity F Note The I O comment capacity changes according to the size of the statements FAT area 256KB format 5 5KB 512KB format 6KB 1MB format 9 5KB 2MB format 14 5KB 7 12 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 7 3 For Use as Program Memory 7 3 For Use as Program Memor 7 3 1 Writing the Program By saving the program to the IC memory card it is simple to create a backup or transfer it to another CPU Furthermore by saving more than one program switching between the programs can be done as necessary IC memory card Writing Programs There are three ways to write programs to the IC memory card Use the Copy File to IC Card function in the FPWIN GR to write a program saved on a disk directly to the IC memory card All types of cards can be used for this Write programs c
111. on an expansion backplane 1 6 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Overview 1 1 System Configuration Restriction on the number of modules of the backplane For expansion back plane The number of units that can be installed is determined by the number of modules of the backplane used and the power supply unit to be installed FP2 backplane E 7 module tye 9 module type 12 module type 14 module type 8 slots free 1 module type power supply 3 unt oo f 2 module type 7 slots free power supply unit slots free Number of slots where units can be installed FP2 backplane H type 1 module type power supply unit 2 module type power supply unit 8 slots free Note Although the connectors for installing I O units are free with a 1 module type pow er supply unit they cannot be used Expansion cable FP2 EC 60 cm FP2 EC2 2m Note With the backplaine H type the total cable length can be arranged within 3 2 m 1 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Overview FP2 FP2SH 1 2 Unit Types and Combinations 1 2 Unit Types and Combinations 1 2 1 Line Up of Backplanes and Units Power supply units 100V A
112. on current 19 2V 4mA Max off voltage Max off current 5 0V 1 5mA Response time off on 0 2ms or less on gt off 0 3ms or less Internal current consumption at 5V DC 80mA or less Common method Input points per common 32 points common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal Operating indicator 32 dot LED display lit when on External connection method Connectors MIL type 40 pin C Aprox 1009 Internal Circuit Diagram Input indicator LED AA Input 5 6kQ idi oO O g 5602 5 24V DC a0 5 P e COM 2 35 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 9 Input Units Specifications Pin Layout Input XO to X1F 3 gt 24V DC BERE DED pane 2 36 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 9 3 2 9 Input Units Specifications 64 point Type DC Input Unit Specifications CC Ee Part number Insulation method FP2 X64D2 Optical coupler Rated input voltage 24V DC Rated input current Approx 4 3mA at 24V DC Input impedance Approx 5 6kQ2 Input voltage range 20 4 to 26 4V DC
113. output using forcing I O function If the output indicator LED is turned on go to input condition check If the output indicator LED remains off there is probably an abnormality in the output unit Please contact your dealer Check of input condition 1 Input indicator LEDs are off Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the input devices Procedure 2 Check that the power is properly supplied to the input terminals If the power is properly supplied to the input terminal there is probably an abnormality in the input unit Please contact your dealer If the power is not properly supplied to the input terminal there is probably an abnormal ity in the input device or input power supply Check the input device and input power supply 8 8 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Self Diagnostic Function and Troubleshooting 8 2 Troubleshooting Check of input condition 2 Input indicator LEDs are on Procedure Monitor the input condition using a programming tool If the input monitored is off there is probably an abnormality with the input unit Please contact your dealer If the input monitored is on check the leakage current at the input devices e g two wire type sensor and check the program again referring the following Check for the duplicated use of output and for the output using the high level instruc tion Check the program flow when a co
114. power is turned on IC memory card operation Programs are read using the ROM gt RAM operation of programming tool software Programs are read using the IC Card Service of pro gramming tool software Programs are read using the F14 PGRD instruction of the sequence program 2 24 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 6 IC Memory Card for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P Inserting and Removing the IC Memory Card The IC memory card can be inserted or removed even when the FP2SH power is on To insert or remove the card when the power is on be sure to follow the following proce dure Inserting procedure 1 Remove the cover of FP2SH CPU 2 Set the IC memory card access enable switch to off position 3 i Note When using AFP2209 confirm if the battery is installed in the IC memory card 2 25 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 6 IC Memory Card for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 4 Set the IC memory card access enable switch to on position Sere D ERROR Ger A RUN Oatarm 7 Proa KO oo000 0000 Removal procedure 1 Verify that the IC memory card access LED is off Set the IC memory card access enable switch to off position S
115. pulse PLSM S1 S2 D Measures the number of pulses measurement and cycle of pulses to be input No of pulses to the high speed counter of the 5 O cycle for input pulses specified channel Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net x 72 a Num Boo er 2 2 f wnlxjalo pe Name on Operand Description S A a g fa ra High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FPZ FP X FO High speed MV S DT90052 Performs high speed counter counter and and Pulse output controls Pulse output according to 5 ales controls the control code specified by S The control code is stored in DT90052 F1 Change and read DMV FPE Transfers S 1 S to high of the elapsed S DT90044 speed counter and Pulse output 7 alla value of high FP X elapsed value area DT90045 speed counter S DT90300 DT90044 and Pulse output FPS Transfers value in high speed DT90044 D counter and Pulse output 7 elles FP X elapsed value area DT90045 i DT90300 D DT90044 to D 1 D F166 Target value HC1S n S D Turns output Yn on when the much on with elapsed value of the built in 11 analo channel high speed counter reaches the 7 specification target value of S 1 S F167 Target value HC1R n S D Turns output Yn off when the much off with elapsed value of the
116. saxsiccgtionect cond rate ean xeeee ae eee hes 4 21 4 3 3 Cautions Regarding Units 0 eee eee 4 22 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units 0 0 cece 4 23 4 4 1 Wiring the Connector Type Units na anaana 4 23 4 4 2 Connecting with Connector for Wire pressed Terminal Cable 4 25 4 4 3 Connecting the Terminals 0 cece ee eee eee 4 27 4 4 4 Connecting with Flat Cable Connector 00005 4 32 4 5 Wiring the Terminal Block Type I O Units 0 0c ceca 4 34 iii Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Table of Contents FP2 FP2SH 4 5 1 Wiring the Terminal Block Type Units 0 4 34 4 6 Safety Measures 2 4 65 cin ieayenebiniad nrnna aee 4 36 4 6 1 Safety Instructions Aleut otc aes UM a een Wee ease 4 36 4 6 2 Momentary Power Failures 0 0c eee eee ee 4 37 4 6 3 Alarm OUIDUT ve tings api o nE a eet 4 37 Chapter5 Procedure Until Operation 5 1 Before Turning ON the Power 00 c eee tees 5 3 BA GHECK NEMS aerie a freee eee aa E E ong 5 3 5 1 2 Procedure Up To Operation 00 c eee ee 5 4 5 2 Programming with Programming Tool Software 0e ee eee 5 5 5 2 1 Preparations oe cc een Rey 22 erga ee E e Seats 5 5 5 2 2 Configuration of Programming Tool Software 5 6 5 2 2 1 Parameters and Setting Methods
117. sends a command to the modem which enables it for reception When the initialized operation is performed all set system register values parameters will be initialized Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 1 1 Table of System Registers for FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Allocation of user memory system registers 0 1 and 2 Available PLC FP2 The configuration of user memory of FP2 is as follows Area for system registers Area for sequence program 512 words 4 fixed A set using system register 0 i A Area for machine B Users memory capacity language program y set using system register 1 Area for Ac configuration set using system register 2 Area for file registers D Be sure to set the A using system register 0 B using system register 1 and C using system register 2 as even numbers The area remaining in A after 512 words are subtracted is the sequence program area that can actually be used File register area D is the area that remains after A B and C have been subtracted from the user memory capacity The configuration area is reserved for future expansion FP2 16K Users memory capacity Setting range of A 16K words 2K to 16K words default value 12k Setting range of B 0 to 14K words default value 0 Setting range of C 0 to 14K words default value 0 Allocate so that At tB C216 Setting example Th
118. software set the PLC type to FP2 32k 12 Setthe program capacity with system register O 2 16 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 3 Expansion Memory Unit and ROM for FP2 CPU Installing the ROM Procedure 1 Release the lock for the ROM IC socket 2 Make sure that the lead pitch of the ROM matches that of the socket 3 Making sure that the orientation is correct insert the ROM into the socket 4 Return the lock to the locked position completely after the ROM is inserted Lock release Lock re Note When removing or installing the expansion memory unit the con tents of the internal RAM may be erased Therefore always save the program onto a disk before beginning the removal and instal lation operations During the installation or removal operations do not touch the leads on any of the IC with your hands 2 17 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 4 FP2SH CPU 2 4 FP2SH CPU FP2 C2 FP2 C2P UN TEST S esr FREAK ERROR FATT LARM Onun INTIAL OfjROa C OEST z TEST QUREAK t l l l I l 0000009 f TOOL RSza2C Standard type CPU Small PC card compliant type CPU Type of FP2SH CPU Operation Internal Optional me
119. stored here DT9202 DT90202 Counts how many times a token is lost pT9203 pT90203 MEWNET Counts how many times two or more tokens W P link are detected DT9204 DT90204 status Counts how many times a signal is lost A N A WP link 2 Counts how many times a synchronous DT9205 DT90205 Note2 abnormality is detected DT9206 DT90206 Send NACK DT9207 DT90207 Send NACK DT9208 DT90208 Send WACK DT9209 DT90209 Send WACK DT9210 DT90210 Send answer DT9211 DT90211 Send answer DT9212 DT90212 Unidentified command Note1 For FP10SH FP3 using H mode For FP2 FP2SH using W2 mode Note2 For MEWNET W system available PLC type FP2 FP2SH FP3 FP10SH For MEWNET P system available PLC type FP3 FP10SH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address APA Name Descriptions Paade tad FP3 FP2SH ing ing FP10SH pT9213 DT90213 Counts how many times a parity error is detected DT9214 DT90214 End code receiving error DT9215 DT90215 Format error DT9216 DT90216 Not support error DT9217 DT90217 Self diagnostic result Counts how many times loop change is DT9218 DT90218 detected Available PLC FP3 FP10SH pT9219 pT90219 MEWNET Counts home many times link error
120. the STATUS DISPLAY execute the error clear Error codes 43 and higher can be cleared You can use the initialize test switch to clear an error However this will also clear the contents of operation memory Errors can also be cleared by turning off and on the power while in the PROG mode However the contents of operation memory not stored with the hold type data will also be cleared The error can also be cleared depending on the self diagnostic error set instruction F148 ERR Steps to take for self diagnostic error The steps to be taken will differ depending on the error contents For more details use the error code obtained above and consult the table of self diagnostic error codes E MEWTOCOL COM Transmission Errors These are error codes from a PC or other computer device that occur during an abnormal response when communicating with a PLC using MEWTOCOL COM Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 4 1 Table of Syntax Check Error Opera Name tion Description and steps to take status Error code FP e FPO FPOR FPX FP X FP2 FP2SH FP10SH A program with a syntax error has been written Stops Change to PROG mode and correct the error Two or more OT Out instructions and KP Keep instructions are programmed using the same relay Also occurs when using the same timer counter number E2 Duplicated gt Change to PROG mode an
121. the time becomes that written to DT9054 to DT9057 DT90054 to DT90057 by FO MV instruction After the time is set DT9058 DT90058 is cleared to 0 Cannot be performed with any instruction other than FO MV instruction lt Example gt Set the time to 12 00 00 on the 5 day when the XO turns on X0 pF gt F0 MV H Fo mv H 512 DT9055 Inputs 0 min and 0 sec Inputs 12th hour 5th day Sets the time 0 DT9054 Fo mv H8000 DT9058 If you changed the values of DT9054 to DT9057 DT90054 to DT90057 with programming tool software the time will be set when the new values are written Therefore it is unnecessary to write to DT9058 DT90058 When the correcting times less than 30 seconds By setting the lowest bit of DT9058 DT90058 to 1 the value will be moved up or down and become exactly 0 seconds After the correction is completed DT9058 DT90058 is cleared to 0 lt Example gt Correct to 0 seconds with XO turns on x0 lt pF gt FOMV H 1 DT9058 Correct ta 0 second At the time of correction if between 0 and 29 seconds it will be moved down and if the between 30 and 59 seconds it will be moved up In the example above if the time was 5 minutes 29 seconds it will become 5 minutes 0 second and if the time was 5 minutes 35 seconds it will become 6 minutes 0 second Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F
122. the unit FP2 and FP2SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90002 DT90003 and abnormal I O unit Then check the unit Selection of operation status using system register21 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 E40 1 0 error Sele Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at AIAIAIAIA ctable 1 9 error in the status display function MEWNET TR communication error FP3 and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers FP3 DT9002 DT9003 FP10SH DT9 0002 DT90003 and the erroneous master unit and abnormal I O unit Then check the unit Selection of operation status using system register21 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function A Available Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Error code Name Opera tion status Description and steps to take FP e FPO FPOR FPS FP X FP2 FP2SH FP10SH E41 Intelligent unit error Selec table An abnormality in an intelligent unit FPZ FP X Check the contents of special data register DT90006 and locate the abnormal FP intelligent unit application cassette for FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90006 DT90007 and locate the abnormal intelligent uni
123. to REMOTE R9028 Break clear ti ae Note reak clear flag Turns on when the break operation is cleared R9029 Forcina fl Turns on during forced on off operation for I O relay and Note oro timer counter contacts External interrupt enable flag Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by R902A Available PLC the ICTL instruction Note FP2SH FP10SH Interrupt flag Turns on while the periodical interrupt is executed by the Available PLC FP2 ICTL instruction airs Interrupt error flag Turns on when an interrupt error occurs R902C Turns off during instructed sampling Note Sampling point flag Turns on while sampling is triggered by the periodical interrupt steele Sampling trace end Turns on when the sampling trace ends Note flag R902E Sampling trioger fla Turns on when the sampling trace trigger of the F156 Note ping trigg 9 STRG P156 PSTGR instruction is turned on age Sampling enable flag Turns on when the starting point of sampling is specified Note Used by the system Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Address Name Description Monitors if CPU is in the F145 SEND P145 PSEND and F145 SEND P145 F146 RECV P146 PRECV instructions executable PSEND and F146 condition as follows R9030 RECV P146 PRECV off None of the above mentioned instructions can be in
124. to the specified edge out OT 0 output only for one scan when leading edge 2 ixixixixliolo of the trigger is detected for pulse relay Trailing P Outputs the operated result to the specified edge out OTL H output only for one scan when trailing edge of 2 xixixIxlolo the trigger is detected for pulse relay Alterna ALT YR LE Inverts the output condition on off each time tive out lt a the leading edge of the trigger is detected 3 X O O O0 0 0 AND ANS 1 Connects the multiple instruction blocks stack 1 serially 1 olol o a olo OR stack ORS i Connects the multiple instruction blocks in ra parallel 1 olololololo O Available X Not available Z Not available partially 1 The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models 2 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later and FP Ver 3 10 or later 3 In the FP2 FP2SH 10SH when using X1280 Y1280 R1120 special internal relay included L1280 T256 C256 or anything beyond for the ST ST OT AN AN OR and OR instructions the number of steps is shown in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a relay number has an index modifier the number of steps is shown in parentheses For the FP and FP X the number of steps varies according to the relay number to be used Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net
125. type Max 2 048 points 32 modules Max 2 048 points Using remote I O system Max 2 048 points Max 8 192 points Max 8 192 points Program capacity Internal memory Using expansion memory Approx 16k steps Approx 32k steps Approx 60k steps For FP2 C3P approx 120k steps Approx 30k steps Approx 60k steps 120k steps Operation speed typical value Basic instructions From 0 35us per instruction From 0 03us per instruction From 0 04us per instruction i High level instructions From 0 93us per instruction From 0 06us per instruction From 0 08us per instruction instruction External input X 2 048 points 8 192 points 8 192 points External output Y 2 048 points 8 192 points 8 192 points Internal relays R Timer counter T C 4 048 points Total 1 024 points 14 192 points Total 3 072 points 14 192 points Total 3 072 points Link relays L 2 048 points 10 240 points 10 240 points Pulse relays P Alarm relays E 1 024 points None 2 048 points 2 048 points 2 048 points 2 048 points Data registers DT 6 000 words 10 240 words 10 240 words File registers FL 0 to 14 333 words when expanding 0 to 30 717 words FP2 C2L 32 765 words FP2 C2 FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 32 765 words x 3 banks 32 765 words Link data registers LD 256 words 8 448 words
126. type LOG s D LOG S 1 S gt D 1 D tol2tlololololec P322 data logarithm PLOG a F323 Floating point type PWR S1 S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 wl2lololololc P323 data power PPWR S2 D D 4 gt F324 Floating point type FSQR S D A a 255 P324 data square root PFSQR S 1 S gt D 1 D ne elke sil ld F325 16 bit integer data to FLT s D Converts the 16 bit integer data P325 floating point type PFLT with sign specified by S to real e l lololololo data conversion number data and the converted Ae Se data is stored in D F326 32 bit integer data to DFLT S D Converts the 32 bit integer data P326 floating point type PDFLT with sign specified by S 1 S to data conversion real number data and the 8 a O O O O C converted data is stored in D 1 D F327 Floating point type INT S D Converts real number data P327 data to 16 bit integer PINT specified by S 1 S to the 16 conversion the bit integer data with sign the largest integer not largest integer not exceeding the 8 4 97O0 0 0 0 exceeding the floating point data and the floating point type converted data is stored in D data F328 Floating point type DINT S D Converts real number data P328 data to 32 bit integer PDINT specified by S 1 S to the 32 conversion the bit integer data with sign the largest integer not largest integer not exceeding the 8 QO O 0 0 0 O Available X Not available A Not available parti
127. writing are easily done using high level instructions you can use the expansion memory as external memory for the CPU Writing for SRAM type Use the F13 ICWT instruction to transfer the word data stored in the data register of the CPU to the IC memory card LI F0 MV K 100 DT9Q F13 ICWT DT 9 K1 H3FFFF With the above program after the constant K100 is stored in DT9 F13 ICWT instruction is used to write one word of data K100 from the beginning of DT9 to the address H3FFFF of the IC memory card For more details refer to the programming manual With the FROM type the Data Editor is used to write programs IC memory card Read from DT9 H 3FFFF Ne Reading Use the F12 ICRD instruction to transfer the word data stored on the IC memory card to the data register of the CPU pHs ICRD H3FFFF K1 DT7 The above program reads a one word data from the address H3FFFF of the IC memory card to DT7 For more details refer to the programming manual IC memory card One word data H 3FFFF Stored in DT7 e HEE 3 i e Yo 7 22 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 7 4 For Use as Expansion Memory 2 When dealing with many different data or other such applications you can create a table to store the different control data and easily switch between the data ac
128. 0 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 1 Backplane and Expansion Cable 2 1 2 Basic Backplane H Type FP2 BP MH sv 6 O co O oo o0 60 00 006 606 06 6 006 55 6 05 OO Se Se ial ri i Parts Terminology and Functions 4 Backplane mounting holes for mounting the backplane to the control panel Use M4 screw for the mounting 2 Unit guides Align the tab on the unit with this guide when installing the unit to the backplane From the left side of the backplane install the power supply unit CPU I O units and intelligent units in this order 3 Connector for various units Install various unit 4 DIN rail attachment lever allows attachment to a DIN rail Unit installation holes for installing the unit to the backplane Use the screw supplied with the unit for installation 6 Connector for power supply unit 7 Connector for expansion cable for more details regarding the cable connecting refer to section 4 1 3 Connector for CPU unit The position to install the CPU unit is fixed a Bo m Type of Backplane 11 module type Basic system only FP2 BP11MH Approx 470g rs Note The color of letters on the printed board is yellow to make easier to distinguish the FP
129. 0 to 240V AC 24VDC Current consumption 0 4A or less 0 2A or less 0 7A or less 2 5A or less at 100V AC at 200V AC at 100V AC 0 4A or less at 200V AC Surge current 40A or less 30A or less 10A or less at 25 C 77 F Rated frequency 50Hz 60Hz Operating voltage 85 to 132V AC 170 to 264V AC 85 to 264V AC 20 4 to 31 2V DC range 1 Output Output capacity at 5V Max 2 5A Max 5A Max 5A Alarm contact capacity 30V DC 1A Alarm contact operation When the ALARM LED of CPU is lit Alarm contact type 1c contact Leakage current Between input and ground terminals 0 75mA or less Breakdown voltage 1500V AC for 1 minutes 500V AC for 1 between input and ground terminals minutes between input and ground terminals Insulation resistance 100MQ 500V DC between input and ground terminals Guaranteed lifetime 20000 hours at 55 C 131 F Overcurrent protection function Built in overcurrent protection Fuse Built in Terminal screw M3 1 The allowable variation in voltage after startup is 15 6V to 31 2V 2 29 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 8 2 8 2 8 1 Input and Output Units Input and Output Units Common Specifications of Input and Output Units
130. 1 2 50 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 10 Output Units Specifications 2 10 7 64 point Type Transistor NPN Output Unit Specifications Item Description CCidC Part number FP2 Y64T Insulation method Optical coupler Rated load voltage 5 to 24V DC Load voltage range 4 75 to 26 4V DC Maximum load current 0 1A at 12 to 24V DC 50mA at 5V DC Note Maximum surge current 0 3A Off state leakage current 1uA or less On state maximum voltage drop 1V or less at 6 to 26 4V DC 0 5V or less at 6V DC or less Response time off on 0 1ms or less on gt off 0 3ms or less Internal current consumption 210mA or less at 5V DC Power supply for driving Voltage 4 75 to 26 4V DC internal circuit Current 250mA or less at 24V DC Surge absorber Zener diode Fuse ratings None Common method Output points per 32 points common common Operating indicator 32 dot LED display lit when on switching External connection method Connector MIL type two 40 pin Weight Approx 120g i Note The load current will vary depending on the power supply for driving the internal circuit and the ambient temperature Adjust the load current referring to the following range 100 64 S Number of 5 points per 43 5 50 common which 6 are simulta 5g x neous o
131. 1 63 003F 00000000 00111111 0000 0000 0110 0011 255 OOFF 00000000 11111111 0000 0010 0101 0101 9999 270F 00100111 00001111 1001 1001 1001 1001 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 7 ASCII Codes DEL 0 amp DEL SPACE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US 0 b7 b4 NUL SOH 1 STX ETX EOT ENQ NAK ACK SYN BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR SO SI 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bo RS Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Index Index A Alarm function 4 36 ALARM LED 8 7 Alarm output 4 37 Arbitrary allocation 3 3 3 7 ASCII codes 10 97 Automatic allocation 3 3 3 15 B Backplane 1 5 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 4 6 Backup battery 4 13 9 3 Baud rate 5 5 BCD 11 96 Before entering a program ix Before turning on the power ix 5 3 Binary 11 96 C Check items 5 3 Clearing registered content 3 17 COM port RS232C 2 11 Comment function 6 16 Communication error
132. 16T 120 or less output 32 point connector NPN type FP2 Y32T 140 or less 64 point connector NPN type FP2 Y64T 250 or less 16 point terminal PNP type FP2 Y16P 70 or less 32 point connector PNP type FP2 Y32P 150 or less 64 point connector PNP type FP2 Y64P 270 or less I O mixed unit 32 point 24V DC input 32 point connector NPN FP2 XY64D2T Input 4 3 or less per one point output type FP2 XY64D7T Output 120 or less 32 point 24V DC input 32 point connector PNP FP2 XY64D2P Input 4 3 or less per one point output type FP2 XY64D7P Output 130 or less ea Notes e The input unit displays the current flowing to the internal cir cuit The other units display the current value required to drive the internal circuit This value does not include the load cur rent of the output unit Refer to the manual of the particular unit you are using to confirm the current consumed at 24V by the S LINK units Positioning units High speed counter units and Pulse I O units 1 14 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Overview 1 3 Expansion Function 1 3 Expansion Function 1 3 1 Computer Link 1 1 communication 1 N communication The FP2 CPU can be directly A C NET adapter can be used to enable connected to a computer through communication for a number of programmable the COM RS232C port controllers Be C NET adapter
133. 2 44 2 46 2 48 2 50 2 52 2 54 2 57 2 60 2 63 2 66 Power outages 6 4 Power supply sequence ix Power supply system 4 16 Power supply unit 2 28 Power supply voltage 4 15 Pressure connection terminal 4 15 Preventive maintenance 9 8 Program memory 7 13 Program memory field 7 6 Programming tool 1 19 4 5 Programming tool software 5 5 5 6 Protect error message 8 10 R RAM operation 6 3 6 5 6 13 Reading the program 7 18 Relays 10 10 Removable terminal block 9 7 Restrictions on unit types 1 10 ROM 1 21 2 15 2 22 ROM operation 6 3 6 13 RT 2 relay terminal 4 31 S Safety measures 4 36 Self diagnostic function 8 3 Setting the alarm battery error 6 14 Setting the battery error warnings 6 4 6 point type relay output unit 2 41 16 point type DC input unit 2 33 16 point type relay output unit 2 39 16 point type transistor NPN output unit 2 43 16 point type transistor PNP output unit 2 45 60k step standard type CPU FP2 C2 2 19 64 point type DC input unit 2 37 64 point type transistor NPN output unit 2 51 64 point type transistor PNP output unit 2 53 Spare parts 9 3 Specifications 10 3 SRAM 7 3 Standard type CPU FP2 C1 2 8 Start up sequence 4 36 Static electricity viii Status indicator LEDs 2 9 8 3 System configuration 1 3 T Terminal 4 24 Terminal block 4 3
134. 2 backplane H type from the FP2 backplane 2 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 1 Backplane and Expansion Cable 2 1 3 Expansion Backplane H Type FP2 BP EH O E a E BASSAN 6 co oo ss 0 00 O 00 006 006 006 06 6 00 OO ae D Naa Parts Terminology and Functions Q Backplane mounting holes for mounting the backplane to the control panel Use M4 screw for the mounting 2 Unit guides Align the tab on the unit with this guide when installing the unit to the backplane From the left side of the backplane install the power supply unit I O units and intelligent units in this order 3 Connector for various units Install 1 O unit 4 DIN rail attachment lever allows attachment to a DIN rail Unit installation holes for installing the unit to the backplane Use the screw supplied with the unit for installation 6 Connector for power supply unit 7 Connector for expansion cable for more details regarding the cable connecting refer to section 4 1 3 Board number setting switch is used to set a bord number for the expansion backplane I O numbers are assigned according to the board number set the board numbers in increasing order 1 2 and 3 from the board close to the basic backplane Do not set 4 or higher numbers as proper operation cannot be guaranteed
135. 25 B3A Round type 2 MS3 1 04 to 2 63mm2 Fork type 2 N3A Wiring to Terminal Block Remove the terminal block before beginning the wiring operations To remove the termi nal block push downward on the release lever located at the top of the terminal block Terminal block 4 34 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 5 Wiring the Terminal Block Type I O Units ia Note Install the terminal block by inserting it all the way to its original position and pressing the lock button on the bottom of the unit Then confirm that the terminal block is securely attached and cannot be removed Use the numbers described on the terminal cover by replacing with the printed contents of the terminal layout for the main unit 4 35 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 6 Safety Measures 4 6 Safety Measures 4 6 1 Safety Instructions Precautions Regarding System Design In certain applications malfunction may occur for the following reasons Power on timing differences between the PLC system and I O or motorized devices An operation time lag when a momentary power failure occurs Abnormality in the PLC external power supply or other devices In order to prevent a malfunction resulting in system shutdown choose the ad
136. 2C Baud rate PLC default 9600 bps Data length PLC default 8 bits Stop bit PLC default 1 bit Parity PLC default Odd In case of Ethernet ate ee Trie Earskl te P Dee ET LAH unit hoists presen Beim fe Anpas P siber araca Patr H Fors Mei 7 dn Wes re fami T i Deiari inhi Port Mio O tir Baran Ho f 11 Bit Diamans Ting Gen iE Conmection Times Deti x miry Lost Bel nir For more detail refer to the FPWIN GR software help 5 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Procedure Until Operation FP2 FP2SH 5 2 Programming with Programming Tool Software 5 8 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 6 FP2 FP2SH Operation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 1 FP2 Operation 6 1 FP2 Operation 6 1 1 FP2 RAM and ROM Operations 6 1 1 1 Comparison of RAM and ROM Operations With the FP2 either RAM operation or ROM operation can be selected for the execution method of the program RAM operation Executes the program written into the internal RAM of the CPU ROM operation
137. 2SH FP10SH DT90267 Not used N A N A Index register bank current DT90268 value The current value of index register bank is Available stored here PLC FP2SH FP10SH A A Index register bank shelter DT90269 number The shelter number of index register bank Available is stored here PLC FP2SH FP10SH DT90399 Not used N A N A Number of the The total of the error alarm relay which ad ate went on is stored here Max 500 M Wonton ea A NA Available XI lie on HDF lt R DT90400 gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address FP3 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Name Descriptions Read ing Writ ing DT90401 First error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH The first error alarm relay number which went on is stored The error has been reset by executing a RST instruction Example 1 Using RST instruction Specify the stored error alarm relay number E12 x1 E12 HH oF lt R gt Example 2 Using RST instruction and DT90401 x1 H DF lt R pT90401 gt DT90402 Second error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH DT90403 Third error alarm relay which went on Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH DT90404 Forth error alarm relay which went on Available PLC
138. 3 PRMRD and F153 RMWT P153 PRMWT instructions as follows R9036 RMWT P153 i z off No abnormality detected PRMWT instruction end fla on An abnormality detected access error g The error code is stored in DT90036 Turns on when the serial data communication error occurs R9037 COM port communica using COM port tion error flag Turns off when data is being sent by the F144 TRNS instruction R9038 COM port receive flag Turns on when the end code is received during the serial data communicating Turns on while data is not sent during the serial data communicating ve COM peresend fied Turns off while data is being sent during the serial data communicating R903A Not used R903B Not used R903C Not used R903D Not used R903E Not used R903F Not used riar alarn 0 T0 E0 Turns on while the error alarm relay EO to E2047 acts Reo AvallabioF TO Turns off when the all error alarm relay turns off FP2SH FP10SH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Address Name Description MEWNET W P link When using MEWNET W link unit or MEWNET P link R9050 transmission error flag unit one WIP LINK 1 turns on when transmission error occurs at link 1 turns on when there is an error in the link area settings MEWNET W P link When using MEWNET W link unit or MEWNET P lin
139. 3 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Item sakes Name peal Descriptions ress value Hold type area starting address setting for MEWNET H link relays Available PLC FP10SH 16 128 128 to 640 Hold type area starting address setting for 17 MEWNET H link data 256 256 to 8448 registers oe Available PLC FP10SH hold Hold type area starting address setting for index 18 register 0 0 to 224 Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Hold type area starting address setting for file register for bank 2 Available PLC FP2SH 0 0 to 32765 Disable or enable setting 20 for duplicated output Disable Disable enable Operation settings when MEWNET TR communication error occurs Stop Stop continuation 21 Operation setting when VO error occurs Stop Stop continuation Operation settings when 22 an intelligent unit error Stop Stop continuation occurs Operation settings when 23 an I O verification error Stop Stop continuation occurs Operation settings when a system watching dog 24 timer error occurs Stop Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Stop continuation Action on error Set the time out time for watching dog timer with system register 30 Operation settings when connection time error occurs in the remote slave station 25 Stop Stop continuation Operation settings when 26 gt an operation error occurs Stop Stop continuation
140. 3 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 6 Safety Measures 4 38 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Procedure Until Operation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Procedure Until Operation FP2 FP2SH 5 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Procedure Until Operation 5 1 Before Turning ON the Power 5 1 Before Turning ON the Power 5 1 1 Check Items After wiring be sure to check the items below before turning on the power supply to the FP2 FP2SH system Cee CO er Unit mounting status Does the unit type match the device list during the design stage Are the unit mounting screws properly tightened Is the unit dust protected label detached Are the installation screws for the expansion memory unit properly tightened Does the power supply unit type match the actual power supply Is the lock button for the input output terminal block properly locked Wiring Are the terminal block mounting screws properly tightened Does the wiring of terminal match the signal name Wiring size to small for the current that is carried Connection cable Is the expansion cable properly connected Is the connection connector properly locked Is t
141. 4 32k step standard type CPU FP2 C2L 2 19 32 point type transistor PNP output unit 2 49 32 point type DC input unit 2 35 32 point type DC input with on pulse catch input function 32 point type transistor output NPN unit 2 61 32 point type DC input with on pulse catch input function 32 point type transistor output PNP unit 2 64 32 point type DC input 32 point type transistor NPN output unit 2 55 32 point type DC input 32 point type transistor PNP output unit 2 58 1 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Index FP2 FP2SH 32 point type transistor NPN output unit 2 47 Troubleshooting 8 5 2 module type 1 4 W Watchdog timer 4 37 Weight 10 4 Wiring the connector type units 4 23 Wiring the terminal block type units 4 34 Writing the program 7 13 Writing to ROM 6 8 l 4 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Record of changes Manual No Date Desceiption of changes ARCT1F320E Jul 2000 First edition ACG M320E ARCT1F320E 1 Jul 2003 2 edition ACG M320E 1 ARCT1F320E 2 May 2004 3 edition ACG M320E 2 ARCT1F320E 3 Feb 2005 4 edition ACG M320E 3 ARCT1F320E 4 Sep 2006 5 edition ACG M320E 4 ARCT1F320E 5 Mar 2007 6 edition ACG M320E 5 ARCT1F320E 6 Apr 2008 7 edition ACG M320E 6 ARCT1F320E 7 Oct 2008
142. 4 is in the RUN mode No 4 Turns off when unit No 4 is in the PROG mode R9074 Unit Turns on when unit No 5 is in the RUN mode No 5 Turns off when unit No 5 is in the PROG mode R9075 Unit Turns on when unit No 6 is in the RUN mode No 6 Turns off when unit No 6 is in the PROG mode R9076 Unit Turns on when unit No 7 is in the RUN mode MEWNET W P No 7 Turns off when unit No 7 is in the PROG mode R9077 PC link Unit Turns on when unit No 8 is in the RUN mode operation No 8 Turns off when unit No 8 is in the PROG mode R9078 mode relay Unit Turns on when unit No 9 is in the RUN mode for PC link 0 No 9 Turns off when unit No 9 is in the PROG mode R9079 W P Unit Turns on when unit No 10 is in the RUN mode No 10 Turns off when unit No 10 is in the PROG mode R907A Unit Turns on when unit No 11 is in the RUN mode No 11 Turns off when unit No 11 is in the PROG mode R907B Unit Turns on when unit No 12 is in the RUN mode No 12 Turns off when unit No 12 is in the PROG mode R907C Unit Turns on when unit No 13 is in the RUN mode No 13 Turns off when unit No 13 is in the PROG mode R907D Unit Turns on when unit No 14 is in the RUN mode No 14 Turns off when unit No 14 is in the PROG mode R907E Unit Turns on when unit No 15 is in the RUN mode No 15 Turns off when unit No 15 is in the PROG mode R907F Unit Turns on when unit No 16 is in the RUN mode No 16 Turns off when unit No 16 is in the PROG
143. 412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net I O Allocation FP2 FP2SH 3 6 I O Numbers of Free Slots 3 6 2 2 When I O Mount Allocation is Used When I O mount allocation is executed 16 points are uniformly assigned to each free slot Advantage When the I O unit that occupy 16 points is added there is no need to worry about I O number discrepancies 16 points are assigned to free modules free slots i 16 point type 16 point type CPU DC input unit transistor output unit backplane i 1 Slots that do not actually exist Slot No gt 2 3 4 5 6 15 o PSAI FPaGt AEA MCA pa Yier var A as ay Pe a 1 e B 6 SETET ONT Py Seo eos SEL I 8 i i 3 8 8 i f i 1 i 1 1 1 I i 1 1 1 Cac a i j E i i n lO AA ee eee D 1 Peers SN ee ney as are u xo X10 20 Y30 Y40 50 60 150 to to to to to to to to XF XF F Y3F Y4F 5F 6F 15F 16 points are assigned to free modules free slots packpla he 16 17 138 19 2 Y16T va oj esa vea ve ya O
144. 500 hours FP2 EM7 Min 10 000 hours typical approx 13 000 hours 10 6 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Specifications 10 1 Specifications ia Notes 1 The practical usable external input and output points are re stricted according to the number of the input and output units The external output relays Y that not used at the output unit can be used as internal relays 2 The expansion memory unit FP2 EM2 FP2 EM3 or FP2 EM6 is required 3 Hold or non hold type can be set using the system registers 4 Can also be used as internal relays 5 Can also be used as data registers 6 The expansion memory unit FP2 EM1 FP2 EM2 or FP2 EM3 is required 7 Precision of calendar timer At 0 C 32 F less than 90 second error per month At 25 C 77 F less than 40 second error per month At 55 C 131 F less than 98 second error per month 8 The expansion memory unit FP2 EM3 FP2 EM6 or FP2 EM7 is required 10 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Specifications FP2 FP2SH 10 1 Specifications FP2SH Performance Specifications FP2SH CPU FP2 C2L AFP2221 FP2 C2 AFP2231 FP2 C2P AFP2235 FP2 C3P AFP2255 Program control method Relay symbol cyclic operation Controllable Basic Using Backplanes Max 768 points 12 modules
145. 6 5 2 Retaining Data If the Power Fails Operation Memory Backup Of the internal relays data registers and other operation memories data specified as hold type data in the system registers is backed up by the backup battery Setting the Alarm Battery Error Normally if a problem occurs with the backup battery the BATT and ERROR LEDs on the front panel of the CPU light to warn of a battery error During ROM operation and when no operation memory backup is required the alarm battery error can be set to off If this setting is entered the BATT and ERROR LEDs do not light Method The FPWIN GR tool software is used Procedure 1 On the Option menu select PLC Configuration Tool Option Window Help s l Allocate 170 Map Allocate Remote I O Map Communication Settings EPWIN_GR Configuration Keyboard Customize The PLC Configuration window is opened 6 14 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 5 FP2SH Operation Open the Initial Switch tab Delete the check from the Alarm battery error check box BA Configuration Untitiel Click on OK to close the window 4 The data is downloaded to the PLC 6 15 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net F
146. 6 to 26 4V DC 0 5V or less at 6V DC or less Response time off on 0 1ms or less on gt off 0 3ms or less Internal current consumption 210mA or less at 5V DC Power supply for driving Voltage 4 75 to 26 4V DC internal circuit Current 270mA or less at 24V DC Surge absorber Zener diode Fuse ratings None Common method Output points per 32 points common common Operating indicator 32 dot LED display lit when on switching External connection method Connectors MIL type two 40 pin Weight Aprox 120g The load current will vary depending on the power supply for driving the internal circuit and the ambient temperature Adjust the load current referring to the following range 100 Number of 64 nay points per Cc D common which 5 are simulta 50b 24 5 neous on 21 8 x g l 12 21 55 4 75 10 2 26 4 53 6 69 8 131 Power supply for driving internal circuit V Ambient temperature C F 2 53 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 10 Output Units Specifications Internal Circuit Diagram Output indicator 8 2kQ LED 5 to 24V DC Pin Layout Output YO to Y1F Output Y20 to Y3F Pin layout of first 32 points Pin layout of last 32 points Left side connector CN1 Right side connector CN2 CN1 CN2 s 00000000
147. 7 AFP 8536 AFP8532 PC FP2 FP2SH Commercially available RS232C cable Two core cable RS485 VCTFO 75 x 2C Be eunaan A maximum of 32 stations can be connected Since a COM RS232C port and TOOL RS232C port comes standard on the CPU for the FP2 FP2SH direct communication with the computer can be achieved without the addition of any intelligent units Using a host computer program the relay conditions and register contents of the CPU can be read and written With communications from a host computer communication programs are unnecessary on the CPU side 1 15 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Overview FP2 FP2SH 1 3 Expansion Function Table of specifications Communication method Description 1 1 communication Half duplex 1 N communication Half duplex Synchronization method Start stop synchronous system Communication path RS232C cable Two core cable VCTF 0 75mm2 x 2C Transmission distance Max 15m 49 2ft Max 1200m 3 937ft Transmission speed Baud rate 1200bps 2400bps 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115 2Kbps 9600bps 19200bps Transmission code ASCII Transmission format Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Parity check none even odd Character bits 7 bits 8 bits Necessary devices in configuration 1 1 com
148. ABS D Gives the absolute value of the data of 3 lolololololc P88 absolute PDABS D 1 D ee ee ee F89 16 bit data EXT D Extends the 16 bits of data in D to 32 P89 sign extension PEXT bits in D 1 D 3 0 0 0 0 0 O F90 Decode DECO S n D Decodes part of the data of S and P90 PDECO stores 7 0 0 0 0 jojo it in D The part is specified by n F91 7 segment SEGT S D Converts the data of S for use in a 7 P91 decode PSEGT segment display and stores it in D 1 5 0 0 0 0 ojo D F92 Encode ENCO S n D Encodes part of the data of S and P92 PENCO stores it in D The part is specified by 7 O Q 0 O0 0 0 n F93 16 bit data UNIT S n D The least significant digit of each of the P93 combine PUNIT n words of data beginning at S are 7 0 0 0 0jojo stored united in order in D O Available X Not available A Not available partially Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net I 72 i o jaje num Name ieee Cee Description lelg R A a i ber lean rand aj i elrcl e z re a F94 16 bit data distribute DIST S n Each of the digits of the data of S P94 PDIST D are stored in distributed to the least 7lolololololo significant digits of the areas beginning at D F95 Character gt ASCII ASC S D Twe
149. C 2 5A type 100 to 240V AC 5A type FP2 PSA1 FP2 PSA3 200V AC 2 5A type 24V DC 5A type FP2 PSA2 FP2 PSD2 00006 hes t Backplanes for CPU and expan sion backplanes The 5 module type 5 fe eal backplane can not be i used for expansion hi D INEA Standard type CPU with CPU with Standard type Small PC card compliant type CPU 64 point input S LINK 32k step FP2 C2L 60k step FP2 C2P 5 module type FP2 C1 FP2 C1D FP2 C1SL AFP2221 AFP2235 FP2 BP05 60k step FP2 C2 120k step FP2 C3P AFP2231 AFP2255 ONDERE Optional memories Memory unit for FP2SH 7 module type For FP2 FP2 BP07 o FP2 EM3 FP2 EM1 i FP2 EM6 M o mm P2 EM2 FP2 EM7 H Type of 9 module type Memory unit F ROM EP ROM FP2 BP09 Comment Clock With 16k ROM socket AFP5208 AFP5209 input calendar expansion FP2 EM7 function function RAM a oe EEO ee eee Memory unit for FP2SH FP2 EM1 A N A 12 module type FP2 EM2 A FP2 BP12 FP2 EM3 A FP2 EM6 Memory unit F ROM implemented FP2 EM7 AFP2208 14 module type A Available N A Not available FP2 BP14 ee CE Backplanes H type FROM ebay EPROM FP2 EM5 Small PC card for FP2SH Option FROM type IC memory ca
150. D S1 and S2 to 32 bits of binary data 11 0 0 0 O0 0 0 data and stores it in D 1 D F80 16 bit binary BCD S D Converts the 16 bits of binary data P80 data gt 4 digit PBCD specified by S to four digits of BCD 5 olololololo BCD data data and stores it in D j Example K100 H100 F81 4 digit BCD BIN S D Converts the four digits of BCD data P81 data gt 16 bit PBIN specified by S to 16 bits of binary data zs gayle j a ea 5 32 B amp a Z Q binary data and stores it in D Example H100 gt K100 F82 32 bit binary DBCD S D Converts the 32 bits of binary data P82 data gt 8 digit PDBCD specified by S 1 S to eight digits of 7 olololololo BCD data BCD data and stores it in D 1 D rs en ee re F83 8 digit BCD DBIN S D Converts the eight digits of BCD data P83 data gt 32 bit PDBIN specified by S 1 S to 32 bits of binary 7 0 0 0 0 ojo binary data data and stores it in D 1 D F84 16 bit data INV D Inverts each bit of data of D P84 invert com PINV 3 O Q 0 O0 0 C plement of 1 F85 16 bit data NEG D Inverts each bit of data of D and adds P85 complement PNEG 1 inverts the sign 3 0 0 0 0 o0 lo of 2 F86 32 bit data DNEG D Inverts each bit of data of D 1 D and P86 complement PDNEG adds 1 inverts the sign 3 0 0 0 ojojo of 2 F87 16 bit data ABS D Gives the absolute value of the data of 3 lolololololo P87 absolute PABS D 7 i F88 32 bit data D
151. D j a ane F28 32 bit data D S1 S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D 1lolololololo P28 subtraction PD S2 D F30 16 bit data S1 S1 X S2 gt D 1 D 7lolololololc P30 multiplication P S2 D z OE F31 32 bit data D S1 S1 1 S1 X S2 1 S2 gt D 3 D 2 u lolololololo P31 multiplication PD S2 D D 1 D pp F32 16 bit data S1 S1 S2 quotient D zlolololololo P32 division P 2 D remainder DT9015 ee ee eee F33 32 bit data D S1 S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt quotient D 1 P33 division PD S2 D D 1 O0 O0 O0 O0 O0 C remainder DT9016 DT9015 F34 16 bit data W S1 S1 X S2 D P34 multiplication P W S2 D result in 16 bits F35 16 bit data 1 D D 1 D 3 lolololololo P35 increment P 1 i F36 32 bit data D 1 D D 1 D 1 gt D 1 D 3 lolololololo P36 increment PD 1 i F37 16 bit data 1 D D 1 gt D 3 lolololololc P37 decrement P 1 sy SE eller leo ee F38 32 bit data D 1 D D 1 D 1 gt D 1 D 3 lololololole P38 decrement PD 1 ee ee ee R A F39 32 bit data D D S1 S1 1 S1 x S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D P39 multiplication PD D S2 D 1x lololololo result in 32 a i bits O Available X Not available A Not available partially Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net T 2 S o jaie eal Name oe Operand Descri
152. Display the allocation screen 1 Set the FPWIN GR software to OFFLINE mode 2 On the Option menu select Allocate I O Map Creating allocations 1 In No of Slots enter the number of modules number of slots to used OE is assigned to the slots after they are specified In this case the number of modules that can be used is 5 so enter 5 aieea Mo Une lini xj e a ed u wi wi wil W perme 2 Assign input X or output Y according to the I O units to be installed in each slot Assign 16X to slots 0 and 1 and 16Y to slots 2 through 4 E xj Skije CE l iwi d vee 5 T Coxe 3 8 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH I O Allocation 3 2 Arbitrary Allocation When a system is configured with the FP2 backplane H type AFP25 H the display is shown as AFP25 since no exclusive tool display is not available for the H type The actual system is as shown below No indication of the power supply unit and expansion unit o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 POWEI CPU 9 POWER 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Registering contents of allocation Write the contents of allocation to the System register of the CPU 1 On the Online menu select Online Edit Mode 2 On the File menu selec
153. Email info ctiautomation net Maintenance FP2 FP2SH 9 2 Preventive Maintenance 9 2 Preventive Maintenance Although the FP2 FP2SH system has been designed in such a way to minimize mainte nance and offer troublefree operation several maintenance aspects should be taken into consideration If preventive maintenance is performed periodically you will minimize the possibility of system malfunctions Inspection item Inspection description Basis of judgement Reference Power supply unit Check POWER LED on power Normal if on Section 2 7 supply unit Power supply unit Periodic replacement 20 000 hours of operation CPU display Check RUN LED On in RUN state Section 2 2 2 4 Check ERROR LED Normal if off and 8 1 Check ALARM LED Normal if off Check BATT LED Normal if off Input output unit Check input output display LED Normal if light during on and Section 2 8 display not light during off Installation condition Backplane mounting looseness Securely mounted Section 4 1 1 and Looseness and or play in unit Connection condition Looseness of terminal screw No looseness Section 4 1 3 4 2 4 4 and 4 5 4 1 2 Proximity of connection in pinch Pinched parallel terminal Connector looseness Locked in Connection condition of expan Connector section is not loose sion cable Power supply voltage Voltage between terminals FP2 PSA1 100 to 120V AC Section 4 2 1 of power supply unit FP2 PSA2 200 t
154. F by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data integer con with sign rounding the first decimal j version rounding point off and the converted data is 8 2 10 10010 ojo the first decimal stored in D 1 D 1 point off to integer F333 Floating point FINT S D The decimal part of the real number P333 type data round PFINT data specified in S 1 S is rounded n ding the first down and the result is stored in 8 1010 10 0 0 decimal point D 1 D 1 down F334 Floating point FRINT S D The decimal part of the real number P334 type data round PFRINT data stored in S 1 S is rounded 3 l lololololc ding the first off and the result is stored in D 1 si A ne a ean decimal point off D F335 Floating point F S D The real number data stored in S 1 P335 type data sign PF S is changed the sign and the 8 O O O o0 0 changes result is stored in D 1 D 1 F336 Floating point FABS S D Takes the absolute value of real P336 type data absolute PFABS number data specified by S 1 S s 4lololololo and the result absolute value is 4 p j stored in D 1 D F337 Floating point RAD S D The data in degrees of an angle P337 type data degree PRAD specified in S 1 S is converted to 3 l lololololo radian radians real number data and the i g result is stored in D 1 D F338 Floating point DEG S D The angle data in radians real P338 type data radian PDEG number data specified in S 1 S is sl4lololololo degree
155. FROM Procedure 1 Use the tool software to write programs and comments When doing this programs are stored in the internal RAM in the FP2SH and comments are stored in the in ternal RAM if the FP2 C2 is being used and in the internal FROM if the FP2 C2P or FP2 C3P is being used 2 RAM operation begins when the PLC is switched to the RUN mode 6 17 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 6 FP2SH RAM Operation 6 6 2 Precautions When Operating the RAM All contents written to the RAM are retained by the backup battery Please pay close attention to the service life of the backup battery ie Note It is recommended to save the programs and data within the CPU in a PC in case that it requires time for the replacement 6 18 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation 6 7 1 ROM Operation Function The FP2SH is equipped with a function that causes programs or programs and data to be stored ina ROM FROM or EPROM that does not require backing up This func tion also causes operations to be executed based on the contents of that ROM FP2 C2L FP2 C2 FP2 C2P FP2 C3P Storage memory FROM or EPROM optional Internal FROM Remark Memory unit AFP2208 or FP2 EM7 FROM is not de
156. H 2 2 FP2CPU Mode Selector Use the mode selector to start and stop the operation For test operations set the initial ize test switch to TEST position Selector position Operation mode RUN upward This sets the RUN mode The program is executed and operation begins REMOTE This enables operation to be started and stopped from a programming tool At the center stage where the selector is changed when switching from the PROG to the RE MOTE mode the system remains in the PROG mode and when switching from the RUN to the REMOTE mode it remains in the RUN mode PROG downward This sets the PROG mode In this mode programming can be done using tools the test operation mode can be accessed and the operation memory can be initialized using the Initialize tset switch Operation Condition Switches SW4 SW3 SWw2 SW1 Item Baud rate for tool port Switch position off factory setting System register setting Default value 19 200bps on 9 600bps Sw2 Program memory selection Internal RAM Optional memory ROM SW3 Program memory protection Write enabled Write protected SW4 Not used 2 10 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net NURA FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions COM Port RS232C Pin alignment 2 2 FP2CPU
157. ICWT instruction and F12 ICRD instruction of the sequence pro gram are used to write and read data automatically About AFP2209 An interchangeable lithium battery is used When you use for the first time install the battery included The battery voltage of IC card is detected only once when the CPU unit is powered on An error will not be determined if the battery is replaced during power on About AIC52000 An internal secondary battery is provided for backup purposes The data on the SRAM type IC memory card is backed up by a chargeable secondary battery When the card is first inserted in the CPU and the power supply is turned on the battery is not charged so an error reading IC card battery error occurs Before using the card for the first time always insert it in the CPU and leave it for at least 24 hours before turning on the power supply This fully charges the battery Memory backup time Ambient temperature of 25 C Model No Memory retention time The battery life AFP2209 Approx 3 years or more AIC52000 3 months If operated at 25 C for 12 hours a day with the power supply off Approx 10 years The service life is shorter at high temperatures or if the power supply is left off or long periods of time 7 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH 7 1 Using the IC Memory Card 7 1 2 Using t
158. Interrupt Probably a hardware abnormality E30 error 0 Stops Please contact your dealer An interrupt occurred without an interrupt Interrupt request A hardware problem or error due to E31 Stops noise is possible AJAJIAJAJAJAJAJA error 1 Turn off the power and check the noise conditions There is no interrupt program for an interrupt which occurred E32 interrupt Stops Check the number of the interrupt program AJ AJAJA JAJAJAJA error 2 and change it to agree with the interrupt request MUORE Thi h FP3 FP10SH i is error occurs when a is E33 data CPU2 used as CRUD for a multi CPU system AIA unmatch Stops Refer to Multi CPU system Manual error An abnormal unit is installed FP FPOR FPOR mode FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data register DT90036 and locate the abnormal unit Then 1 0 status turn off the power and replace the unit with a E34 ror Stops nan one A A A A A FP3 Check the contents of special data register DT9036 and locate the abnormal unit Then turn off the power and replace the unit with a new one MEWNET F A unit which cannot be installed on the slave slave station of the MEWNET F link system is E35 F Stops installed on the slave station AJAJA illegal unit gt Remove the illegal unit from the slave error station MEWNET F The number of slots or I O points used for remote MEWNET F remote I O system exceeds the limitation E36 1 0 Stops Re configur
159. M Equivalent to the 29EE010 120 4C PH SILICON STORAGE TECHNOLOGY FP2 EM4 INC Enables writing with the operation of the programming tools when attached to the CPU Equivalent to the M27C1001 12F1 SGS THOMSON MICROELECTRONICS FP2 EM5 A commercially available ROM writer is required for writing 2 15 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 3 Expansion Memory Unit and ROM for FP2 CPU Installation Procedure Installing the expansion memory unit Procedure 1 Send the program and data to the personal computer using the program ming tool software NPST GR or FPWIN GR Save the program and data to the disk Set the mode selector of the FP2 CPU to PROG Turn off the power supply and remove the FP2 CPU Remove the retaining screw Retaining screw Cre ON FP2 CPU 6 Install the expansion memory unit 7 Secure the expansion memory unit with the retaining screw Retaining screw FP2 CPU 8 Install the FP2 CPU to the backplane and turn on the power supply 9 Perform a program clear using the programming tool software 10 Send to the FP2 CPU the program and data saved in step 2 above For the FP2 EM2 FP2 EM3 and FP2 EM6 continue with the procedures below 11 At the NPST Configuration menu for NPST GR or Select PLC Type menu for FPWIN GR of programming tool
160. N AB6201 AFPN AB6218 1 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Backplanes and units used System configuration CPU backplane Install in order from the left to the intelligent units he rig power supply unit the CPU unit the Backplane Backplane H type Basic 11 module type 65 7 9 module 12 14 type module type Expan sion 10 module type Overview FP2 FP2SH 1 2 Unit Types and Combinations 1 2 2 Combinations That Can be Used and Restrictions 1 2 2 1 Restrictions on Unit Types Expansion backplane Install in order from the left to units he rig power supply unit the I O and the intelligent ht he system Instal UOneIS ears Master backplane for slave si tation in order from the left to tl the power supply unit the Remote I O slave unit the I O and the intelligent units Replace the CPU on the CPU backplane with a remote I O slave unit he right auejdyoeq waysAs station system Expansion backplane for slave Install in order from the left to the right the power supply unit the I O and the intelligent units Same as the installa tion of the expansion backplane Limitations on Combining Link Units When CPU unit is FP2 When CPU unit is FP2SH Unit type and mode Computer co
161. OO GHOQSOOGLHOOHOSO o j jo o a jo v 5 to 24V DC jz j HAO OOOOOOOO Sie 8 gt ed OOS fate f o fe f 000 OOOOC T OHOBDGOOHGOSS SOOPHOHHOLH Although and terminals are connected internally with the same connector It is recommended that they also be connected externally 2 63 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 11 2 11 4 I O Mixed Units Specifications 32 point Type DC Input with On Pulse Catch Input Function 32 point Type Transistor Output PNP Unit Specifications Ca OOO OSSO Part number FP2 XY64D7P Input specifica tions Insulation method Optical coupler Rated input voltage Rated input current 24V DC Approx 4 3mA at 24V DC Input impedance Approx 5 6kQ Input voltage range 20 4 to 26 4V DC Min on voltage Min on current Max off voltage Max off current 19 2V 4mA 5 0V 1 5mA Response time off on on off 0 2ms or less for XO to X1F 0 3ms or less for XO to X1B 1 0 to 5 0ms for X1C to X1F Common method Input points per common 32 points common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal Output specifica tions Insulation method Rated load voltage
162. Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 8 FP2SH IC Memory Card Operation for FRP2 C2P FP2 C3P 6 8 3 How the IC Memory Card is Operated Turn off the power supply and remove the CPU Have the IC memory card ready that contains programs already written to it Procedure 1 Set the DIP switches on the back of the CPU for IC memory card operation SW2 on SW4 on 2 Install the CPU back in its original position on the back plane If the power supply is switched on in the RUN mode the program on the IC memory card called Autoexec spg is sent to the internal RAM The program is transferred at the point when the power supply is turned on i Note If the power supply is turned on with the Autoexec spg file on the IC memory card all contents of the RAM up to that point are lost 6 32 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 8 FP2SH IC Memory Card Operation for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 6 8 4 Transferring Data From the RAM to the IC Memory Card The RAM ROM Transfer function in the FPWIN GR tool software is used to send programs and data in the CPU to an SRAM type IC memory card The data range can be specified as any of the following fields WL WR DT FL SV EV and LD DIP switch settings SW2 off SW4 on FP2SH FP2 C2P FP2 C3P Internal SRAM oh J Internal FROM RAM gt ROM i transmission
163. P1 move PDMV ee n ee ee ee F2 16 bit data MV S D P2 invert and PMV S gt D 5 0 0 0 o0ojojo move F3 32 bit data DMV S D n P3 invert and PDMV S 1 S gt D 1 D 7 0 00 0ojojo move F4 Reading of GETS S D The head word No of the specified slot is P4 head word PGETS read re en ee AJA No of the af AR a a specified slot F5 Bit data BIM S n The specified one bit in S is transferred to P5 move PBTM D the specified one bit in D The bit is 7 10 0 90 ojlojo specified by n F6 Hexadecimal DGT S n d The specified one digit in S is transferred P6 digit 4 bit PDGT to the specified one digit in D The digit is 7 Q O 0 0 0 0 data move specified by n F7 Two 16 bit MV2 S1 S1 gt D 7 xlololololo P7 data move PMV2 S2 D S2 gt D 1 i F8 Two 32 bit DMV2 S1 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D 1 xlololololc P8 data move PDMV2 S2 D_ S2 1 S2 gt D 3 D 2 E F10 Block move BKMV S1 The data between S1 and S2 is 7 lolololololo P10 PBKMV S2 D_ transferred to the area starting at D SM le et sre oe F11 Block copy COPY S D1 The data of S is transferred to the all area z7lolololololo P11 PCOPY D2 between D1 and D2 F12 Data read ICRD S1 The data stored in the expansion memory from EEP S2 D of the EEP ROM specified by S1 and S2 11 3 x x x x xX ROM are transferred to the area starting at D P13 Data write to PICWT S1 The data spec
164. P2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address are Name Descriptions Beads svat FP3 FP2SH P ing ing FP10SH The system uses this as a Serial communication status when DT9059 DT90059 ioa communication error occurs A N A Note communication Higher 8 bits i Lower 8 bits error code i i i For COM port For tool port Step ladder DT9060 DT90060 process 0 to 15 Step ladder DT9061 DT90061 process 16 to 31 Step ladder DT9062 DT90062 process 32 to 47 Step ladder DT9063 DT90063 process 48 to 63 Step ladder DT9064 DT90064 ree ess 64 to 79 Indicates the startup condition of the Step ladder step ladder process When the process DT9065 DT90065 process 80 to 95 starts up the bit corresponding to the Sisp ladder pr process number turns on 1 DT9066 DT90066 p p cess 96 to 111 r Step ladder oro Monitor using binary display DT9067 DT90067 p P cess 112 to 127 Step ladder pro 0 not executing 1 executing DT9068 DT90068 P p cess 128 to 143 A Step ladder pro Sampe 12 87 4 3 0 j a it position F 1 Brecon P1990989 cess 144 to 159 Pee neat ARR l a r a r DT 60DT90060 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0j0 0 010 0 0 1 DT9070 DT90070 SteP ladder pro cess 160 to 175 Pe Step laddarure Since bit position 0 of DT9071 DT90071 p 176t ar DT9060 DT90060 is 1 step ladder cess dd 2 pr
165. P2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 5 FP2SH Operation 6 5 3 Comment Function The FP2SH is equipped with a function that allows program comments I O comments block comments remarks to be stored FPS CBL FPPC FPS CBR FPE CSP Storage capacity 128 KB 512 KB Backup Backup required Backup not required The Download to PLC function in the FPWIN GR can be used to write programs and comments Check to make sure that a check mark has been placed by Program and Comment under Program Access Mode on the EPWIN_GR Configuration menu of the FPWIN GR Comment Eil The Download to PLC function in the FPWIN GR can be used to automatically store programs in the FPWIN GR to the internal RAM and to automatically store comments to the comment memory Selecting the Upload from PLC function lets you load programs in the internal RAM and data in the comment memory into the FPWIN GR 6 16 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 6 FP2SH RAM Operation 6 6 FP2SH RAM Operation 6 6 1 RAM Operation Method Check to make sure the DIP switches on the back of the CPU have been set to the RAM operation side SW2 is off CPU rear side FP2 C2 FP2 C2L FP2 C2P FP2 C3P l nternal RAM Internal RAM Built in
166. P2SH 7 2 Formatting and Erasing 7 2 Formatting and Erasing 7 2 1 Program Memory Field and Expanded Memory Field The area in which sequence programs are stored is called the program field and the area used to expand the data memory is called the expanded memory field The IC memory card must be divided into separate fields depending on how it is being used Using the Card Only as a Program Memory When using the card only to save programs the entire IC memory card must be desig nated as a program memory field FROM type Procedure 1 On the Tool menu choose IC Card Service and then Erase IC Card to erase the entire field 2 On the Tool menu select IC Card Service and then Copy File to IC Card and set the format size to the maximum size Then copy the program from a floppy disk or the hard disk to the IC memory card SRAM type Procedure On the Tool menu choose IC Card Service and then Format IC Card to format the entire field Using the Card Only as a Data Memory Area When using the card only to expand the data memory area the entire IC memory card must be designated as an expanded memory field FROM type Procedure 1 On the Tool menu choose IC Card Service and then Erase IC Card to erase the entire field 2 Using the Data Editor supplied with the FPWIN GR run the Download to PLC functio
167. P2SH Parts and Functions 2 11 1 O Mixed Units Specifications 2 11 5 On Pulse Catch Input Function The I O mixed unit FP2 XY64D7T FP2 XY64D7P is equipped with On pulse catch input function The on pulse catch input function has a delay circuit built into the input and is used in combination with a periodical interrupt function to make possible the read ing of on pulses with extremely small widths Readable pulse signals Minimum pulse width 0 4ms Pulse interval 6ms or more Pulse interval 6ms or more Min pulse width 0 4ms Method In the program specify the interval of periodical interrupt and the word number of I O Considerations The interval for the periodical interrupt is determined by the interrupt control instruction Specify the pulse catch I O input with the ICTL and F143 IORF instructions Program example When an I O mixed unit with on pulse catch input function is installed to slot 0 of the backplane R9013 CTL H8 K2 Specifying the interval for the periodical interrupt set to 1ms ED INT 24 Interrupt program R9010 F143 IORF KI K1 Specifying the word number of I O for I O update IRET 2 67 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 11 I O Mixed Units Specifications Operation of pulse catch on Input signal input pulse from external device off Note 1
168. Panasonic PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER FP2 FP2SH User s Manual ARCT1F320E 12 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Safety Precautions Observe the following notices to ensure personal safety or to prevent accidents To ensure that you use this product correctly read this User s Manual thoroughly before use Make sure that you fully understand the product and information on safety This manual uses two safety flags to indicate different levels of danger WARNING If critical situations that could lead to user s death or serious injury is assumed by mishandling of the product Always take precautions to ensure the overall safety of your system so that the whole system remains safe in the event of failure of this product or other external factor Do not use this product in areas with inflammable gas It could lead to an explosion Exposing this product to excessive heat or open flames could cause damage to the lithium battery or other electronic parts Battery may explode if mistreated Do not recharge disassemble or dispose of fire CAUTION If critical situations that could lead to user s injury or only property damage is assumed by mishandling of the product To prevent excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation use this product at the values less than the maximum of the characteristics and performance that are assured in these specifications D
169. S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 1 S2 1 2 1 1 ANF lt Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 1 A ANF lt Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 1 S2 1 2 i 4 Floating point type real number data compare OR ORF F 1 82 5 aE L Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 4 4 ORF lt gt F lt gt S1 S2 5 E L Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 1 gt S2 1 2 4 4 ORF gt cP 1 S2 SI Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 4 4 ORF gt F gt S1 S2 5 E L Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 1 S2 1 2 4 4 ORF lt FC 1 825 ale af Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32
170. SH 6 4 Writing to ROM 6 4 Writing to ROM 6 4 1 Writing to EPROM Using Programming Tool Software This method entails using programming tool software at the computer to send the program directly to any commercially available ROM writer and writing the data to the ROM Preparation Connect the commercially available ROM writer to the computer Attach the optional memory EPROM FP2 EM5 in the commercially available ROM writer Read the program with programming tool software Commercially available ROM writer Procedure 1 On the Option menu select Communication Set tings and set the transmission speed and communication format that matched that for the ROM writer 2 On the Tool menu select ROM Writer RDM Wiber Ube les 4 x Operation Malhod Execute Read e White Close riputa Destinatice _ f Seil Pot File Help Set Password White Data 3 Select Write and Serial Port and click Execute but ton The program is copied to the ROM writer 6 8 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 4 Writing to ROM 4 Write the data to the optional memory EPROM FP2 EM5 with the commercially available ROM writer The specification of commercially available ROM writer set to EPROM M27C1001 12F1 or equivalent
171. SRaAM____ 2 MmB_ A1C52000 Internal secondary battery Rechargeable type New product Memory capacity Model No Battery type SRAM ame AFP2209 Lithium Battery Interchangeable type i Notes For AFP2209 e An interchangeable lithium battery is used When you use for the first time install the battery included For AlIC52000 Memory backup of the SRAM type of IC memory card AIC52000 Is handled by an internal secondary battery When the battery is used for the first time power must be supplied for at least 24 hours to charge it fully When the battery is fully charged data is backed up for more than three months with out the power being turned on Normally the card should be installed in the PLC and power supplied when using it Failing to charge the battery periodically can reduce the backup period and the service life of the battery The backup battery cannot be replaced xiv Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Table of Figures Compatibility of FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH and Precautions Hardware Compatibility The unit backplane and other components are not compatible The components for the FP2 are used with the FP2SH When using the FP2 backplane AFP25 the maximum number of expansion points is lower With the FP10SH and FP2 backplane H type AFP25 H up to three expansion boards can be used and a maximum of 2048 p
172. THOMSON MI CROELECTRONICS For FP2SH AFP5209 M27C2001 150F1 or equivalent SGS THOMSON MI CROELECTRONICS For the following use commercially available products 3 Commercially available ROM writer A ROM writer than can be used with memory 4 Commercially available centronics cable or commercially available RS232C cable Use a cable that conforms with the specifications of the ROM writer EF Note 1 The above explanation describes the case where the memory unit is used in combination with the EP ROM As the nonvola tile memory has been implemented in the memory unit Model number AFP2208 a commercial ROM writer cannot be used for writing 2 The parts for the optional memory to be used differ depending on FP2 or FP2SH 1 22 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Parts and Functions Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 1 Backplane and Expansion Cable 2 1 Backplane and Expansion Cable 2 1 1 Backplane Parts Terminology and Functions Q Backplane mounting holes for mounting the backplane to the control panel Use M4 screw for the
173. a tion status Description and steps to take FP e FPO FPOR FPS FP X FP2 FP2SH FP10SH E46 Remote 1 0 commu nication error Selec table S LINK error Occurs only in FPO SL1 When one of the S LINK errors ERR1 3 or 4 has been detected error code E46 remote I O S LINK communication error is stored Selection of operation status using system register27 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO Selec table MEW NET F communication error A communication abnormally was caused by a transmission cable or during the power down of a slave station FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the communication condition FP3 Check the contents of special data registers DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the communication condition Selection of operation status using system register27 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO E47 MEW NET F attribute error Selec table In the unit on the slave station an abnormality such as missing unit abnormal intelligent unit was detected FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the slave condition FP3 Check the contents of special data registers DT9131 to DT9137
174. a left ROL D n Rotates the n bits in data of D to slolalolololo P121 rotate PROL the left F122 16 bit data right RCR D n Rotates the n bits in 17 bit area P122 rotate with carry PRCR consisting of D plus the carry flag 5 0 0 0O0 Ojoj o flag R9009 data R9009 data to the right F123 16 bit data left RCL D n Rotates the n bits in 17 bit area P123 rotate with carry PRCL consisting of D plus the carry flag 5 O0O ojojojolc flag R9009 data R9009 data to the left F125 32 bit data right DROR D n Rotates the number of bits specified P125 rotate PDROR by n of the double words data 32 sixlololololo bits specified by D 1 D to the how ow a right F126 32 bit data left DROL D n Rotates the number of bits specified P126 rotate PDROL by n of the double words data 32 5 xX 1O 10 0 0 0 bits specified by D 1 D to the left F127 32 bit data right DRCR D n Rotates the number of bits specified P127 rotate with carry PDRCR by n of the double words data 32 5 xlololololc flag R9009 data bits specified by D 1 D to the right f together with carry flag R9009 data F128 32 bit data left DRCL D n Rotates the number of bits specified P128 rotate with carry PDRCL by n of the double words data 32 s5 xlalolololo flag R9009 data bits specified by D 1 D to the left ee ee pe my together with carry flag R9009 data Bit manipulation instructions F130 16
175. a write protect switch on the IC memory card To prohibit writing to the IC memory card set this switch to Write protect position To write the program or data to the IC memory card set the write protect switch to off position 2 27 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 7 Power Supply Units 2 7__ Power Supply Units 2 7 1 Power Supply Specifications O _ PSA 0 PSA3 POWER POWER Parts Terminology and Functions Q POWER LED Turns on when power is applied 2 Power supply terminal is the terminal for power supply wiring Uses M3 crimping pressure connection terminals section 4 2 1 3 Ground terminal To minimize effects from noise and prevent electrical shocks connect this terminal to ground 4 Alarm output terminal Contact output terminals of the relay which turns on when the ALARM LED of the CPU turns on Normally closed contact N C and normally open contact N O are available Unit installation screw 6 Temporary holding hook 2 28 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 7 Power Supply Units Specifications C Part number FP2 PSA1 FP2 PSA2 FP2 PSA3 FP2 PSD2 Size of unit 1 module 2 module Input Rated voltage 100 to 120V AC 200 to 240V AC 10
176. able ROM writer and write the data The ROM writer settings should be specified as those for the M27C2001 SGS TOMSON Notes Refer to the commercially available ROM writer manual re garding the ROM IC type setting and writing method e Itis possible to create a password for master memory 6 28 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 8 FP2SH IC Memory Card Operation for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 6 8 FP2SH IC Memory Card Operation for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 6 8 1 Operating Using the IC Memory Card IC memory cards can be used to back up programs and as operation memories but they can also be used for operation with programs that have been written to the card Writing Programs to the Card The Copy File menu in the tool software is used to write programs to a card When this is used to transfer programs automatically a file created ahead of time must be con verted to the file to be used for automatic transfer The converted file can be confirmed in the software under the file name Autoex ec spg Select File Copy File gt iC Card Flash Mem FAFA Look in S Documents z l al l FE ml E_fp2sh E_fp3 E_fpt E_fp5 E_fp10 E_fpm E_fp10s sample E_fp10sh a Sample spo E_fp2 File name autoexec Eaj Files of type FPwiN GR NPST GR File fp spo z Cancel OOS eee If the card is an SRAM
177. able partially 1 This instruction is available for FPO V2 1 or later only 2 This instruction is available for FP X V 1 20 or later and FP 32k type 3 This instruction is not available for FP10SH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 4 Table of Error codes E Difference in ERROR display There are differences in the way errors are displayed depending on the model Model Display Display method FP1 FP M FP2 FP3 FP10SH LED ERROR Continually lit FP amp FPO FPOR FP X LED ERROR ALARM Flashes continually lit FP e Screen display ERR Continually lit Error Confirmation When ERROR Turns ON When the ERROR on the control unit CPU unit turns on or flashes a self diagnostic error or syntax check error has occurred Confirm the contents of the error and take the appropriate steps Error Confirmation Method Procedure 1 Use the programming tool software to call up the error code By executing the STATUS DISPLAY the error code and content of error are displayed 2 Check the error contents in the table of error codes using the error code ascertained above Syntax check error This is an error detected by the total check function when there is a syntax error or incorrect setting written in the program When the mode selector is switched to the RUN mode the total check function automatically activates and eliminates the p
178. ailable N A Not available Address ine Name Descriptions Read wit FP3 FP2SH p ing ing FP10SH DT9123 DT90123 Not used DT9124 DT90124 Not used N A N A DT9125 DT90125 Not used DT9126 TIESA omol F This displays the unit number that has DT90126 operating station Note executed forced on off operation display The number of times which MEWNET F remote I O service was DT9127 eee Eolonned by each master is stored Note Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits nee MEWNET F i Ne For master 2 For master 1 system remote UO service time The number of times which MEWNET F remote I O service was DT9128 Sr performed by each master is stored Note Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits Iie a e a i For master 4 For master 3 DT9129 DT90129 Not used N A N A DT9130 DT90130 Not used The contents displayed by DT9132 to DT9135 DT90132 to DT90135 will change depending on the contents of stored in DT9131 DT90131 Use the programming tools software to write the settings for what you want to MEWNET F display this can also be done with the remote I O FO MV move instruction slave stations Set the code HO or H1 specifying the abnormality display contents in the higher 8 bits checking for and set the code HO to H3 specifying DT9131 DT90131 selecting the the display master in the lower 8 bits A N A display contents Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits and mast
179. al current consumption 80mA or less at 5V DC Power supply for driving Voltage 4 75 to 26 4V DC Note internal circuit Current 70mA or less at 24V DC Surge absorber Zener diode Fuse ratings None Common method Output points per 8 points common common Operating indicator 16 dot LED display lit when on External connection method Terminal block M 3 screw Weight Approx 150g re Note The load current will vary depending on the power supply for driving the internal circuit Adjust the load current referring to the following range A a 2 e 100 Max load current mA 4 75 102 26 4 Power supply for driving internal circuit V 2 45 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 10 Output Units Specifications Internal Circuit Diagram Output indicator LED 3 9k 5 to 24V DC Pin Layout Output YO to YF 5 to 24V DC For more information regarding the applicable pressure connection crimp terminals and wiring refer to section 4 5 1 2 46 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 10 Output Units Specifications 2 10 5 32 point Type Transistor NPN Output Unit Specifications Item Description CCidC Part number
180. ally 1 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later and FPO V2 1 or later Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 9 z 2 jaje x lt a Num Name Boolean Cee Description g g z f a a uL ber rand e ejej E m a ra F329 Floating point FIX S D Converts real number data specified P329 type data to 16 bit PFIX by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data integer con with sign rounding the first decimal version rounding point down and the converted data 8 n O Q 0O 0 0 the first decimal is stored 1 point down to in D integer F330 Floating point DFIX S D Converts real number data specified P330 type data to 32 bit PDFIX by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data integer con with sign rounding the first decimal version rounding point down and the converted data 8 a 9 0 O jO the first decimal is stored 1 point down to n D 1 D integer F331 Floating point ROFF S D Converts real number data specified P331 type data to 16 bit PROFF by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data integer con with sign rounding the first decimal P version rounding point off and the converted data is 8 4 9 0 0 0 the first decimal stored in D point off to integer F332 Floating point DROFF S D Converts real number data specified P332 type data to 32 bit PDROF
181. ard FP2 FP2SH 7 3 For Use as Program Memory Method 3 Use the Upload Program from IC Card of the FPWIN GR and select one of the programs saved in the IC memory card and read it to the FPWIN GR memory of personal computer Procedure 1 Booting the Upload Program from IC Card function On the Tool menu select IC Card Service and then Upload Program from IC Card IC Card File List Read Program J Untitle1 2 Selecting the file to be read Select the file to be read from the IC Card File List and click on the Execute button Reading of the pro gram begins 7 20 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 7 3 For Use as Program Memory Method 4 Use the F14 PGRD instruction to read the program from the IC memory card and directly transfer it into the internal RAM of the CPU jeez IC memory card STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 By first saving the programs you desire on the IC memory card you can use the F14 PGRD instruction in the program to switch a program while in the RUN mode while in operation The following details the describe the program after executing F14 PGRD instruction The program will continue executing until the END instruction is executed The CPU enters the PROG mode and the program is read from the IC memory card and transfer to the
182. ation mode of the PLC This is used to switch between the RUN REMOTE and PROG modes 4 COM port RS232C page 2 11 is used to connect a computer or general serial devices Tool port RS232C is used to connect a programming tool 6 Operation condition switches page 2 21 are used to set the baud rate of the programming tool to select the program memory and to select the writing operation for the program memory 7 Memory backup battery for backup of the internal memory RAM Part number AFC8801 CR2450 or equivalent 2 19 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 4 FP2SH CPU 2 4 2 CPU with IC Memory Card Interface FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 1 oe 5 k es 6 10 OHAROR gt aun Opa Hae 2 7 dl G 8 I fi Io 6 3 if i Ho go o o ee Parts Terminology and Functions Status indicator LEDs page 2 9 display the operating condition and error statuses 2 IC memory card access LED Illuminates when data is being read from or written to the IC memory card 3 IC memory card slot is used when installing an optional IC memory card 4 IC memory card eject button Pressing this button ejects the IC memory card Initialize test switch page 2 9 Setting the switch to the INITIAL side clears errors and initializes the operation memory S
183. automation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 21 Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 4 FP2SH CPU 2 5 Expansion Memory Unit and ROM for FP2 C2L FP2 C2 Parts Terminology AFP2207 FP2 EM7 AFP2208 ae Mounting knob URS 2 Connector rear side 3 ROM IC socket Install the optional memory FROM or EPROM Type of Expansion Memory Unit Expansion Socket for installing the ROM in the CPU FP2 EM7 AFP2207 cd Nonvolatile memory implemented memory unit AFP2208 Note The FP2 EM1 FP2 EM2 FP2 EM3 and FP2 EM6 expansion memory units for the FP2 cannot be used As for the memory unit AFP2208 the ROM is not removable Type of ROM Equivalent to the 29EE020 150 4C PH SILICON STORAGE TECHNOLOGY AFP5208 INC Enables writing with the operation of the programming tools when attached to the CPU Equivalent to the M27C2001 150F1 SGS THOMSON MICROELECTRONICS AFP5209 Acommercially available ROM writer is required for writing Installation Procedure For detailed information about the installation of expansion memory unit page 2 16 For detailed information about the installation of ROM page 2 17 2 22 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 6 IC Memory Card for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 2 6 IC Memory Card for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P AIC50020 AIC52000 AFP2209 OD dd b Parts and F
184. ay terminal connection diagram for 32 point type and 64 point type out put units and I O mixed units Two branch type cable for relay terminal 40 pins 40 pins x 2 RT 2 relay terminal 16 outputs AY232502 or AY232522 Elo BEOUGOOOOOO El o GO slslelele lelslelelelelelelolee slelelelelelelelelele The relay terminal that is connected with the shorter cable is the lower I O number i Note 24V DC should be supplied between the and terminals of the relay terminal Power is supplied to drive the relays of the ter minal itself The I O power supply supplied to the units and the power supply supplied to the RT 2 relay terminals are the same power supply Correspondence table of RT 2 relay terminal Output number Output number 0 YO 8 Y8 COM terminal for Y4 to Y7 COM terminal for YC to YF 4 31 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units 4 4 4 Connecting with Flat Cable Connector When connecting with a flat cable connector the relationship between the cable num ber and I O number is shown below Correspondence table of cable number and I O number Examples for the CN1 group Examples for the CN2 group 1 2 3
185. be damaged E9 program Stops gt Try to send the program again AA error Rewrite When inputting with the programming tool during software a deletion addition or change of E10 RUN Conti order of an instruction ED LBL SUB RET alala nues INT IRET SSTP and STPE that cannot syntax perform a rewrite during RUN is being error attempted Nothing is written to the CPU A Available Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 4 2 Table of Self Diagnostic Error Opera Error no T d Name tion Description and steps to take E 2 es status Plo S A XINI NIS aJalajaja jajaja Lelee e jejeje Probably a hardware abnormality E20 CPU error Stops Please contact your dealer AA A RAM ras error RAM E22 error2 RAM Probably an abnormality in the internal RAM E23 error3 Stops Please contact your dealer ARATA RAM E24 error4 RAM E23 error5 Master memory The models of master memories are different A E25 model Stops Use the master memories created with the 4 unmatch same model error FP e FP0 FPOR FP and FP1 C14 C16 Probably a hardware abnormality Please contact your dealer FP X When the master memory cassette is mounted the master memory cassette may be damaged Remove the master memory and check whether the ERROR turns off When the ERROR turned off rewrite the maste
186. bit data bit set BTS D n Sets the value of bit position n of slolololololo P130 PBTS the data of D to 1 we fe S O F131 16 bit data bit BTR D n Sets the value of bit position n of slololalololo P131 reset PBTR the data of D to 0 F132 16 bit data invert BTI D n Inverts the value of bit position n of slolololololc P132 PBTI the data of D F133 16 bit data bit test BTT D n Tests the value of bit position n of P133 PBTT the data of D and outputs the result 5 O O O O O0O C to R900B F135 Number of on 1 BCU S D Stores the number of on bits in the slolololololo P135 bits in 16 bit data PBCU data of S in D F136 Number of on 1 DBCU S D Stores the number of on bits in the zlolololololo P136 bits in 32 bit data PDBCU data of S 1 S in D a es ae Pe ae O Available X Not available Z Not available partially Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net x 72 lala Num Name Boo Ope Description Sle g Ai AI ber lean rand wale EES g a L Basic function instruction F137 Auxiliary STMR S D Turns on the specified output and slolololololo timer 16 bit R900D after 0 01 s x set value Special instructions F138 Hours min HMSS S D Converts the hour minute and second
187. bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 q g ORF lt _r S1 s2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 1 S2 1 2 1 4 O Available X Not available A Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP X V1 10 or later and FP2 32k type Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 3 Table of High level Instructions The high level instructions are expressed by the prefixes F or P with numbers For most of the high level instructions F and P types are available The differences between the two types are explained as follows Instructions with the prefix F are executed in every scan while its trigger is in the on Instructions with the prefix P are executed only when the leading edge of its trigger is detected For the FPO FPOR FP2X FP X the P type high level instructions are not available x 7 2 Mialsa Num Name Boo lh Description Sie ole Al a ber lean rand lgli elL e F g ma Data transfer instructions FO 16 bit data MV S D S D 5 lalalaloalolo PO move PMV F1 32 bit data DMV S D S 1 S gt D 1 D 7 olololololo
188. c alloca tion CPU backplane CPU Slots that do not actually exist Backplane 7 module type essa cain see Bits Roce al Power supply unit 1 module SC S227 Tasca San aes CPU 1 module 8 I O units Al a 16 point type DC input unit 2 units 16 point type transistor output unit 3 units xo X10 Y20 Y30 Y40 50 60 to to to to to to pre way LXF_ XIF J Y2F_Y3F__Y4F y 5F GF 15F Expansion 16 point type 16 point type backplane DC input unit transistor output unit 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 TT E et PSAL vT Ea Expansion backplane Backplane 9 module type Power supply unit 1 module O units 16 point type relay output unit 6 units 64 point type DC input unit 1 unit EER 160 me 4180 YIO vaoo XE XEO l V16F VIFF yiBF YIQF y20F vei er XSF 16 point type 64 point relay output unit type DC input unit 3 15 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net I O Allocation FP2 FP2SH 3 4 Automatic Allocation At the expansion backplane I O numbers are allocated continuing from the last number allocated to slots that do not actually exist on the CPU backplane 3 4 1 2 Procedure for A
189. cation FP2 FP2SH 3 1 Fundamentals of I O Allocation 3 1 1 3 How to Count the I O Numbers and Express the Occupied Points How to count the I O numbers relay numbers Since I O number are handled in units of 16 points they are expressed as a combination of decimal and hexadecimal numbers as shown below 1 2 7 F Decimal ana E Jarre 9 Hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 9A B F How to express the occupied points In the programming tool and this manual the occupied points are expressed in the fol lowing fashion for convenience 16 IS X Occupied I O points 16 32 64 128 Type of unit Nil I O unit S Intelligent unit Type of I O X Input Y Output E without I Os 3 4 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH I O Allocation 3 1 Fundamentals of I O Allocation 3 1 2 Table of Occupied I O Points by Unit Part number Occupied Number of I O point occupied slot CPU Standard type CPU FP2 C1 1 CPU with 64 points input FP2 C1D 64X 2 CPU with S LINK FP2 C1SL Note 1 2 Note 2 FP2SH CPU FP2 C2L AFP2221 1 FP2 C2 AFP2231 1 FP2 C2P AFP2235 1 FP2 C3P AFP2255 1 Remote I O Slave Unit FP2 RMS 1 Input unit 16 point type DC input FP2 X16D2 16X 1 32 point type DC input FP2 X32D2 32X 1 64 point ty
190. ccurs Stop condition break condition on off off off on Varies When a self diagnostic error occurs Operation operating condition Varies Varies Varies Varies on on When CPU backup battery error occurs Operation Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies When a watchdog timer error occurs Stop off Flashes Varies off Varies Varies When remote I O slave station waiting Stop error occurs Status Indicator of CPU The CPU has a self diagnostic function which identifies errors and stops operation if necessary When an error occurs the status of the status indicator LEDs on the CPU vary as shown in the table above FP2 C1 ORUN INITIAL OPROG C O TEST w TEST Status OBREAK indicator Q ERROR 7 RUN LEDS OBATT REMOTE O ALARM 7PROG 8 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Self Diagnostic Function and Troubleshooting FP2 FP2SH 8 1 Self Diagnostic Function 8 1 2 Operation When an Error Occurs Normally if an error occurs the operation stops There are some instances in which operation continues even if an error occurs such as with a battery error The user may select whether operation is to be continued or stopped if a duplicated output error or operation error occurs by setting the system registers You can set the system registers for error which operation is to be c
191. character string S2 character string consisting of a from a character S3 D specified number of characters from 10 X OQ O O 0 string the specified position in the character string F264 Writinga MIDW S1 These instructions write a specified P264 character string S2 D number of characters from a wzilxlolololal to a character n character string to a specified string position in the character string F265 Replacing SREP S D A specified number of characters in P265 character p n a character string are rewritten wzlxlolololo strings starting from a specified position in 5 the character string O Available X Not available A Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FPE 32k type 2 This instruction is available for FPE Ver 3 10 or later 3 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net x 7 ale Num Name Boolean S Description S igl a a ber rand lglej juejejE ma Q i Integer type data processing instructions F270 Maximum MAX S1 Searches the maximum value in the P270 value word PMAX S2 D word data table between the S1 and data 16 bit S2 and stores it in the D The 8 P O O 0 0 0 address relative to S1 is stored in
192. converted to angle data in degrees 4 i and the result is stored in D 1 D Floating point type real number data processing instructions F345 Floating point FCMP S1 S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 gt R900A on P345 type datacompare PFCMP S2 S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt R900B on 10 x O O O O0 0 S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 R900C on F346 Floating point FWIN S1 S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 gt R900A on P346 type data band PFWIN S2 S2 1 S2 lt or S1 1 S1 lt or 1a xlololololo compare 3 S3 1 33 R900B on f S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 gt R900C on O Available X Not available A Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later and FPO V2 1 or later Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net x 9 S a Num Name Boolean P Description Ey E S A F a E ber rand wE e E e e r a F347 Floating point FLIMT S1 S2 When S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 P347 type data PFLIMT S3 D S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D upper and When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 lower limit S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D 7 x O O O0 0 0 control When S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 lt or S2 1 S2 S3 1 S 3 D 1 D F348 Floating point FBAND S1 S2 When S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 P348 type data PFBAND S3 D S3 1 S3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D dead band When S2 1 S2 lt
193. counted using ring counter W P DT91 45 DT90145 Note2 3 The current interval between two sending Note1 7 operations value in the register x 2 5 ms DT9146 The minimum interval between two sending x DT90146 Note1 operations value in the register x 2 5 ms DT9147 DT90147 The maximum interval between two sending Note1 operations value in the register x 2 5 ms Note1 Used by the system Note2 When the system register 46 KO First PC PLC link 0 second PC PLC link 1 When the system register 46 K1 First PC PLC link 1 second PC PLC link 0 Note3 For MEWNET W system available PLC type FP2 FP2SH FP3 FP10SH For MEWNET P system available PLC type FP3 FP10SH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address Epa Name Descriptions ids alleen FP3 FP2SH ing ing FP10SH DT9148 DT90148 The number of times the receiving operation Note1 is performed counted using ring counter DT9149 DT90149 The current interval between two receiving Note1 operations value in the register x 2 5 ms D191 50 DT90150 MEWNET The minimum interval between two receiving Note1 W P operations value in the register x 2 5 ms DT9151 DT90151 PC PLC The maximum interval between two receiving Note1 link status operations value in
194. ct for AWG22 and AWG24 Maintenance part number AFP2801 wire pressed terminal Semi cover cable Pressure connection tool AXY52000FP Using termi CT 2 con DIN rail mounting type AYC1140 mel nector Connector 1m 3 281ft AYT51403 terminal terminal cable 2m 6 562ft AYT51405 RT 2 relay DIN rail mounting type AY231502 for input terminal Note 2 AY232502 for output Connector 1m 3 281ft AY15633 terminal cable 2m 6 562ft AY15635 Using cable 1m 3 281ft AYT58403 with pres sure connec 2m 6 562ft AYT58405 tion terminal Using flat Flat cable with a 1m 3 281ft AFB8541 cable connector on one end gt m 6 562ft AFB8542 Connector only AFP2802 40 pin connectors i Notes 1 The connectors for wire pressed terminal cable 40 pins are supplied with the unit 2 The RT 2 relay terminal cannot be used with PNP collector out put type output units FP2 Y32P FP2 Y64P FP2 XY64D2P and FP2 XY64D7P 4 24 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units 4 4 2 Connecting with Connector for Wire pressed Terminal Cable Connector for Wire pressed Terminal Cable This is a connector that allows loose wires to be connected without removing the wire s insulation The pressure connection tool is required to connect the loose wires Connector for wire pressed terminal cable 40 pins
195. ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 10 Output Units Specifications Internal Circuit Diagram Line nee tay ey oe Re Output indicator i LED A S T pa ESAO i Max 250V AC 5A ls pos 2 sudan GOV DC 5A Pin Layout Output YO to Y5 250V AC 5A 30V DC 5A H 7 24V DC For more information regarding the applicable pressure connection crimp terminals and wiring refer to section 4 5 1 2 42 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 10 Output Units Specifications 2 10 3 16 point Type Transistor NPN Output Unit Specifications Part number FP2 Y16T Insulation method Optical coupler Rated load voltage 5 to 24V DC Load voltage range 4 75 to 26 4V DC Maximum load current 0 5A at 12 to 24V DC 0 1A at 5V DC Note Maximum surge current 3A 10ms or less Off state leakage current 1A or less On state maximum voltage drop 0 5V or less Response time off on 0 1ms or less on gt off 0 3ms or less Internal current consumption 100mA or less at 5V DC Power supply for driving Voltage 4 75 to 26 4V DC Note internal circuit Current 120mA or less at 24V DC Surge absorber Zener diode Fuse ratings None Common method Output points per 8 points common common Operating indicator 16 dot LED display lit when on External connection method Ter
196. d All of the remaining DOS formatted field can be used as expansion memory A begga ti Example When 512 kB is set as the DOS formatted field in a 1 MB card 512 kB DOS Address 1 MB 0 512 kB Expanded memory field 262144 7 24 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 7 5 Menus Related to Tool Software 7 5 Menus Related to Tool Software The FPWIN GR is equipped with menus that are used for management of the IC memory card Reading Programs and Data Stored on IC Memory Cards Upload Program from IC Card This enables one program to be selected from among the multiple programs stored on the IC memory card and read to the FPWIN GR Copy File from IC Card This reads a program or data file stored on the IC memory card and copies it to a floppy disk or hard disk When creating a copy of a file stored on the IC memory card first copy the file stored on the IC memory card that serves as the source file using this menu and then insert the new IC memory card and use Copy File from IC Card to copy the data from the disk to the IC memory card Initializing the IC Memory Card Erase IC Card This clears all of the contents from the IC memory card The program field assured with the Eormat IC Card function is cleared and the entire card is used as an expanded memory field
197. d Change the password specified by the O setting PLC based on the contents specified by x O 2 OJX X the character constant Interrupt Set the interrupt input based on the setting contents specified by the character x O 0 0 x x constant PLC link time Set the system setting time when a PLC setting oFH sysi m J link is used based on the contents 13 x O O O xK x specified by the character constant MEWTOCOL Change the communication conditions of COM the COM port or tool port for response MEWTOCOL COM based on the Xx O O0 0 x x control contents specified by the character constant High speed Change the operation mode of the high counter speed counter based on the contents _ operation specified by the character constant x O a a x x mode changing System syS2 Change the setting value of the system registers register for the PLC link function No 40 to H Hevs2 s o1 02 7 X O O O0O x x No 47 changing O Available X Not available A Not available partially 1 With FP X Ver2 0 or later and FP Ver 3 10 or later the baud rate can be selected from 300 600 or 1200 bps 2 With FP 32k type the 8 digit password can be selected 3 With FP 32k type and FP X Ver1 10 or later it can be used Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net x S ja
198. d an on pulse input signal with a minimum pulse width of 0 4 ms For detailed information about the on pulse catch input function section 2 11 5 Keep the number of input and output points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as de termined by the input voltage and ambient temperature Input Output 32 32 Number of 25 25 points per com mon whichare 20 20 simultaneous on 0 43 51 55 109 4 123 8 131 Ambient temperature C F The load current will vary depending on the power supply for driving the internal circuit Adjust the load current referring to the following range 100 E 3 l go 2 l o ps i 4 75 10 2 26 4 Power supply for driving internal circuit V 2 62 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions Internal Circuit Diagram Input Input indicator LED AA Input 5 6k2 idi O O i j 2 560Q 1 D 24V DC FK a S 3 COM Output l Output indicator 9 1kQ 5 to 24V DC Pin Layout Input XO to X1F Pin layout of first 32 points 24V DC 19 uot 5 5 x e e 19 Left side connector The COM pins of each connector are connected internally 2 11 I O Mixed Units Specifications Output Y20 to Y3F Pin layout of last 32 points Right side connector Y OOOOOO
199. d correct the Note output Stops program so that one relay AJAJA JAJA AJAJA error is not used for two or more OT instructions Or set the duplicated output to enable in system register 20 A timer counter instruction double definition error will be detected even if double output permission has been selected For instructions which must be used in a pair such as jump JP and LBL one instruction is either missing or in an incorrect position gt Change to PROG mode and enter the two instructions which must be used in a pair in the correct positions An instruction has been written which does not agree with system register settings For Parameter example the number setting in a program does E4 mismatch Stops not agree with the timer counter range setting A AJA AJAJAJAJA error Change to PROG mode check the system register settings and change so that the settings and the instruction agree An instruction which must be written in a specific area main program area or subprogram area has been written to a Stops different area for example a subroutine SUB A AJAJAJAJAJAJA to RET is placed before an ED instruction gt Change to PROG mode and enter the instruction into the correct area Syntax error E1 gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Not paired error E3 Stops E5 Program Note area error A Available Note This error is
200. ddress at which the error occurred is stored in special data registers DT90017 and DT90018 If this happens monitor the address at which the error occurred before cancelling the error 8 6 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Self Diagnostic Function and Troubleshooting 8 2 Troubleshooting 8 2 2 If the ALARM LED Lights Condition The system watchdog timer has been activated and the operation of PLC has been stopped Procedure 1 Set the mode selector of CPU from RUN to PROG mode and turn the power off and then on If the RUN and ALARM LED is turned on again there is probably an abnormality in the CPU Please contact your dealer If the ERROR LED is turned on go to section 8 2 1 Procedure 2 Set the mode selector from PROG to RUN mode If the ALARM LED is turned on the program execution time is too long Check the pro gram referring the following Check if instructions such as JP or LOOP are programmed in such a way that a scan can never finish Check that interrupt instructions are executed in succession Procedure 3 If there is nothing wrong with programs there may be a problem with the ambient envi ronment Check the wirings including the grounding link Especially check if the RS232C wiring is not close to power lines and it has been shielded 8 2 3 If the LED POWER of the Power Supply Unit Does Not Light Proced
201. de was being used There was an error in the code format of the address data 166 Address error Also when exceeded or insufficient of address data there was a mistake in the range designation Cannot be read because there is no program in the program No program error 167 area or the memory contains an error Or reading was attempted and No data error of data that was not registered When inputting with programming tool software editing of an Rewrite during RUN instruction ED SUB RET INT IRET SSTP and STPE that 168 i i error cannot perform a rewrite during RUN is being attempted Nothing is written to the CPU 170 SIM over error Program area was exceeded during a program write process 71 Exclusive access A command that cannot be processed was executed at the same control error time as a command being processed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 5 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands Table of MEWTOCOL COM commands Command name Code Description RC Reads the on and off status of contact RCS Specifies only one point Readicomecharce RCP Specifies multiple contacts RCC Specifies a range in word units WC Turns contacts on and off WCS Specifies only one point rre contactarea WCP Specifies multiple contacts WCC Specifies a range in wo
202. dical interrupt is not used interval INT24 K1 to K3000 10ms to 30s or 0 5ms to 1 5s Note Used by the system Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address PPA Name Descriptions neac n FP3 FP2SH R ing ing FP10SH The value registered using programming tool software is stored a DT90028 peice trace KO sampling triggered by F155 Note eiva SMPL P155 PSMPL instruction K1 to K3000 x 10ms 10ms to 30s Dade pT90029 Break address The address K constant of a break in a Note test run is stored DT9030 Note DT90030 Message 0 DT9031 A N A Note DT90031 Message 1 DT9032 The contents of the specified message Note BTS002 Meseade 2 are stored in these special data registers etka DT90033 Message 3 when F149 MSG P149 PMSG Note instruction is executed DT9034 Note DT90034 Message 4 DT9035 Note DT90035 Message 5 au es EPMRD The error code is stored here if F152 znd RMRD P152 PRMRD or F153 F153 RMWT RMWT P153 PRMWT instruction was executed abnormally P153 PRMWT When the instruction was successfull DT9036 DT90036 instructions end ee i A NIA executed 0 is stored code If an abnormal unit is installed to the Abnormal unit backplane the slot number of that unit display will be sto
203. dropped the ERROR LED lights R9101 or R9102 on and error code K55 or K54 is stored in special data register DT90000 Error codes can be confirmed using programming tools Backup battery PLC Type Part number Description FP2 CPU unit Lithium battery CR2450 or equivalent FP2SH CPU unit SS Common to FP3 and FP10SH IC memory card AFP2806 BR 1225A B 9 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Maintenance FP2 FP2SH 9 1 Replacement of Spare Parts Notes During RAM operation save the program in the CPU onto disk using programming tool software FPWIN GR Never throw batteries into a fire disassemble or charge the battery in order to prevent accidents such as bursting fire or heat generation Replacement Method of Backup Battery Preparation Leave the unit on for more than 30 minutes then turn the power off and remove the CPU It is recommended to save the programs and data within the CPU in a PC in case that it requires time for the replacement ia Note After turning the power off be sure to finish replacing the battery within 10 minutes Procedure for FP2 1 Use an insulated flat head screwdriver and lift up the battery During this operation be careful not to damage printed circuit board battery holder or other internal compo nents 2 Pull out the battery in the direction shown by the arrows below pushing f
204. e After set value n x 0 01 seconds ZS aloalolole O timer contact a is set to on 4 3 TMX After set value n x 0 1 seconds ZS 1 oKlolalolol timer contact a is set to on 4 3 TMY After set value n x 1 second timer 4 lololalolol 2 contact a is set to on 5 3 Auxiliary timer F137 YRLE After set value S x 0 01 seconds 16 bit STMR H HE7stesohL H the specified output and R900D are 5 j oljojojololo set to on Auxiliary timer F183 vre After set value S x 0 01 seconds 32 bit DSTM H HEssosms oH H the specified output and R900D are 7 QO O0 0 a0 o0 0 set to on Time constant F182 NERU Executes the filter processing for the ada a ea iS processing H Fie2ALTRSI s2 3 0 specified input 9 x D X X Counter CT Count Decrements from the preset value n m H n f 3 oO allo 73 O Reset n A 4 i5 3 O Available X Not available Z Not available partially The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models The allowable number of using the PSHS and RDS instruction depends on the models This instruction is available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 1 2 3 For FP2SH FP10SH and FP X Ver2 0 or later any device can be set for the setting value of counter or timer instruction 4 5 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when using Y1280 R1120 special internal relay included L1280 or anything beyond for the KP instruc
205. e added on Planning ahea d for expansion improves efficiency m next page 3 18 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH I O Allocation 3 6 1 0 Numbers of Free Slots Example of pre assigning I O numbers for a 64 point type input unit to a free slot 16 point type 64 point input 16 point type CPU DC input unit reserved _ transistor output unit backplane f i PSA1 FP2 C1 XI y i 6T o x 8 8 jo OS ECEEErI 8 m s FP2 m lt D 3 Le z ey A na a D XO X10 X20 Y60 Y70 Z to to to to to XF X1F X5F Y6F Y7F Expansion backplane oj Psat YIT YIT Yet YisT L SZ ge G g y Y80 Y90 Y100 Y110 Y120 Y130 X140 0 to to to to to to to Y8F YOF YIOF YI1F Y12F Y13F X17F 64 point type DC input unit 16 point type relay output unit 3 19 Phone 800 894 0
206. e condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 1 gt S2 1 2 ORD gt Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 ORD gt Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 1 S2 1 2 ORD lt Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 2 ORD lt post 2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 1 S2 1 2 O Available X Not available A Not available partially Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps FPO FP e FPOR FPX FP X FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Floating point type real number data compare Start STF F S1 S24 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 S2 1 2 x 4 x STF lt gt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 S2
207. e keeping the mode Kl el amp synchro nues selector in the RUN position If the same nous error error occurs after this please contact your dealer Multi CPU niet Conti Abnormality was detected when the multi E53 ertor Mues CPU system was used A CPU2 Please contact your dealer only The voltage of the backup battery for the IC IC memory memory card lowered The BATT LED does E54 card back Conti not turn on A A up battery nues Charge or replace the backup battery of IC error memory card The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed The voltage of the backup battery for IC IC memory memory card lowers The BATT LED does not turn on E55 card back Gont Charge or replace the backup battery of IC A A up battery inues memory card error The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed Incompati The IC memory card installed is not E56 ble IC Cont compatible AA memory inues Replace the IC memory card compatible card error with FP2SH FP10SH MEW NET W2 MCU No unit for The MEWNET W2 link unit or MCU Multi communication unit is not es7 Pe Cent tale in the slot specified ang the Ala configu nueS configuration data ration Either install a unit in the specified slot or change the parameter E100 Self The error specified by the F148 to diagnostic Stop ERR P148 PERR instruction is occurred AIAIAIAIAIA gt Take steps to clear the error condition E199 error set according to the specifica
208. e o device E eee JE PLC Breaker O Insulated transformer eo Note Use the same power supply system for the expansion backplane and CPU backplane so that they are turned on and off simulta neously CPU backplane Simultaneous on and off via the same power sup ply system Expansion backplane Eliminating effects from noise Use a low noise power supply There is sufficient noise resistance for superimposed noise in the power supply wiring however using an insulated transformer is recommended for further noise protection Twist the power supply wire to minimize the effects of noise 4 16 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 2 Power Supply Wiring 4 2 2 Grounding Always ground the FP2 FP2SH PLC Ground the unit with the ground terminal as illustrated below D Ground terminal For grounding purposes use ground wires with a minimum of 2mm AWG14 and the grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 100Q The point of grounding should be as close to the FP2 FP2SH PLC as possible The ground wire should be as short as possible If two devices share a single ground point it may produce an adverse effect Always use an exclusive ground for each device CORRECT _ frerrest wA ay FP2 FP2SH PLC 4 17 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation
209. e the battery Expansion memory unit type Battery lifetime installed ambient temperature 55 C 131 F No expansion memory unit For FP2 10 000 hours or more typical lifetime in actual use approx 13 000 hours For FP2SH 3 500 hours or more typical lifetime in actual use approx 31 000 hours FP2 EM1 Model No AFP2201 For FP2 9 000 hours or more typical lifetime in actual use approx 12 000 hours FP2 EM2 Model No AFP2202 For FP2 8 000 hours or more FP2 EM3 Model No AFP2203 typical lifetime in actual use approx 12 000 hours FP2 EM6 Model No AFP2206 For FP2 8 500 hours or more typical lifetime in actual use approx 12 500 hours FP2 EM7 Model No AFP2209 For FP2 10 000 hours or more typical lifetime in actual use approx 13 000 hours For FP2SH 3 500 hours or more typical lifetime in actual use approx 31 000 hours Model No AFP2208 For FP2SH 3 500 hours or more typical lifetime in actual use approx 31 000 hours A drop in the battery voltage can be confirmed with special internal relays R9005 and R9006 the ERROR LED and BATT LED Be sure to replace new battery within a week IC memory card Battery lifetime Ambient temperature of 25 C FP2SH AFP2209 Approx 3 years or more The battery voltage of IC card is detected only once when the CPU unit is powered on An error will not be determined if the battery is replaced during power on If the battery voltage has
210. e the system so that the AJA A limitation number of slots and I O points is within the error specified range MEWNET F 1 O overlap or I O setting that is over the 1 0 range is detected in the allocated I O and B37 mapping Stops MEWNET F I O map A ATA error Re configure the I O map correctly A Available Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Opera Error i K T o Name tion Description and steps to take rin code ee PlolSla ia Ale SAUS ajajajajadjajaja wie le se le le sefe MEWNE T Boars rams UO minal uss ar VON slave VO snotcorect E38 Sei Stops Re configure the I O map for slave stations daha ea pping according to the I O points of the slave error stations When reading in the program from the IC memory card due to automatic reading because of the dip switch setting or program switching due to F14 PGRD instruction IC memory card is not installed There is no program file or it is damaged IC card Writing is disabled E39 read error Stops There is an abnormality in the Bes AUTOEXEC SPG file Program size stored on the card is larger than the capacity of the CPU gt Install an IC memory card that has the program properly recorded and execute the read once again Abnormal I O unit FPZ FP X Check the contents of special data register DT90002 and abnormal FP expansion unit application cassette for FP X Then check
211. e values of D when B C 0 A ae oe ZEN nee progran Area for file registers D 2 1 535 steps 14 333 words 4 3 583 steps 12 285 words 6 5 631 steps 10 237 words 8 7 679 steps 8 189 words 10 9 727 steps 6 141 words 12 11 775 steps default value 4 093 words default value 14 13 823 steps 2 045 words 16 15 871 steps 0 word Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 32K Users memory capacity Setting range of A Setting range of B Setting range of C 32K words 2K to 32K words default value 12k 0 to 30K words default value 0 0 to 30K words default value 0 Allocate so that A B C lt 32 Setting example The values of D when B C 0 A TA A i aay nce programi Area for file registers D 2 1 535 steps 30 717 words 4 3 583 steps 28 669 words 6 5 631 steps 26 621 words 8 7 679 steps 24 573 words 10 9 727 steps 22 525 words 12 11 775 steps default value 20 477 words default value 14 13 823 steps 18 429 words 16 15 871 steps 16 381 words 18 17 919 steps 14 333 words 20 19 967 steps 12 285 words 22 22 015 steps 10 237 words 24 24 063 steps 8 189 words 26 26 111 steps 6 141 words 28 28 159 steps 4 093 words 30 30 207 steps 2 045 words 32 32 255 steps O word Setting example for each area When not using the machine language program area Refer to the tables for the different type
212. ea starting 44 address of 0 0 to 127 link data register Size of link data 45 registers 0 0 to 127 words used for send area Normal allocation PC link 0 for the link unit with a PC link 0 and 1 allocation smaller slot number and PC link 1 for 4G setting for MEWNET W P_ Normal one with a larger slot number link system allocation Reverse allocation Note PC link 1 for the link unit with a smaller slot number and PC link O for one with a larger slot number Note Available PLC MEWNET W FP10SH FP2 FP2SH MEWNET P FP10SH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Item Aad Name graui Descriptions ress value Processing capacity 4 0 NI data AA ASen A setting for PC link of 1024 1 to 65535 Setting processing 9 Capacity per scan can be obtained setting Rl ore et bytes per using the formula Capacity Set valas scan value x 256 bytes Size of link 50 PUR sA 0 0 to 64 words nication Size of link data 51 registers o 0 to 128 words used for commu nication Send area PC link 1 starting ae settings for address of 64 Caer PC link 1 MEWNET link relay setting W P link Size of link system relays used 53 Note for Boe d 0 0 to 64 words area Send area starting 54 address of 128 12810 2559 link data register Size of link data 55 registers 0 0 to 127 words
213. ecifications Internal Circuit Diagram Pa hee se a Output indicator i 9 1kQ LED Ik 5 to 24V DC Pin Layout Output YO to Y1F 5 to 24V DC Although and terminals are connected internally with the same connector It is rec ommended that they also be connected externally For more information regarding the applicable connectors and terminals refer to sec tion 4 4 1 2 48 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 10 6 32 point Type Trans 2 10 Output Units Specifications istor PNP Output Unit Specifications mem eo FP2 Y32P Insulation method Optical coupler Rated load voltage 5 to 24V DC Load voltage range 4 75 to 26 4V DC Maximum load current 0 1A at 12 to 26 4V DC 50mA at 5V DC Note Maximum surge current 0 3A off state leakage current on state maximum voltage drop 1A or less 1 5V or less at 6 to 26 4V DC 0 5V or less at 6V DC or less Response time off on 0 1ms or less on off Internal current consumption at 5V DC Power supply for driving Voltage 0 3ms or less 130mA or less 4 75 to 26 4V DC internal circuit Current 150mA or less at 24V DC Surge absorber Fuse ratings Zener diode None Common method Output points per common 32 points common Operating ind
214. ecimal 0 0000 00000000 00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1 0001 00000000 00000001 0000 0000 0000 0001 2 0002 00000000 00000010 0000 0000 0000 0010 3 0003 00000000 00000011 0000 0000 0000 0011 4 0004 00000000 00000100 0000 0000 0000 0100 5 0005 00000000 00000101 0000 0000 0000 0101 6 0006 00000000 00000110 0000 0000 0000 0110 7 0007 00000000 00000111 0000 0000 0000 0111 8 0008 00000000 00001000 0000 0000 0000 1000 9 0009 00000000 00001001 0000 0000 0000 1001 10 000A 00000000 00001010 0000 0000 0001 0000 11 000B 00000000 00001011 0000 0000 0001 0001 12 000C 00000000 00001100 0000 0000 0001 0010 13 000D 00000000 00001101 0000 0000 0001 0011 14 000E 00000000 00001110 0000 0000 0001 0100 15 OOOF 00000000 00001111 0000 0000 0001 0101 16 0010 00000000 00010000 0000 0000 0001 0110 17 0011 00000000 00010001 0000 0000 0001 0111 18 0012 00000000 00010010 0000 0000 0001 1000 19 0013 00000000 00010011 0000 0000 0001 1001 20 0014 00000000 00010100 0000 0000 0010 0000 21 0015 00000000 00010101 0000 0000 0010 0001 22 0016 00000000 00010110 0000 0000 0010 0010 23 0017 00000000 00010111 0000 0000 0010 0011 24 0018 00000000 00011000 0000 0000 0010 0100 25 0019 00000000 00011001 0000 0000 0010 0101 26 001A 00000000 00011010 0000 0000 0010 0110 27 001B 00000000 00011011 0000 0000 0010 0111 28 001C 00000000 00011100 0000 0000 0010 1000 29 001D 00000000 00011101 0000 0000 0010 1001 30 001E 00000000 00011110 0000 0000 0011 0000 31 001F 00000000 00011111 0000 0000 0011 000
215. ed for writing 2 The parts for the optional memory to be used differ depending on FP2 or FP2SH 6 26 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation 6 7 7 Writing Data to the ROM Using the FPWIN GR With this method programs are sent directly from the personal computer FPWIN GR tool software to the ROM writer and are written to the ROM With the FP2SH this meth od can be used only when the expansion memory unit FP2 EM7 is used in combination with the FP2 C2 CPU Preparation Connect the personal computer and the ROM writer Commercially available ROM writer Procedure 1 On the Tool menu of the FPWIN GR tool software se lect ROM Writer to display the dialog box for the ROM writer 2 Specify Write as the Operation Method and Serial Port as the Input Output Destination and click on Ex ecute The program is sent to the ROM writer Commercially available ROM writer i Note In the ROM writer settings the flow control X on off should be turned on wr next page 6 27 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation 3 Install the memory in the commercially avail
216. emay F61 DCMP P61 PDCMP F62 WIN P62 PWIN or F63 DWIN P63 PDWIN comparison instructions Turns on when the set time elapses set value reaches 0 in an p the timing operation of the F137 STMR F183 DSTM R900D sein umer auxiliary timer instruction The R900D turns off when the trigger for auxiliary timer instruction turns off R900F Tool port error flag Turns on when communication error at tool port is occurred Note Available PLC FP2SH P Constant scan error Turns on when the scan time exceeds the time specified in R900F i flag system register 34 during constant scan execution R9010 Always on relay Always on R9011 Always off relay Always off R9012 Scan pulse relay Turns on and off alternately at each scan ii Turns on only at the first scan in the operation Beets iniiai onipulseralay Turns off from the second scan and maintains the off state zi Turns off only at the first scan in the operation ea nial ott pilse relay Turns on from the second scan and maintains the on state Step ladder initial on Turns on for an instant only in the first scan of the process R9015 i pulse relay the moment step ladder process is opened R9016 R9017 Not used R9018 pore 0lock pulsa Repeats on off operations in 0 01 s cycles relay Dore R9019 ete clock pulse Repeats on off operations in 0 02 s cycles Dope a r i l R901A 0 1 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 1 s cycles 0 1 s based i ep ia R901B 0 2 s c
217. emory ROM is installed the contents of the internal RAM can be read using the programming tools Consequently to confirm the contents of the memory ROM the contents of the ROM should be sent to the internal RAM To continue using ROM operation turn off the power supply and set DIP switch SW2 to the on position and SW4 to the off position Then turn the power supply on again 6 21 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation 6 7 4 Checking the ROM Contents While Using RAM Operation When the DIP switches on the back of the CPU have been set to the RAM operation side the CPU reads the contents of the internal RAM in that state To check the contents pro grams of the ROM use the procedure described below to send the data to the RAM Preparation Set the CPU in the PROG mode Procedure 1 Select Online Edit Mode on the Online menu bdder Symbol View f Online i The system goes online and online monitoring begins automatically The icon on the tool bar can also be used to do this 2 Select ROM amp RAM service on the Tool menu bol View i The ROM amp RAM Service window opens ROM amp RAM Service Untitie2 ROM A Erecut e 4d lt P wt 3 The ROM RAM is executed Select ROM RAM and click on the Execute but
218. emote 1 0 trarismission When using MEWNET F remote I O system R905B error flag master 4 turns on when transmission error occurs on master 4 turns on when there is an error in the settings ec Not used R905F Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Address Name Description Unit Turns on when Unit No 1 is communicating properly in the PC R9060 No 1 link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Unit Turns on when Unit No 2 is communicating properly in the PC R9061 link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error No 2 P occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when Unit No 3 is communicating properly in the PC R9062 gnir link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error No 3 occurs or when not in the PC link mode Unit Turns on when Unit No 4 is communicating properly in the PC R9063 link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error No 4 occurs or when not in the PC link mode Unit Turns on when Unit No 5 is communicating properly in the PC R9064 link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error No 5 P A occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when Unit No 6 is communicating properly in the PC R9065 Uni link mode Turns off when operation
219. eneral serial devices Tool port RS232C is used to connect a programming tool 6 Operation condition switches page 2 10 are used to set the baud rate of the programming tool to select the program memory and to select the writing operation for the program memory 7 Memory backup battery for backup of the internal memory RAM Part number AFC8801 CR2450 or equivalent i Note The settings of the operation condition switches become active when the power is turned on 2 8 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 2 FP2CPU Status Indicator LEDs These LEDs display the current mode of operatin or the occurrence of error RUN green This lights in the RUN mode to indicate that the program is being executed It flashes during forced input output PROG green This lights in the PROG mode Operation stops while this LED is lighted It flashes when waiting for connection of slave station on remote I O system If the memory is initialized the brightness dims indicating that initialization is being executed TEST green This lights in the test operation mode BREAK green This lights in the operation halts at a break during a test run or halts during the step operation mode for the test run ERROR red This lights if an error is detected during the self diagnostic function BATT red This lights whe
220. enex D OERROR OBa RUN 2 2 26 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 6 IC Memory Card for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P Precautions when installing removing the IC memory card Do not try to insert and remove the IC memory card while the IC memory card access enable switch is on It could lead to damage of the memory contents or a malfunction of CPU Do not use excessive force to the card or the section where card is installed Battery of the SRAM type IC memory card AIC52000 A rechargeable battery is used It cannot be exchanged AFP2209 An interchangeable battery is used When you use for the first time install the battery included Note If the battery voltage has dropped the ERROR LED lights and error code K55 or K54 is stored in special data register DT90000 Error codes can be confirmed using programming tools K54 The data on the IC memory card is not retained K55 The data on the IC memory card is guaranteed but the voltage of the internal battery has dropped AIC52000 Power should continue to be supplied to the unit in order to charge it AFP2209 The replacement of memory backup battery is neces sary As the data saved in AFP2209 is overwritten when replacing the battery the data must be backed up before the replacement Write protection of IC memory card There is
221. equates safety measures listed in the following Interlock circuit When a motor clockwise counter clockwise operation is controlled provide an interlock circuit that prevents clockwise and counter clockwise signals from inputting into the mo tor at the same time Emergency stop circuit Add an emergency stop circuit to controlled devices in order to prevent a system shut down or an irreparable accident when malfunction occurs Start up sequence The PLC should be operated after all of the outside devices are energized To keep this sequence the following measures are recommended Turn on the PLC with the mode selector set to the PROG mode and then switch to the RUN mode Program the PLC so as to disregard the inputs and outputs until the outside devices are energized i Note When stopping the operation of PLC also have the I O devices turned off after the PLC has stopped operating Alarm function When an alarm occurs the PLC turns off the output and stops operation Even while in this condition take the appropriate safety precautions outside of the PLC to ensure no malfunction or damage is transmitted to anywhere else in the system Grounding When installing the PLC next to devices that generate high voltages from switching such as inverters do not ground them together 4 36 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring
222. er 1 024 words EVO to EV1023 3 072 words EVO to EV3071 File register Notes 1 and 3 Data memory used in pro gram Data is handled in 16 bit units one word FP2 16 K 0 to 14 333 words FLO to FL14332 FP2 32 K when expanded 0 to 30 717 words FLO to FL30716 FP2 C2L 32 765 words FP2 C2 FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 32 765 words x 3 banks Special data register Data memory for storing spe cific data Various settings and error codes are stored 256 words DT90000 to DT90255 512 words DT90000 to DT90511 Index register Register can be used as an address of memory area and constants modifier 14 words I0 to ID 14 words x 16 banks I0 to ID next page 10 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Specifications FP2 FP2SH 10 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants Numberi Item um ing FP2 FP2SH Control Master control relay points 256 points instruction MCR pomt Number of labels JP and Total 256 points LOOP Number of step ladder 1 000 steps Note 4 Number of subroutine 100 subroutines Number of interrupt program 1 program periodical interrupt allows setting of the time interval within the range from 0 5ms to 1 5s Constant Decimal constants K K 32768 to K32767 for 16 bit operation K 2147483648 to K2147483647 for 32 b
223. er of rics i i i DT9132 to iai T DT9135 DT90132 Display master to DT901 35 HO Master 1 H1 Master 2 H2 Master 3 H3 Master 4 Display contents HO Abnormal slave station H1 1 0 verify abnormal slave station Slave station where momentary voltage drop is occurring Note Used by the system Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address APAI Name Descriptions Paade tad FP3 FP2SH ing ing FP10SH The bit corresponding to the station number of the MEWNET F where an MEWNET F error is occurring is set to on Monitor remote 1 0 error using binary display slave station 1 Error slave station 0 Normal slave number current ty station condition Bit position 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 when DT9131 Savestaionnoli 13 12 918 5l4 1 DT90131 is HO oressaororsal TT TTT TTT TTI H1 H2 or H3 Bit position i5 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 Slave stationno 32 29 28 25 24 21 20 17 orersvore0133 T TTT ITI TI III DT9132 DT90132 When the installed condition of a DT9133 DT90133 MEWNET F slave station set unit has changed since the power was turned MEWNET F on the bit corresponding to that slave remote I O I O station number will be set to on verify error slave Monitor using binary display station number when DT9131 1 Error s
224. er pro DT9105 DT90105 cess 720 to 735 Step ladder pro DT9106 DT90106 cess 736 to 751 Indicates the startup condition of the Step ladder pro step ladder process When the DT9107 DT90107 Stee 752 to 767 _ process starts up the bit DT9108 DT90108 po 768 to 783 corresponding to the process number turns on 1 DT9109 DT90109 S ate ong Step ladder pro Monitor using binary display DT9110 DT90110 cess 800 to 815 DT9111 DT90111 a EER 0 not executing 1 executing Step ladder pro f A A a l z abled is cess 832 to 847 ampe 12111 8 7 413 0 Step ladder pro r posten DT9113 DT90113 Process numberl655 652651 648 647 644 643 640 cess ene to 863 orooro 0 0 0 0 0 o o o o o Jo Jo oloo i DT9114 DT90114 VreP accer pro a i Since bit position 0 of DT9115 DT90115 cess 880 to 895 DT91 Se ee 00 is a step ladder Step ladder pro process IS executing DT9116 DT90116 cess 896 to 911 Step ladder pro A programming tool software can be DT9117 DT90117 cess ei 2 to 927 used to write data DT9118 DT90118 Step 005 10 043 Step ladder pro DT9119 DT90119 cess 944 to 959 Step ladder pro DT9120 DT90120 cess 960 to 975 Step ladder pro DT9121 DT90121 cess 976 to 991 Step ladder pro cess 992 to 999 DT9122 DT90122 higher byte is not used Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Av
225. er starting address FP10SH FP10SH 5 setting the number of 3000 0 to 3072 timers and counters FP2 FP2 i Set the system registers mee 0 to 1024 5 and 6 to the same FP2SH FP2SH value Hold type area starting FP10SH FP10SH 6 address setting for 3000 0 to 3072 timer counter FP2 FP2 1000 0 to 1024 Hold type area starting FP2SH address setting for FP10SH FP2SH FP10SH 0 to 887 7 internal relays in word 500 units FP2 200 FP2 0 to 253 Hold type area starting FP2SH FP10SH 0 to 10240 8 address setting for data 0 FP2 0 to 6000 registers Hold type area starting FP2SH FP10SH 0 to 32765 address setting for file 9 registers For FP2SH 0 FP2 16K 0 to 14333 bank 0 FP2 32k 0 to 30717 Hold Non ene type T P address setting for hold 10 MEWNET W P link relays 0 to 64 for PC link 0 Note Hold type area starting address setting for 11 MEWNET W P link relays 6410128 for PC link 1 Note Hold type area starting address setting for 12 MEWNET W P link data 0 0 to 128 registers for PC link 0 Note Hold type area starting address setting for 13 MEWNET W P link data 128 128 to 256 registers for PC link 1 Note Hold or non hold setting 14 for step ladder process Non hold Hold non hold Hold type area starting 15 address setting for file 0 0 to 32765 register for bank 1 Note Available PLC MEWNET W FP10SH FP2 FP2SH MEWNET P FP10SH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 72
226. er to a hold type By setting system register 5 to 0 the whole area becomes the counter Also by setting it to the value 1 higher than the last number the whole area becomes the timer Hold type area starting address system registers 6 to 13 Set each relay and register to a hold type or non hold type Non hold Set value lt n S type Hold type size increases et value n mF a a A A A a A a Set value gt n Hold type Non hold type size increases For normal situations set the system registers 5 and 6 to the same value This sets the timer to a non hold type and counter to a hold type By setting this value to the first number the whole area becomes hold type Also by setting it to the value 1 higher than the last number the whole area becomes non hold type The relays and registers for links not specified in the send area of system registers 40 to 55 are non hold type regardless of what is set here Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net For the FP2SH FP10SH the index registers can be set to hold type or non hold type The register numbers and settings are related as shown below Bank number Set value for 10 to ID Bank number Set value for 10 to ID Bank 0 0 to 13 Bank 8 112 to 125 Bank 1 14 to 27 Bank 9 126 to 139 Bank 2 28 to
227. es High level instructions 428 types Operation speed typical value Basic instructions From 0 35us per instruction High level instructions From 0 93us per instruction Operation memory points for relays External input relays X 2 048 points Note 1 External output relays Y 2 048 points Note 1 Internal relays R 4 048 points Note 3 Timer counter T C Total 1 024 points Note 3 Timer units of 1ms 10ms 100ms and 1s counts up to 32 767 x each unit Counter 1 to 32 767 counts Link relays L 2 048 points Notes 3 and 4 Pulse relays P 1 024 points Note 3 Alarm relays E Not available Data registers DT 6 000 words Note 3 File registers FL 0 to 14 333 words when expanding 0 to 30 717 words Note 3 Link data registers LD 256 words Notes 3 and 5 Timer counter set value area SV 1 024 words Timer counter elapsed value area EV 1 024 words Index registers l0 to ID 14 words mw next page Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 5 Specifications FP2 FP2SH 10 1 Specifications FP2 CPU FP2 C1 AFP2211 FP2 C1D AFP2212 FP2 C1SL AFP2214 Differential points Unlimited number of points Auxiliary timer Unlimited number of points down type timer 0 01 to 327 67s
228. etting the switch to the TEST side puts the PLC in the test operation mode Mode selector page 2 10 is used to change the operation mode of the PLC This is used to switch between the RUN REMOTE and PROG modes 7 IC memory card access enable switch Setting this switch to the on upward side enables data to be read and written to the IC memory card COM port RS232C page 2 11 is used to connect a computer or general serial devices 9 Tool port RS232C is used to connect a programming tool m next page 2 20 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 4 FP2SH CPU Operation condition switches are used to set the baud rate of the programming tool to select the program memory and to select the writing operation for the program memory d Memory backup battery for backup of the internal memory RAM Part number AFC8801 CR2450 or equivalent Operation Condition Switches SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1 Ea g swi Baud rate for tool port Switch position off factory setting System register setting Default value 19 200bps on 9 600bps sw2 Program memory selection Internal RAM External memory SWw3 Program memory protection Write enabled Write protected Sw4 External memory selection ROM IC memory card Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cti
229. evice not possible because transmission time out error buffer is congested 152 Transmit disable Transmission processing to another device is not possible Link error unit runaway etc Command process cannot be received because of multiple frame 153 Busy error processing Or cannot be received because command being processed is congested 160 Parameter error Content of specified parameter does not exist or cannot be used There was a mistake in the contact data area data number 161 Data error i designation size designation range or format designation 162 Registration over Operation was does when number of registrations was exceeded error or when there was no registration 163 BC modeerror ee that cannot be processed was executed during RUN Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Error anda Name Description An abnormality occurred when loading RAM to ROM IC memory card There may be a problem with the ROM or IC memory card When loading the specified contents exceeded the capacity External memory 164 ito Write error occurs ROM or IC memory card is not installed ROM or IC memory card does not conform to specifications ROM or IC memory card board is not installed A program or system register write operation was executed when 165 Protect error the protect mode password setting or DIP switch etc or ROM operation mo
230. fications Pin Layout Output YO to YF 250V AC 2A 4r 4 30V DC 2A i 1 4 For more information regarding the applicable pressure connection crimp terminals and wiring refer to section 4 5 1 i d 30V DC 2A i 1 24V DO 2 40 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 10 Output Units Specifications 2 10 2 6 point Type Relay Output Unit Specifications Item Description CCC CidC Part number FP2 Y6R Insulation method Optical coupler Rated control capacity 5A 250V AC 10A common 5A 30V DC 10A common Note Min load 100mA 10V resistor load Response time off on 10ms or less on gt off 8ms or less Life time Mechanical 20 000 000 operations or more Electrical 100 000 operations or more Internal current consumption 50mA or less at 5V DC Power supply for driving Voltage 24V DC 10 21 6 to 26 4V DC internal circuit Current 70mA or less Surge absorber None Relay socket None Common method Output points per 2 points common common Operating indicator 6 dot LED display lit when on External connection method Terminal block M 3 screw Weight Approx 170g eo Note For each common 1 pin use at a current capacity of 5A or less 2 41 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info
231. for The divided remainder 32 bit is stored operation in DT9015 and DT9016 DT90015 and DT90016 when F33 D P33 PD or F53 DB P53 PDB instruction is executed DT9016 DT90016 After commencing operation the address where the first operation error occurred is stored Monitor the address using decimal display FP2SH When the higher byte of DT90257 is H2 the error occurs in the 2nd program block In case of the 1st program block it is H1 Operation error DT9017 DT90017 adress hold Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address EPa Name Descriptions neac n FP3 FP2SH ing ing FP10SH The address where an operation error occurred is stored Each time an error occurs the new address overwrites the previous address At the beginning of Operation error scan the addresses 0 Monitor the DT9018 DT90018 address address using decimal display non hold FP2SH When the higher byte of DT90257 is H2 A N A the error occurs in the 2nd program block In case of the 1st program block it is H1 The data stored here is increased by one 2 5 ms ring every 2 5 ms HO to HFFFF DT9019 DT90019 Difference between the values of the two counter points absolute value x 2 5 ms Elapsed time between the two points Maximu
232. h When used for computer Stop bit ay A SOA MT ee ase a3 link the start and end 1 bit Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits a f _ End code CR CR LF NON ETX code settings of format End code Start code NO STX STX COM for MEWTOCOL COM will CR i port not be effective Start setting Available PLC FP2 code FP2SH NO STX Baud rate setting for the ie Ny 19700 bps COM port ps 38400 bps 414 19200 bps 2400 bps 57600 bps Available PLC FP2 4800 b 115200 b FP2SH ps ps 9600 bps Unit number setting for 415 ea SEE 1 1 to 99 unit No 1 to 99 FP2SH Modem compatibility Modem enabled Modem disabled 416 setting for COM port Modem When connecting a modem set the Available PLC FP2 disabled unit number to 1 with system register FP2SH 415 Starting address setting for received buffer of FP2SH FP10SH G neral 417 serial data 0 0 to 10240 For details about commu communication mode FP2 0 to 5999 its usage refer to nication data register number the F144 TRNS setting Capacity setting for i P144 PTRNS 418 received buffer of serial 1024 0 to 1024 instructions data communication mode word number Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Operation of DF instruction between MC and MCE instructions When a leading edge detection instruction DF instruction is used with the MC and MCE instructions the derivative output may change as follows depending on the trigger of MC instruct
233. handling this product Wiring the Power Supply to the Control Unit e Use a power supply wire that is thicker than 2 mm AWG14 and twist it e The unit has sufficient noise immunity against the noise generated on the power line However it is recommended to take measures for reducing noise such as using a isolating transformer before supplying the power e Allocate an independent wiring for each power supplying line input output device and operating device If using a power supply without a protective circuit power should be supplied through a protective element such as a fuse e Use the same power supply system for the CPU backplane and expansion backplane so that they are turned on and off simultaneously vii Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Table of Contents FP2 FP2SH Power supply sequence In order to protect the power supply sequence make sure to turn off the PLC before the input output power supply If the input output power supply is turned off before the PLC or if the PLC is not shut off momentarily the controller detects change of input level and might conduct an unexpected operation Before Turning On the Power Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 When turning on the power for the first time be sure to take the precautions given below e When performing installation check to make sure that there are no scraps of wiring particularly conducti
234. he IC Memory Card The IC memory card is available as an optional memory for the FP2 C2P FP2 C3P It cannot be used with the FP2 C2 IC memory cards can be used for two types of applications saving programs and ex panding the data memory area Also a single IC memory card can be used in the following three ways Only for saving programs Only for expanding the data memory area For both saving programs and expanding the data memory area Using the Card to Save Programs Sequence programs can be written to IC memory cards and saved on them The IC memory card with the program written to it is then used as a program memory If the FPWIN GR or a similar tool is used to change the file name to Autoexec spg as an auto run file and the file is copied or the program is transferred and if the DIP switches on the CPU are set so that SW2 and SW4 are both on the program can be automatically transferred to the RAM at the same time that the power supply is turned on If the F14 PRGRD instruction is executed in the RUN mode a program can be substi tuted for another program in any desired file If an SRAM type of IC memory card is being used the ROM amp RAM service in the FPWIN GR can be used to copy the contents of the RAM in the CPU to the IC memory card If the card is being used as a program memory there are four ways to read programs from the card described below Programs can be automatically read when the power supply
235. he PROG mode has activated and turn the power on Using the RAM gt ROM function of the FPWIN GR tool software transfer the contents of the internal RAM to master memory Turn the power off and detach the master memory from the CPU Attach it to the commercially available ROM writer Transfer the contents of master memory to the commer cially available ROM writer The ROM writer settings should be specified as those for the M27C2001 SGS TOMSON Remove the master memory AFP5208 install the memory AFP5209 and write the data The ROM writer settings should be specified as those for the M27C2001 SGS TOMSON wr next page 6 25 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation oe Ie Notes Refer to the commercially available ROM writer manual re garding the ROM IC type setting and writing method If a passwords is on the CPU it is possible to create a password for master memory When writing the contents of the FP2SH internal RAM to mas ter memory be sure to verify that the DIP switches SW2 is off position before turning the power on Notes 1 The above explanation describes the case where the memory unit is used in combination with F ROM and EP ROM As the nonvolatile memory has been implemented in the memory unit Model number AFP2208 a commercial ROM writer cannot be us
236. he input of the PLC is not turned off or if the LED of the limit switch is kept on because of the leakage current the connection of a bleeder resistor is recommended as shown below Using 16 point type DC input unit FP2 X16D2 Off voltage 2 5V Input impedance 3kQ LED equipped o Bleeder limit switch lo r resistor Internal circuit r Internal resistor of limit switch kQ R Bleeder resistor kQ The off voltage of the input is 2 5V therefore when the power supply voltage is 24V select R so that 24 2 5 the current will be greater than 7 5 The resistance R of the bleeder resistor is R Sx 125 kQ Power supply voltage The wattage W of the resistor is W R In the actual selection use a value that is 3 to 5 times the value of W 4 20 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 3 Wiring Input and Output 4 3 2 Output Wiring Before the wiring carefully confirm the specifications for the units to be wired Specifi cally limitations on the ambient temperature number of points that can be on simultaneously and load current will differ for different units Use a protection circuit when connecting inductive loads and capacitive loads Connection of Inductive Loads When connecting an inductive load a protective circuit should be connected in parallel with the
237. he total length 3 2 m or less FP2 backplane H type only Setting of CPU Is the mode selector set to the PROG mode Are the specifications for the ROM and RAM correct Backup battery of CPU Has the insulating sheet for the FP2 CPU battery been removed Is the battery connector for the FP2SH CPU firmly connected Expansion backplane lt FP2 backplane H type only gt Are the settings of the board No setting switches correct Set of memory backup lt AFP2209 only gt ee for IC memory Is the included battery installed Other ss Carefully check if there is potential for an accident 5 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Procedure Until Operation FP2 FP2SH 5 1 Before Turning ON the Power 5 1 2 Procedure Up To Operation After installing and wiring perform the operation by following procedure Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Power on 1 Before turning on the power check the items described on the pre vious page 2 Turn on the power and then check that the power supply unit s POW ER LED and CPU s PROG LED are on Enter the program 1 When using a programming tool perform the operation Clear Pro gram before inputting 2 Enter the program using the programming tool software 3 Use the programming tool s total check function to check for syntax errors Check output wiring Use the fo
238. hen program is 120k steps and the higher byte of DT90257 is H2 the error occurs in the 2nd program block In case of the 1st program block it is H1 R9008 Operation error flag non hold Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs The address where the operation error occurred is stored in DT90018 The contents change each time a new error occurs FP2SH FP10SH When program is 120k steps and the higher byte of DT90258 is H2 the error occurs in the 2nd program block In case of the 1st program block it is H1 R9009 Carry flag Turns on for an instant when an overflow or underflow occurs when 1 is set by one of the shift instructions R900A gt Flag Turns on for an instant when the compared results become larger in the F60 CMP P60 PCMP F61 DCMP P61 PDCMP F62 WIN P62 PWIN or F63 DWIN P63 PDWIN comparison instructions R900B Flag Turns on for an instant when the compared results are equal in the comparison instructions when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic instructions Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Address Name Description Turns on for an instant when the compared results become smaller in the F60 CMP P60 PCMP MADOC
239. ialize test Cleared DSF R switch is set to Link relay L Cleared INITIALIZE position Timers while in the PROG Counters T Cleared mode you can specify Memory C SV EV the type of memory to area Data register be cleared contents DT Cleared Not cleared When the initialize test setting at Link data switch is set to Action 4 INITIALIZE register LD Cleared INITIALIZE position on error position File register while in the PROG FL Cleared mode you can specify Index the type of memory to register I Cleared be not cleared Error alarm relay E Cleared Differential type Conventional Holds preceded result instructions setting Conven inthe MC and MCE instruction set between MC and MCE tional New Disregards preceded result in instructions the MC and MCE instruction set TM instruction operation setting Conven Conventional Scan synchronous Available PLC FP2SH tional New Scan asynchronous FP10SH Enabled Checks for overflow of the index modifier area and performs Index modifier check Enabled normal processing Disabled Performs processing without checking for overflow of the index modifier area Note The error alarm relay is available for FP2SH and FP10SH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Item Aek Name perau Descriptions ress value FP2SH FP2SH Count
240. icator 32 dot LED display lit when on External connection method Connectors MIL type 40 pin Approx 100g The load current will vary depending on the power supply for driving the intern al circuit and the ambient temperature Adjust the load current referring to the following range T 26 4V DC 100 24V DC E Numberof 32 5 points per 5 i common which 50 are simulta 3 1 i 17 3 i i neous on 14 x g L L 4 75 10 2 26 4 43 45 55 Power supply for driving 109 4 113 131 internal circuit V Ambient temperature C F 2 49 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 10 Output Units Specifications Internal Circuit Diagram Output indicator LED 8 2kQ 5 to 24V DC Pin Layout Output YO to Y1F gt A B j o ion jo n OOOOOOOO 5 to 24V DC Sle o eo a Te rn BISIS 3 Blo s a a 16 9 D 2 3 4 65 D Ce ee i OOOOOOOO OOOOOOOO Q 49 D iG G aA Although and terminals are connected internally with the same connector It is rec ommended that they also be connected externally For more information regarding the applicable connectors and terminals refer to sec tion 4 4
241. ich is automatically back to the LOCK posi tion when removing the battery holder In this state insert the battery holder all the way seated Confirm the lock switch is in the LOCK position 5 Write the backup data in the IC memory card 9 6 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Maintenance 9 1 Replacement of Spare Parts 9 1 2 Removable Terminal Block for Input and Output Units Removable Terminal Block The removable terminal block is used on the terminal block type input and output units The removable terminal block can be removed while it is still wired Therefore if a mal function or other error occurs replacement of the unit and other maintenance procedures can be carried out speedily Replacement of Removable Terminal Block Removal procedure The whole removable terminal block for terminal block type input and output units can be removed by lowering the OPEN knob release lever on the top of the terminal block Used at the time of wiring Installation procedure To replace the terminal block press it into its original position until it is completely seated and press the terminal block lock button on the bottom of the unit to secure the terminal block in place Then verify that the terminal block is properly secured and cannot be re moved 9 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net
242. ied to the input terminal of PLC is greater than on voltage value In particular take care when connecting a number of switches in series Input LED y t terminal DC On voltage input unit value or more ve Power supply for input LED equipped reed switch Contaci S Connection of Two wire Type Sensor If the input of the PLC is not turned off because of leakage current from the two wire type sensor the connection of a bleeder resistor is recommended as shown below Using 16 point type DC input unit FP2 X16D2 Off voltage 2 5V Input impedance 3kQ Input terminal DC Two wire Bleeder input unit type sensor resistor Internal circuit l Sensor s leakage current mA R Bleeder resistor kQ The off voltage of the input is 2 5V therefore select an R value so that the voltage between the COM terminal and the input terminal will be less than 2 5V The input impedance is 3kQ 7 5 The resistance R of the bleeder resistor is R KQ 3 x 1 2 5 Power supply voltage R In the actual selection use a value that is 3 to 5 times the value of W The wattage W of the resistor is W 4 19 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 3 Wiring Input and Output Connection of LED equipped Limit Switch With the LED equipped limit switch if t
243. ified as the expanded memory field the card can be used only for reading data Types of IC Memory Cards Memory capacity Part number AIC50020 Usage method When used to store programs Data is written to IC memory card using Copy File to IC Card of programming tool software When used as expanded memory field Serves as dedicated memory for reading data Data is written using pro gramming tool software Data is read from IC memory card using high level instruc tion F12 ICRD Recommended application points No battery back up is required so this is ideal for saving programs AFP2209 AIC52000 Discon tinued products Programs are written to IC memory card using Down load Program to IC Card of programming tool software Programs can be written from internal RAM to IC memory card using ROM lt RAM of programming tool software Writing of data to IC memory card is done using high level instruction F13 ICWT Reading of data from IC memory card is done using high level instruction F12 ICRD Data can be read to and written from programs so this is ideal for use as expansion data memory Both the SRAM and FROM type can be divided into a format field and an expanded memory field for use When using the card as a program memory there are four ways to read programs Programs are read automatically when the
244. ified by S1 and S2 are 11 Oo se 15 se x EEP ROM S2 D transferred to the EEP ROM starting at D 2 OLOS f F12 Data read ICRD S1 The data stored in the expansion memory from F ROM S2 D of the F ROM specified by S1 and S2 1 1x10 olojlxj x are transferred to the area starting at D P13 Data write to PICWT S1 The data specified by S1 and S2 are uIlxlolololx x F ROM S2 D transferred to the F ROM starting at D F12 Data read ICRD S1 The data stored in the expansion memory P12 from IC card PICRD S2 D of the IC card specified by S1 and S2 1 x x x x x o are transferred to the area starting at D F13 Data write to ICWT S1 The data specified by S1 and S2 are P13 IC card PICWT S2 D transferred to the IC card expansion 11 X XIX XIXIO memory area starting at D F14 Program read PGRD S The program specified using S is P14 from IC PPGRD transferred into the CPU from IC memory 3 x x x x x O memory card card and executes it O Available X Not available A Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used 2 This instruction is available for FPO Ver 2 0 or later and FP e Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net
245. ignal name oj H g SG 1 5 SG ca i 9 ale sb POE 2 RO oly Fe RD 3 e 3 SD 2 N Zel 4 7 RS eee p fos lel 8 cs 0 FG Jos FG Socket 1 cD 1 Inch screw thread 4 40 d 4 ER AFC8503 AFC8503S oR CN1 RI me Hm Unit mm 10 3 2 AFC85305 AFC8531 AFC8532 For extending for the tool port MAIS SWZ Ge L mm AFC85305 500 19 AFC8531 1000 180 AFC8532 2000 9 ded UIA Unit mm Unit mm 10 13 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Specifications FP2 FP2SH 10 3 Cable Adapter Specifications 10 14 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 11 Appendix Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 1 System Registers Special Internal Relays Special Data Registers Precaution for System Registers What is the system register area e System registers are used to set values parameters which determine operation ranges and functions used Set values based on the use and specifications of your program e There is no need to set system registers for functions which will not be used Type of system registers The registe
246. info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address Ere Name Descriptions beer n FP3 FP2SH p ing ing FP10SH Display the error conditions for 8 types of errors using 1 byte 1 Abnormal oa 0 Normal condition Communication error Transmission error Illegal unit error Error code Terminal station error of Slot number error D19136 DT90136 MEWNET F 1 0 mapping error A N A DT9137 DT90137 remote lamentan ioka O tem drop error pysie Abnormal 1 0 unit error Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits DT9136 0T90136 1 1 For master 2 For master 1 Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits DT9137 DT90137 el For master 4 For master 3 DT9138 DT90138 Not used N A N A DT9139 DT90139 Not used DT9140 DT90140 Te number of times the receiving operation is performed counted using ring counter DT9141 DT90141 The current interval between two receiving Note1 operations value in the register x 2 5 ms DT9142 pT90142 MEWNET The minimum interval between two receiving Note1 W P operations value in the register x 2 5 ms DT9143 PC PLC The maximum interval between two receiving A DT90143 Note1 link status operations value in the register x 2 5 ms Rian hie DT9144 PC PLC The number of times the sending operation is DT90144 link eae Note1 ink 0 performed
247. inner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda Direct vibration shock or direct drop of water Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables pow er equipment radio transmitters or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges 100mm or more 4 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 1 Installation 4 1 2 Mounting Method 4 1 2 1 Backplane Mounting Hole Dimensions FP2 backplane L il Type of backplane Part number L mm in 5 module type FP2 BP05 130 5 118 7 module type FP2 BP07 199 7 835 9 module type FP2 BP09 255 10 039 12 module type FP2 BP12 339 13 346 14 module type FP2 BP14 395 15 551 FP2 backplane H type Type of backplane Part number L mm in 11 module type FP2 BP11MH 339 13 346 Unit mm in Basic backplane 10 module type FP2 BP10EH 339 13 346 Expansion backplane Attaching with Screws i Note Secure the backplane while the unit is not installed Tightening torque 0 9 to 1 1 N m Procedure 1 Lightly secure the upper part of the backplane using the mounting holes 2 Align the mounting holes for the lower part and secure 3 Tighten the upper screws 4 Make sure that backplane is securely attached Backplane Ze iP lia 8 A We
248. internal RAM of the CPU The CPU automatically switches to the RUN mode and the new program executes A a Example With F14 PGRD instruction specify a saved file name by the FPWIN GR to call up the program of from IC memory card F14 PGRD DT 100 STEP For the program above the contents STEP 1 stored in DT100 is the file name used to call up the program To store the program name to registers such as DT100 you can write it with alphanumeric code using FO MV or F1 DMV instruction or you can write it with ASCII conversion using F95 ASC instruction For more details refer to the programming manual eae Notes There are dangers involved when switching programs while in the RUN mode Carefully read the section regarding the F14 PGRD instruction in the programming manual e Only files saved with the spg extension are programs that can be read using the F14 PGRD instruction 7 21 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH 7 4 For Use as Expansion Memory 7 4 __ For Use as Expansion Memory Outline of Expansion Memory The expansion memory area is an independent area from the internal memory of the CPU that stores word data Use the F12 ICRD and F13 ICWT instructions to read and write data to this area Below are some of the things that you can do by using the expansion memory area 1 As reading and
249. ion and input timing of DF instruction Take care regarding this point xo m 0 x1 Y10 HE J MCE 0 Example 1 When system register 4 sets 0 conventional Time chart 1 X0 X1 Y10 Previous execution of DF instruction The trigger X1 for the DF instruction has not changed since the time of the previous execution thus derivated output is not obtained Time chart 2 X0 X1 Y10 Previous execution of DF instruction The trigger X1 for the DF instruction has changed from off to on since the time of the previous execution thus derivative output is obtained Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Example 2 When system register 4 sets 1 new Time chart 1 X0 X1 Y10 Previous execution of DF instruction The derivative output is obtained without relation to condition of trigger X1 of the time of previous execution Time chart 2 xO X1 Y10 Previous execution of DF instruction The derivative output is obtained without relation to condition of trigger X1 of the time of previous execution Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 1 2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Address Name Description R9000 Self diagnostic error Turns on when a self diagnostic error occurs flag The self diagnostic error code i
250. iptions PERG AV FP3 FP2SH ing ing FP10SH When an error condition is detected in an intelligent unit the bit corresponding Abnormal to the slot of the unit will be set to on DT9006 DT90006 intelligent unit Monitor using binary display slot No 0 to 15 1 abnormal intelligent unit 0 normal intelligent unit Abnormal SlotNo 15 21 11 8 7 4 3 0 intelligent unit DTse06DT90006 _ EE EE LE LEICLLE LA slot No 16 to Bit position a CE EET 31 Slot No an a i Bit position 15 i elZ 4 3 0 DT9007 DT90007 16 When the state of installation of an I O unit has changed since the power was VO verify error turned on the bit corresponding to the DT9010 DT90010 unit slot No 0 slot of the unit will be set to on Monitor to 15 using binary display 1 error 0 normal Bit position 15 21 14 3 7 la 0 SlotNo 15 21 11 8 7 0 VO verify error owon 11L DT9011 DT90011 unit slot No 16 ion e e e eza al to 31 SlotNo s1 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 A N A oono TT TT TTT TT TTT TTI a One shift out hexadecimal digit is stored Auxiliary in bit positions 0 to 3 when F105 D13014 D19001 a BSR P105 PBSR or f106 BSL P106 p PBSL instruction is executed The divided remainder 16 bit is stored in DT9015 DT90015 when F32 P32 DT9015 DT90015 P or F52 B P52 PB instruction Auxiliary is executed register
251. irectly write the program that is made by the FPWIN GR to the IC memory card For the SRAM type IC memory card Procedure 1 Booting the Download Program to IC Card function On the Tool menu select IC Card Service and then Download Program to IC Card Card 7 15 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH 7 3 For Use as Program Memory 2 Setting the file information Enter the File Name name of the file to which the pro gram is to be written the Title and the Author name of the person creating the file The file name must be within 8 characters Programs can be written even if the Title and the Au thor are not specified Check to make sure the necessary items have been en tered and click on the Execute button Writing of the program to the IC memory card begins is Note To have the program being sent executed automatically select Auto Run File Without Comment for the Type of File Infor mation 7 16 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 7 3 For Use as Program Memory Method 3 Write a program on the RAM of the CPU into the IC memory card For the IC memory card and named Autoexec spg Procedure 1 Booti
252. irst error alarm relay DT90401 went on for day and hour data Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Time at which the first error alarm relay DT90401 went on for year and month data Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH The time minute and second data at which the first error alarm relay in DT90401 went on is stored DT90420 The time day and hour data at which the first error alarm relay in DT90401 went on A N A is stored DT90421 The time year and month data at which the first error alarm relay in DT90401 went on is stored DT90422 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 2 Table of Basic Instructions x 72 o e 5 AJE a xX ala Name Boolean Symbol Description ajeje ld laje g u e ue t F Oln 2 ra Sequence basic instructions Start ST XYRTOLPE Begins a logic operation with a Form A 1 _ i normally open contact 2 PIP Pe tei Start Not ST XYRTGLRE Begins a logic operation with a Form B 1 Lv normally closed contact CA el ana ana ed na Out oT YR LE Outputs the operated result to the specified output al elejojejojo Not I Inverts the operated result up to this 1 instruction ololalalala AND AN XY R T C L P E Connects a Form A normally open contac
253. is W P link detected status Counts how many times main loop break is A N A DT9220 DT90220 W P link 2 detected Note Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Counts how many times sub loop break is DT9221 DT90221 detected Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Loop reconstruction condition Diese o Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Loop operation mode AIREAN eed Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Loop input status Digest Prater Available PLC FP3 FP10SH DT9225 DT90225 Not used DT9226 DT90226 Not used DT9227 DT90227 Not used DT9228 DT90228 Not used DT9229 DT90229 Not used Station number where the send area DT9230 DT90230 address for the PC link is overlapped with this station is stored here Test result in the optical transmission path DT9231 DT90231 test mode for MEWNET P link system is MEWNET stored here DT9232 DT90232 ee eae Counts how many times a token is lost A N A DT9233 DT90233 W P link 3 Counts how many times two or more tokens Note are detected DT9234 DT90234 Counts how many times a signal is lost DT9235 DT90235 Counts how many times a synchronous abnormality is detected DT9236 DT90236 Send NACK DT9237 DT90237 Send NACK Note For MEWNET W system available PLC type FP2 FP2SH FP3 FP10SH For MEWNET P system available PLC type FP3 FP10SH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Avai
254. it RTEX Positioning unit Inter polation type Transistor output type Line driver output type Transistor output type Line driver output type mw next page 1 13 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Overview FP2 FP2SH 1 2 Unit Types and Combinations Type Part number Current con sumption at 5V DC mA Intelligent C C U FP2 CCU 60 or less unit S LINK unit FP2 SL2 130 or less Multi wire link unit FP2 MW 220 or less Remote I O Slave Unit FP2 RMS 150 or less ET LAN unit FP2 ET1 670 or less MEWNET VE Link unit FP2 VE 670 or less FNS unit FNS unit FP2 FNS 55 or less FP FNS PROFIBUS AFPN AB6200 230 or less Block Device Net AFPN AB6201 65 or less CAN open AFPN AB6218 65 or less FMU unit PROFIBUS FP2 DPV1 M 450 or less Device Net FP2 DEV M 150 or less CAN open FP2 CAN M 450 or less Table of current consumption at 24V DC Type Part number Current consumption at 24V DC mA Input unit DC input 16 point terminal type 12 to 24V DC FP2 X16D2 8 or less per one point 32 point connector type 24V DC FP2 X32D2 4 3 or less per one point 64 point connector type 24V DC FP2 X64D2 4 3 or less per one point Output unit Relay output 6 point terminal type FP2 Y6R 70 or less 16 point terminal type FP2 Y16R 160 or less Transistor 16 point terminal NPN type FP2 Y
255. it operation Hexadecimal H HO to HFFFF for 16 bit operation constants HO to HFFFFFFFF for 32 bit operation Decimal constants f f 1 175494 x 10 38 to f 3 402823 x 1038 monorefined real number 1 175494 x 10 38 to 3 402823 x 1038 eS Notes 1 There are two unit types the hold type that saves the condi tions that exist just before turning the power off or changing from the RUN mode to PROG mode and the non hold type that resets them The selection of hold type and non hold type can be changed by the setting of system register 2 The points for the timer and counter can be changed by the setting of system register 5 The numbers given in the table are numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting 3 The size of the file register varies depending on the settings of system registers 0 1 and 2 4 Hold or non hold type can be set using the system registers 10 12 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Specifications 10 3 Cable Adapter Specifications 10 3 Cable Adapter Specifications 10 3 1 AFC8503 AFC8503S 3000 13 ln gt 16 0 CN2 Mini DIN5 pin Male D SUB9 pin Female ae B PLC side D PC side CN1 L Signal name Pin No Pin No S
256. itr cele Ji Master controlarea J Master MCE j i SR Ends the master control program control l 2 lolololololo relay end Jump JP The program jumps to the label 2 H e n instruction and continues from there 3 2 1olololololo LBL n Label LBL 4 Auxiliary F19 The program jumps to the label 3 jump SJP m rs sesk instruction specified by S and rar ae ae ar wna continues from there 1 Label LBL Loop LOOP The program jumps to the label 4 in instruction and continues from there the 5 Ly Hie n 7 number of jumps is set in S 3 O O O0 0 0 0 Label LBL Break BRK Stops program execution when the HKE predetermined trigger turns on in the 1 xX x x x O O0 TEST RUN mode only O Available X Not available Z Not available partially 1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when internal relay WR240 or higher is used the number of steps is the number in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the specified internal relay number word address has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 2 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n in a jump instruction has an index modifier the number of steps isthenumber in parentheses 3 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n in a loop instruction has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomati
257. j Range for sending Range for communication Receiving area The default settings have the range for communication system registers 40 41 50 and 51 set to 0 so that PC link communication is not possible If the range for sending system registers 43 45 53 and 55 is set to 0 the range for communication will all be for receiving The link relay and link data register ranges not used for communication can each be used as internal relays and data registers Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Table of system registers for FP2 FP2SH FP10SH setting Item Add Name perau Descriptions ress value Sequence program area 42K FP2 16K 2 to 16K words 0 capacity setting words FP2 32K 2 to 32K words Available PLC FP2 Alloca Machine language tion of 1 program area capacity OwWord FP2 16K 0 to 14K words user setting FP2 32K 0 to 30K words memory Available PLC FP2 3 e a capacity o word FP2 16K 0 to 14K words Available PLC FP2 FP2 32K 0 to 30K words Enabled When a battery error occurs a self diagnostic error is issued and the ERROR LED lights BATT LED lights Battery error alarm Enabled Disabled When a battery error occurs a self diagnostic error is not issued and the ERROR LED does not light BATT LED does not light Internal relay Cleared When the init
258. k R9051 transmission error flag unit ae WIP LINK 2 turns on when transmission error occurs at link 2 turns on when there is an error in the link area settings MEWNET W P link When using MEWNET W link unit or MEWNET P link R9052 transmission error flag unit Ea WIP LINK 3 turns on when transmission error occurs at link 3 turns on when there is an error in the link area settings MEWNET W P link When using MEWNET W link unit or MEWNET P link oe unit R9053 transmission error flag ee WIP LINK 4 turns on when transmission error occurs at link 4 turns on when there is an error in the link area settings MEWNET W P link When using MEWNET W link unit or MEWNET P link R9054 transmission error flag unit reh WIP LINK 5 turns on when transmission error occurs at link 5 turns on when there is an error in the link area settings R9055 Not used R9056 Not used R9057 Not used Remote 1 0 transmission When using MEWNET F remote I O system R9058 error flag master 1 turns on when transmission error occurs on master 1 turns on when there is an error in the settings ar When using MEWNET F remote I O system R9059 eee amet Sion turns on when transmission error occurs on master 2 turns on when there is an error in the settings D da When using MEWNET F remote I O system R905A Bime allele S199 turns on when transmission error occurs on master 3 turns on when there is an error in the settings R
259. k unit i F145 Data send SEND S1 S2 Sends the data to the slave station as lxlo Aloly 5 P145 D N the MOD bus master via COM port H fa n E F146 Data receive RECV S1 S2 Receives the data from the slave station o lxlo Ajo xix P146 N D as the MOD bus master via COM port 3 o F145 Data send SEND S1 S2 Sends the data to the slave station of lxlo AJA CT P145 D N the MOD bus master type Il 4 4 F146 Data receive RECV S1 S2 Receives the data from the slave station lxlo AlA xIx P146 N D of the MOD bus master type Il 4 4 F145 Data send SEND S1 S2 Sends the data to the slave station as i P145 D N the MEWTOCOL master via COM 91 x Oo 3 3 x x port F146 Data receive RECV S1 S2 Receives the data from the slave station P146 N D as a MEWTOCOL master via COM 9 x O 3 43 x x port F147 Printout PR S D Converts the ASCII code data in the area starting with S for printing and slolololololo outputs it to the word external output relay WY specified by D F148 Self ERR n Stores the self diagnostic error number P148 diagnostic PERR n k100 n in DT9000 turns R9000 on and 3 O0 O0 0 0 0 0 error set to K299 turns on the ERROR LED F149 Message MSG S Displays the character constant of S in 3lolololololo P149 display PMSG the connected programming tool f i i O Available X Not available A Not a
260. kplane is functionally equivalent to the backplane for FP3 There are the basic backplane H type for installing I O units and the expansion backplane H type for adding I O units more The basic backplane cannot be used as an expansion backplane Removal and Installation of Expansion Memory Unit During removal and installation of expansion memory unit the contents of the internal RAM may be erased so be sure to save a copy of the program and data onto a disk before beginning the operations Use programming tool software NPST GR FPWIN GR for backup purposes Before rewriting the backed up program and data to the programmable controller be sure to clear the program in the programmable controller Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Table of Figures With the FP2SH Programming Tool Restrictions The following tool software is required in order to program the FP2SH FPWIN GR NPST GR Ver 4 6 or a subsequent version Request Concerning Program Storage To prevent the accidental loss of programs the user should consider the following measures Drafting of documents To avoid accidentally losing programs destroying files or overwriting the contents of a file documents should be printed out and then saved Disks should be organized to assure safe maintenance Specifying the password carefully The password setting is desig
261. lable N A Not available Address ihe Name Descriptions pac dd FP3 FP2SH ing ing FP10SH DT9238 DT90238 Send WACK DT9239 DT90239 Send WACK DT9240 DT90240 Send answer DT9241 DT90241 Send answer DT9242 DT90242 Unidentified command DT9243 pT90243 Counts how many times a parity error is detected DT9244 DT90244 End code receiving error DT9245 DT90245 Format error DT9246 DT90246 Not support error DT9247 DT90247 Self diagnostic result Counts how many times loop change is DT9248 DT90248 Mohe detected status Available PLC FP3 FRACS l A N A DT9249 DT90249 W P link 3 Counts home many times link error is Note detected Counts how many times main loop break is DT9250 DT90250 detected Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Counts how many times sub loop break is DT9251 DT90251 detected Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Loop reconstruction condition pene TURE Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Loop operation mode PIAT P0239 Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Loop input status PIeto E TUA Available PLC FP3 FP10SH Monitoring tool port i DT90255 station No Station number BCD H1 to H32 set for tool Available port is stored here PLC FP2SH EF Ot A N A Monitoring COM port P DT90256 station No Station number BCD H1 to H32 set for tool Available port is stored here PLC FP2SH FP10SH Note Fo
262. lane H type AFP25 H Color of letters on the printed board Yellow These two backplanes cannot be used in combination Carefully select the type of backplanes before you order The selection of the backplane should be based on the total number of modules to be used in the system In other words the module number of the backplane must be greater than or equal to the total number of modules for the system So be sure to select a backplane that allows the installation of all the required units ix Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Table of Contents FP2 FP2SH When using the FP3 FP10SH or Other Units Backplane slot number The backplane for the FP2 is specified by the total number of slots i e 14 module type including the connectors for the power supply unit and CPU The number of connectors or slots remaining for the I O units and intelligent units is then the module number of the backplane minus the number of modules for the power supply unit and CPU Similarly the number of connectors or slots remaining for the I O units on expansion backplanes is the module number of the backplane minus the number of modules for the power supply unit Expansion backplanes 1 2 FP2 backplane Does not support expansion with 5 module type backplanes Backplanes that are not the 5 module type can be used as expansion backplanes FP2 backplane H type This bac
263. lave station 0 Normal slave station DT90131 is H100 Bit tion Eo 87 413 0 H101 H102 or Savesta onno 16 13 12 9 8 5 4 H103 DT91320T90132 Bit position 15 12 11 2 r S 4 2 0 Slave station no 32 29 28 5 24 17 mel TTTT TIT Trt ee A N A The bit corresponding to the slave station number of the MEWNET F MEWNET F where an error is occurring will be set remote I O error t0 0n Monitor using binary display slave station 1 Error slave station 0 Normal slave number record station when DT9131 Bit position 15 12 11 8 7 DT90131 is HO T EE H1 H2 or H3 Bit position 15 12 11 r 2 L 4 2 Slave station no 32 29 28 moel TILLE TTT D19134 Diao If a momentary voltage drop at DIP IS Dl a0tsS MEWNET F slave station set the bit MEWNET F corresponding to that slave station remote I O number will be set to on Monitor using momentary binary display voltage drop slave station number 1 Error slave station 0 Normal slave station when DT9131 Bit position fis 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 DT90131 is H100 Siavestaionno 16 13 12 9 8 514 1 H101 H102 or prewar ILII H103 Bit position jis 12 11 7 4 3 0 Slave stationno 32 29 28 25 24 21 20 17 prossoreorss TT TTT TTT ITI II Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email
264. learing Registered Content 00200 eee 3 17 3 5 1 Meaning of Clearing Registered Content 3 17 3 5 2 Clearing Content Using Programming Tool Software 3 17 3 6 I O Numbers of Free Slots 0 00 cece ees 3 18 3 6 1 1 O Numbers of Free Slots 0 0 c eee eee eee eee 3 18 3 6 2 Differences Due to Allocation Methods 3 18 3 6 2 1 When Arbitrary Allocation is Used 3 18 3 6 2 2 When I O Mount Allocation is Used 3 20 3 6 2 3 When Automatic Allocation is Used 3 21 Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring 41 Installation iesrs tetera ersa oninia A OE E SE Keem Ne Ree 4 3 4 1 1 Installation Space and Environment 00020 ee eee 4 3 4 1 2 Mounting Method 222 s s2 usec en ae Pe ie Se SEE 4 6 4 1 2 1 Backplane sio Se sccniee ean iene Vereen Beem Paine te 4 6 4 1 2 2 UNITS Teenan badioniaae Ge teae saw saeases 4 8 4 1 3 Connecting Expansion Cable 0 0 cece eee eee 4 11 4 1 4 Preparing the Backup Battery 0 0 eee eee eee 4 13 42 Power Supply Wiring e 0ce cued ioc ieee eek fee ee RLN Eee See 4 15 4 2 1 Wiring of Power Supply 0 00 cece eee eee 4 15 4 2 2 Grn rae a Seat ete isda Le cach Mat Rect in li ig a ee 4 17 4 3 Wiring Input and Output cues seventh eee eae eee eee aaa viewed 4 18 4 3 1 Inp t WING 23 sa eae a oat Bee eet ee eas we eae Ba 4 18 4 3 2 Output Wiring
265. licks into place and that the unit is properly secured to the backplane g i Retaining hook 3 Attach the installation screws and further secure the unit to the backplane For the 2 modules type unit there are two installation screws 2 modules type unit Unit installation screw Tightening 1 0 to 1 2 N m 4 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 1 Installation Removing the unit Procedure 1 Loosen the installation screws 2 Pull out the retaining hook at the bottom of the unit with the tip of a flat headed screwdriver and remove the unit as illustrated below 4 10 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 1 Installation 4 1 3 Connecting Expansion Cable Attaching Connectors Make sure that the expansion cable is firmly connected Do not subject the expansion cable to any twisting or stress Connect the expansion cable so that the ferrite core of the expansion cable is situated in close proximity to CPU backplane FP2 backplane One backplane can be added on for expansion Expansion backplane Sli
266. load When connecting the DC type inductive loads and relay type output unit be sure to con nect a diode for protective circuit across the ends of the load This will effect the life of the relay When using an AC type inductive load Surge absorber Example of surge absorber i R Cc R 509 C 0 47uF Varistor Output Load Output Load terminal 2a terminal scl Output Output A unit unit COM COM When using a DC type inductive load Diode Output J terminal Output unit 5 COM 4 21 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 3 Wiring Input and Output Connection of Capacitive Loads When connecting the loads with large in rush currents be sure to connect a protection circuit such as resistor or inductor in series with the load as shown below Resistor Inductor BEEN WW Load O00 Load Output erminal A unit J COM J COM Precautions for Overload To pr each even otect the units from overloading it is recommended to attach an external fuse for point There are times that the elements for the output units cannot be protected if external fuses are connected 4 3 3 Cautions Regarding Units Wiring Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are separated and so that the input and output wiring is separated
267. lock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 2 s cycles 02s oe JUL R901C 1 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 1 s cycles 1s R901D 2 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 2 s cycles JUL 2s R901E kie clock pulse Repeats on off operations in 1 min cycles 3 R901F Not used s Note Used by the system Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Address Name Description Turns off while the mode selector is set to PROG R3020 RUN mode flag Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN Turns on while the initialize test switch of the CPU is set to R9021 TEST and mode selector is set to RUN test run operation Note Test RUN mode flag start Turns off during the normal RUN mode R9022 Turns on while the BRK instruction is executing or the step Note Break flag run is executing R9023 Turns on while the BRK instruction is enabled in the test Note Break enable flag RUN mode Output update enable Note flag in the test RUN hed on while the output update is enabled in the test RUN mode R9025 Single instruction fla Turns on while the single instruction execution is selected in Note 9 9 the test RUN mode R9026 Turns on while the F149 MSG P149 PMSG instruction is Message flag Note executed free Remote mode flag Turns on while the mode selector is set
268. lve characters of the character P95 code PASC constants of S are converted to 5slolololololo ASCII code and stored in D to ee eee ee ee ee D 5 F96 16 bit table data SRC S1 The data of S1 is searched for in P96 search PSRC S2 the areas in the range S2 to S3 7 lolololololc S3 and the result is stored in DT9037 p j p and DT9038 F97 32 bit table data DSRC S1 The data of S1 1 S1 is searched P97 search PDSRC S2 for in the 32 bit data designated by s3 S3 beginning from S2 and the 1 x O OQ O0 0 C result if stored in DT90037 and DT90038 Data shift instructions F98 Data table shift out CMPR D1 Transfer D2 to D3 Any parts of P98 and compress PCMPR D2 the data between D1 and D2 that 71xlololololo D3 are 0 are compressed and shifted in order toward D2 F99 Data table shift in CMPW S D1 Transfer S to D1 Any parts of the P99 and compress PCMP D2 data between D1 and D2 that are 7x lololololo w 0 are compressed and shifted in re a order toward D2 F100 Right shift of SHR D n Shifts the n bits of D to the right P100 multiple bits n bits PSHR 5 0j ojolojojoc in a 16 bit data F101 Left shift of multiple SHL D n Shifts the n bits of D to the left P101 bits n bits in a 16 PSHL 5 O O O0 0 0 0 bit data F102 Right shift of n bits DSHR D n Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data P102
269. m value DT9020 i of program The last address of sequence program Available PLC area set in system register 0 is stored FP3 Display of The program capacity is stored in program decimal capacity Example f K30 approx 30 K steps Ayallabie RLG K60 approx 60 K steps with memory FP10SH ins i z DT90020 expansion l Display of The program capacity is stored in program Geckne N A N A capacity Example K16 approx 16 K steps K15870 Available PLC FP2 K32 approx 32 K steps with memory expansion Maximum value DT9021 of file register The maximum last address of the file Note Available PLC registers available are stored in here FP3 Maximum value i DT90021 of file register The maximum last address of the file Note Available PLC registers available are stored in here FP2 FP10SH Note Used by the system Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address eee Name Descriptions ease lea FP3 FP2SH p ing ing FP10SH The current scan time is stored here Scan time is S ti calculated using the per aS Scan time formula arena DT9022 DT90022 only possible current value Scan time ms stored in RUN data decimal x 0 1 mode a d Example K50 indicates 5 ms a The minimum scan time
270. mation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 11 1 0 Mixed Units Specifications 2 11 2 32 point Type DC Input 32 point Type Transistor PNP Output Unit Specifications Item o Description y Part number FP2 XY64D2P Input specifica tions Insulation method Optical coupler Rated input voltage 24V DC Rated input current Approx 4 3mA at 24V DC Input impedance Approx 5 6kQ Input voltage range 20 4 to 26 4V DC Min on voltage Min on current 19 2V 4mA Max off voltage Max off current 5 0V 1 5mA Response time off on 0 2ms or less on off Common method Input points per common 0 3ms or less 32 points common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal Output specifica tions Insulation method Rated load voltage Optical coupler 5 to 24V DC Load voltage range 4 75 to 26 4V DC Maximum load current Maximum surge current 0 1A at 12 to 24V DC 50mA at 5V DC Note 0 3A Off state leakage current 1uA or less On state maximum voltage drop 1 5V or less at 6 to 26 4V DC 0 5V or less at 6V DC or less off on on off Response time 0 1ms or less 0 3ms or less Power supply for driving internal Voltage 4 75 to 26 4V DC circuit Current Surge absorber 130mA or less at 24V DC Ze
271. minal block M 3 screw Weight Approx 150g The load current will vary depending on the power supply for driving the internal circuit Adjust the load current referring to the following range 500 100 Max load current mA 4 75 10 2 26 4 Power supply for driving internal circuit V 2 48 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 10 Output Units Specifications Internal Circuit Diagram Output indicator LED 7 5kQ 5 to 24V DC Pin Layout Output YO to YF 5 to 24V DC For more information regarding the applicable pressure connection crimp terminals and wiring refer to section 4 5 1 2 44 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 10 Output Units Specifications 2 10 4 16 point Type Transistor PNP Output Unit Specifications ca OOOO O OOOO Part number FP2 Y16P Insulation method Optical coupler Rated load voltage 5 to 24V DC Load voltage range 4 75 to 26 4V DC Maximum load current 0 5A at 12 to 24V DC 0 1 A at 5V DC Note Maximum surge current 3A 10ms or less Off state leakage current 1A or less On state maximum voltage drop 0 5V or less Response time off on 0 1ms or less on gt off 0 3ms or less Intern
272. mmunication Commands 11 95 11 6 Hexadecimal Binary BCD 0 ccc eee 11 96 11 7 ASCH COdGS csc ccteier cone euk eins a eel eebeeee eka a ease 11 97 NAEK i esa apes sede a sn earn ntnal chines a a l 1 Record of changes anaana raara rererere R 1 vi Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Table of Figures Before You Start Operating environment Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when installing e Ambient temperatures 0 to 55 C e Ambient humidity 30 to 85 RH at 25 C non condensing e For use in pollution Degree 2 environment e Do not use it in the following environments Direct sunlight Sudden temperature changes causing condensation Inflammable or corrosive gas Excessive airborne dust metal particles or saline matter Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda Direct vibration shock or direct drop of water Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables power equipment radio transmitters or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges 100mm or more About static electricity e Do not touch connector pins directly to prevent static electricity from causing damage e Always rid yourself of any static electricity before
273. mmunication unit Only one unit see note Multi wire Link unit MEWNET W mode Can be installed within 3 units in combination with W link CCU and MCU PC link mode Can be installed within 5 units in combination with W link CCU and MCU PC link mode Can be installed within 2 units in combination with MCU in PC PLC link mode Multi wire Link unit MEWNET W2 mode ET LAN unit Up to 3 units can be used Up to 2 units out of 3 when including PC PLC link Up to 8 units can be used Up to 2 units out of 8 when including PC PLC link Multi Communication unit PC PLC link mode Can be installed within 3 units in combination with W link CCU and MCU Can be installed within 5 units in combination with W link CCU and MCU Can be installed within 2 units in combination with W link unit in PC PLC link mode Multi Communication unit Computer link mode Up to 8 units can be used MEWNET VE Link Unit Note Not Available Can be installed within 2 units in combination with Multi Communication Unit Depending on the location of the connected ports and the com mands used for communication up to 3 units can be used For more details refer to the Computer Communication Unit Manual 1 10 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Overview 1 2 Unit Types and Combinations M
274. mory Function Part Model speed RAM number number Expansion ROM IC card Calendar Comment RAM timer memory 32k steps From 0 03us 32k steps Not Available Not Available Available FP2 C2L AFP2221 Standard available Optional available Built in Built in type CPU 60k steps 60k steps Not Available Not lable Available AFP2231 Standard available Optional available t in Built in type CPU 60k steps 60k steps Not Available Available lable Available FP2 C2P AFP2235 CPU with available Built in Optional t in Built in IC memory card interface 120k steps Not Available Available lable Available FP2 C3P AFP2255 CPU with IC available Built in Optional t in Built in memory card inter face 2 18 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 4 FP2SH CPU 2 4 1 32k 60k Step Standard Type CPU FP2 C2L FP2 C2 Parts Terminology and Functions Status indicator LEDs page 2 9 display the operating condition and error statuses 2 Initialize test switch page 2 9 Setting the switch to the INITIAL side clears errors and initializes the operation memory Setting the switch to the TEST side puts the PLC in the test operation mode 3 Mode selector page 2 10 is used to change the oper
275. mounting 2 Unit guides Align the tab on the unit with this guide when installing the unit to the backplane For use as the basic backplane CPU backplane from the left side of the back plane install the power supply unit CPU I O units and intelligent units in this order For use as an expansion backplane from the left side of the backplane install the power supply unit I O units and intelligent units in this order 3 Connector for various units Install a CPU input or output unit When installing a CPU be sure to install it next to a power supply unit 4 DIN rail attachment lever allows attachment to a DIN rail Unit installation holes for installing the unit to the backplane Use the screw supplied with the unit for installation 6 Connector for power supply unit 7 Connector for expansion cable for more details regarding the cable connecting refer to section 4 1 3 This connector is not present on a 5 module type backplane 2 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 1 Backplane and Expansion Cable Type of Backplane Number of Part module number 5 module type Basic system only FP2 BP05 Approx 7 module type Basic and expansion FP2 BP07 Approx system 9 module type y FP2 BP09 Approx 12 module type FP2 BP12 Approx 14 module type FP2 BP14 Approx 2 4 Phone 80
276. mputer installed with the programming tool soft ware and an FP PC cable 2 Optional memory FROM For FP2 FP2 EM4 SST 29EE010 120 4C PH or equivalent SILICOM STOR AGE TECHNOLOGY INC For FP2SH AFP5208 SST 29EE020 150 4C PH or equivalent SILICOM STORAGE TECHNOLOGY INC 3 Optional memory EPROM For FP2 FP2 EM5 M27C1001 12F1 or equivalent S S THOMSON MI CROELECTRONICS For FP2SH AFP5209 M27C2001 150F1 or equivalent SGS THOMSON MI CROELECTRONICS For the following use commercially available products 4 Commercially available ROM writer A ROM writer than can be used with memories 2 and ia Note 1 The above explanation describes the case where the memory unit is used in combination with the F ROM and EP ROM As the nonvolatile memory has been implemented in the memory unit Model number AFP2208 a commercial ROM writer can not be used for writing 2 The parts for the optional memory to be used differ depending on FP2 or FP2SH 1 21 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Overview FP2 FP2SH 1 4 Programming Tools When Creating ROM with Programming Tool Software and a Commercially Available ROM Writer Necessary tools Q Programming tool software section 1 4 1 Use a commercially available PC installed with the programming tool software 2 Optional memory EPROM For FP2 FP2 EM5 M27C1001 12F1 or equivalent S S
277. munication 1 N communication FP2 FP2SH Commercially available computer Commercially available RS232C cable AFB85813 AFB85853 or equivalent FP2 FP2SH Commercially available computer Commercially available RS232C cable AFB85813 AFB85853 or equivalent C NET adapter AFP8536 AFP8532 x 1 piece C NET adapter S2 type AFP15402 x number of PLC Two core cable VCTF 0 75mm2 1 16 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Overview 1 3 Expansion Function 1 3 2 Connection of MODEM 1 1 communication 1 N communication Connections to a MODEM can be Using the C NET adapter enables MODEMs to be made using the COM port connected for multiple programmable controller MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM Public line Public line A rnnr al V e aeli a Commercially available RS232C cable Commercially available R l C NET adapter AFP8536 AFP8532 FP2 FP2SH Two core cable RS485 VCTFO 75 x 20 N nnn A maximum of 32 stations can be connected The CPU of the FP2 FP2SH includes a COM RS232C port and TOOL RS232C port as standard equipment making it possible to connect a MODEM to perform pro gramming and computer linking from a remote location using a public telephone line When the power supply of FP2 FP2SH is turned on it will verify whether a MODEM is connected and ifa MODEM
278. n g l 4 75 10 2 26 4 Power supply for driving 89 6 105 8 131 internal circuit V Ambient temperature C F 2 51 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 10 Output Units Specifications Internal Circuit Diagram a oe ee a Output indicator 9 i LED 1k 5 to 24V DC AE LS ra Pin Layout Output YO to Y1F Output Y20 to Y3F Pin layout of first 32 points Pin layout of last 32 points Left side connector CN1 Right side connector CN2 S G o GGHHGGOO 5 to 24V DC 5 to 24V DC 10000000 Although and terminals are connected internally with the same connector It is rec ommended that they also be connected externally For more information regarding the applicable connectors and terminals refer to sec tion 4 4 1 2 52 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 10 Output Units Specifications 2 10 8 64 point Type Transistor PNP Output Unit Specifications fem SSSCSC diDeseriptionSSCSC SCSCS FP2 Y6aP Insulation method Optical coupler Rated load voltage 5 to 24V DC Load voltage range 4 75 to 26 4V DC Maximum load current 0 1A at 12 to 24V DC 50mA at 5V DC Note Maximum surge current 0 3A Off state leakage current 1A or less On state maximum voltage drop 1 5V or less at
279. n The protect switch is not in the write protected WP R9103 swiren tiag position Available PLC FP2SH ite barge he FP10SH off The protect switch is in the write protected WP position Monitors the condition of the IC memory card access enables IC memory card access switch as R9104 switch flag on access enabled The access enable switch is in the on Available PLC FP2SH position FP10SH off access disabled The access enable switch is in the off position R9105 to Not used R910F Note The IC memory card backup battery condition can be judged using special internal relays R9101 and R9102 as follows R9101 R9102 IC memory card condition OFF OFF Not battery charge replacement required ON OFF Charge replace backup battery The data in the IC memory card is maintained ON ON The data in the IC memory card cannot be maintained Charge replace backup battery Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 1 3 Special Data Registers for FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address oe Name Descriptions pears veut FP3 FP2SH ing ing FP10SH The self diagnostic error code is stored Self diagnostic here when a self diagnostic error occurs De eee DIBOAN error code Monitor the error code using decimal A we
280. n and transfer the data SRAM type Procedure On the Tool menu choose IC Card Service and then Erase IC Card to erase the entire field 7 6 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 7 2 Formatting and Erasing Using Different Sections of the Card as a Program Memory Field and Expanded Memory Field Any desired settings may be entered for the field to be formatted Of the entire field any part of the field not formatted program memory field is used to expand the memory field FROM type Procedure 1 On the Tool menu choose IC Card Service and then Erase IC Card to erase the entire field 2 On the Tool menu select IC Card Service and then Copy File to IC Card to specify the format size Then copy the program from a floppy disk or the hard disk to the IC memory card Boot the Data Editor 4 Inthe Edit IC Memory Card Data mode create a file or open an existing file 5 On the File menu select Download to PLC and transfer the data SRAM type Procedure On the Tool menu choose IC Card Service and then Format IC Card Specify the necessary segment as a program memory and format it 7 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH
281. n a 9 module type backplane Number of units and Current consumption at Current consumption at backplane used 5V DC mA 24V DC mA CPU FP2 C1 410 0 Backplane FP2 BP09 60 0 Input unit FP2 X16D2 60 x 3 180 8x 16X3 384 Output unit FP2 Y16R 120 x 4 480 160 x 4 640 Total current consumption 1 12 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Overview Table of current consumption at 5V DC 1 2 Unit Types and Combinations Part number Current con sumption at 5V DC mA FP2 CPU FP2 C1 410 or less FP2 C1D 530 or less FP2 C1SL 630 or less FP2 C1A 1060 or less FP2SH CPU FP2 CaL 750 or less FP2 C2 750 or less FP2 C2P 750 or less FP2 C3P 750 or less Backplane FP2 BP05 5 or less FP2 BP07 60 or less FP2 BP09 60 or less FP2 BP14 60 or less Backplane H type FP2 BP11MH 5 or less FP2 BP10EH 60 or less Input unit DC input 16 point terminal type 12 to 24V DC FP2 X16D2 60 or less Output Relay out 32 point connector type 24V DC 64 point connector type 24V DC 6 point terminal type FP2 X32D2 80 or less FP2 X64D2 100 or less FP2 Y6R 50 or less ls T6 point terminal type Transistor 16 point terminal NPN type FP2 Y16T 100 or less output 32 point connector NPN type FP2 Y32T 130 or less 64 point connector NPN type FP2 Y64T 210
282. n the voltage of the backup battery drops below a specific value ALARM red This lights if a hardware error occurs or if operation slows because of the program and the watchdog timer is activated Initialize Test Switch This switch clears errors initializes the operation memory and sets the test operation mode Switch position Operation mode INITIALIZE upward In the PROG mode The contents of the operation memory are initialized However the system register including the I O map and the program are not initialized If the error of self diag nostic error code 42 or lower is occured the special internal relays R9000 to R9008 and the special data register DT90000 are not cleared In the RUN mode Operation errors remote I O system errors and battery errors are cleared center The switch should normally be left in this position TEST Setting this switch to the downward position in the PROG mode accesses the test downward mode Switching to the RUN mode in this state initiates test operation To return from the test mode to the normal operation return this switch to the center position in the PROG mode i Note By turning on the initialize test switch while in the PROG mode you can be specify the type of operation memory to be cleared with system register 4 2 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2S
283. nal relay R9009 carry flag will turn on D is used to store the data of the previous execution F374 32 bit data DDTR S D If the data in the 32 bit area P374 revision PDDTR specified by S 1 S has changed detection since the previous execution internal relay R9009 carry flag o0ojlojolojo will turn on D 1 D is used to store the data of the previous execution Index register bank processing instructions F410 Setting the SETB n Index register 10 to ID bank P410 index register PSETB number change over x x l bank number F411 Changing the CHGB n Index register 10 to ID bank P411 index register PCHGB number change over with x x bank number remembering preceding bank number F412 Restoring the POPB Changes index register 10 to ID P412 index register PPOPB bank number back to the bank n bank number before F411 CHGB P411 f f PCHGB instruction File register bank processing instructions F414 Setting the file SBFL n File register bank number change P414 register bank PSBFL over x x 3 number F415 Changing the CBFL n File register bank number change P415 file register PCBFL over with remembering preceding x x 43 bank number bank number F416 Restoring the PBFL Changes file register bank P416 file register PPBFL number back to the bank before x 3 A bank number F415 CBFL P415 PCBFL f 3 instruction O Available X Not available A Not avail
284. nbe number number A1 XO B1 A2 X1 Correspondence table of 64 point type input unit When a 64 point type input unit is next to the standard type CPU on the right side Examples for the CN1 group Examples for the CN2 group Terminal Input Terminal Terminal number number ea aae number B1 Al X20 A2 4 28 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units Correspondence table of 32 point type output unit When a 32 point type output unit is next to the standard type CPU on the right side Terminal O Terminal O number number number number Al YO B1 Y8 A2 Y1 B2 Y9 Correspondence table of 64 point type output unit When a 64 point type output unit is next to the standard type CPU on the right side Examples for the CN1 group Examples for the CN2 group Terminal Output Terminal Output Terminal Output Terminal Output Al YO B1 Y A1 Y20 B1 A2 Y1 A2 4 29 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH
285. ned to avoid programs being accidentally overwritten If the password is forgotten however it will be impossible to overwrite the program even if you want to Also if a password is forcibly bypassed the program is deleted When specifying the password note it in the specifications manual or in another safe location in case it is forgotten at some point Saving programs to the ROM In order to prevent programs from being lost if the backup battery runs down and to prevent accidental overwriting of programs in the workplace we recommend saving programs entered in the RAM to the ROM If the PLC is used over a long period of time this concern applies particularly to programs that are built into the device when shipped Check the manuals for specifications and other items pertaining to usage FP series Programming Manual xi Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Table of Contents FP2 FP2SH Compatibility with CPU unit and Precautions Comparison of Specifications FP2 CPU FP2SH CPU FP10SH CPU FP2 C1 FP2 C1D FP2 C2L FP2 C2 AFP AFP FP2 C1A FP2 C1SL FP2 C2P FP2 C3P 6221V3 6211V3 Controllable I O points Basic construction Using Backplanes Max 768 points 12 modules Using Backplanes H type Max 512 points 8 modules Max 512 points Expanded construction Using Backplanes Max 1 600 points 25 modules Using Backplanes H
286. ner diode Fuse ratings None Common method Output points per common 32 points common Common specifi cations Internal current consumption at 5V DC 150mA or less Operating indicator 32 dot LED display lit when on switching External Connection method Connector two 40 pin Weight Approx 120g wr next page 2 58 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 11 1 O Mixed Units Specifications ia Notes Keep the number of input and output points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as de termined by the input voltage and ambient temperature Input Output 32 32 24V DC Number of points per com i mon which are simultaneous 18 18 pentane on PE E ee 26 4V DC 38 47 55 100 4 116 6 131 Ambient temperature C F The load current will vary depending on the power supply for driving the internal circuit Adjust the load current referring to the following range 100 50 475 102 264 Power supply for driving internal circuit V Max load current mA 2 59 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 11 I O Mixed Units Specifications Internal Circuit Diagram
287. net Email info ctiautomation net Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 3 Wiring Input and Output 4 3 Wiring Input and Output 4 3 1 Input Wiring Before the wiring carefully confirm the specifications for the units to be wired Specifi cally limitations on the ambient temperature and number of points that can be on simultaneously will differ for different units Connection of Sensors Relay output type NPN open collector output type a terminal Input terminal Sensor gt r COM DC Input Sensor DC Input unit 4 ovo com unit Internal Internal circuit circuit Power supply Power supply Power supply for input for sensor for input Voltage output type Two wire type Input terminal Input terminal Vec Sensor ia DC Input Sensor DC Input unit A COM unit Internal At GOM Internal circuit circuit Power supply for input Power supply for input PNP open collector output type Input terminal Sensor DC Input COM unit Internal circuit Power supply for input 4 18 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Installation and Wiring 4 3 Wiring Input and Output Connection of LED equipped Reed Switch With a LED is connected to an input contact such as LED equipped reed switch make sure that the voltage value appl
288. nfo ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 2 FP2 RAM Operation 6 2 FP2 RAM Operation 6 2 1 RAM Operation Method Verify that the operation condition switches DIP switches on the back of the FP2 CPU are set for RAM operation SW2 off FP2 CPU rear side Sn sw2 Program memory selector _ off RAM operation on ROM operation The CPU is set at the factory for RAM operation e O jo 6 2 2 Precautions When Operating the RAM The contents written to RAM are all saved by the backup battery Therefore it is impor tant to be aware of the life of the backup battery i Note Using programming tool software be sure to copy the program in RAM to the hard disk of the host computer or to a floppy disk 6 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 3 FP2 ROM Operation 6 3 FP2 ROM Operation 6 3 1 ROM Operation Method Preparation Turn off the power supply and remove the CPU from the backplane Install the expan sion memory unit FP2 EM3 FP2 EM6 or FP2 EM7 to the CPU Then install the ROM that writes the program to the expansion memory unit section 2 3 Procedure 1 Set the operation condition switches DIP switches on the back of the CPU for ROM operation SW2 on FP2 CPU rear side pa
289. ng the ROM amp RAM service function On the Tool menu select ROM amp RAM service of View Jl Optio i nal bal Fi 2 Executing the ROM lt RAM transfer function Select ROM lt RAM and click on the Execute but ton 9 7 17 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH 7 3 For Use as Program Memory 7 3 2 Reading the Program There are four methods of reading the program saved in the IC memory card Read the program on the IC memory card and directly transfer it into the internal RAM of the CPU at the same time that the power is turned on Use the programming tool to read the program of the IC memory card and directly trans fer it into the internal RAM of the CPU Use the Copy File from IC Card of the FPWIN GR and select one of the programs saved in the IC memory card and read it to the FPWIN GR memory of personal comput er Use the F14 PGRD instruction to read the program from the IC memory card and di rectly transfer it into the internal RAM of the CPU Method 1 Read the program on the IC memory card and directly transfer it into the internal RAM of the CPU at the same time that the power is turned on By just turning on the power of CPU the device automatically reads the program of the IC memory card and transfers the pr
290. nit Turns on when unit No 16 is in the RUN mode No 16 Turns off when unit No 16 is in the PROG mode Note When the system registers 46 KO PC link 0 for the link unit with a smaller slot No and PC link 1 for one with a larger slot No When the system registers 46 K1 PC link 1 for the link unit with a smaller slot No and PC link 0 for one with a larger slot No Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Address Name Description ic one cra Monitors whether the IC memory card is installed or not R9100 installation flag on IC memory card is installed Available PLC FP2SH j marge FP10SH off IC memory card is not installed IC memory card backup Monitors the voltage drop condition for the IC memory card R9101 battery flag 1 as Note Available PLC FP2SH on Data in the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed FP10SH off Data in the IC memory card can be maintained Monitors the voltage drop condition for the IC memory card as IC memory card backup FP2SH R9102 battery flag 2 on Battery charge or replacement is required Note Available PLC FP2SH off Battery charge or replacement is not required FP10SH FP10SH on Battery replacement is required off Battery replacement is not required Monitors the protective condition of the IC memory card as IC memory card protect eae a x o
291. ns Read ing Writ ing DT9160 DT90160 Link unit no W P link 1 Note Stores the unit No of link 1 DT9161 DT90161 Error flag W P link 1 Note Stores the error flag of link 1 DT9162 DT90162 Link unit no W P link 2 Note Stores the unit No of link 2 DT9163 DT90163 Error flag W P link 2 Note Stores the error flag of link 2 DT9164 DT90164 Link unit no WP link 3 Note Stores the unit No of link 3 DT9165 DT90165 Error flag WP link 3 Note Stores the error flag of link 3 DT90166 Link unit no W P link 4 Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Stores the unit No of link 4 DT90167 Error flag WP link 4 Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Stores the error flag of link 4 DT90168 Link unit no WP link 5 Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Stores the unit No of link 5 DT90169 Error flag W P link 5 Available PLC FP2SH FP10SH Stores the error flag of link 5 N A Note For MEWNET W system available PLC type FP2 FP2SH FP3 FP10SH For MEWNET P system available PLC type FP3 FP10SH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available
292. nsistor out put PNP type FP2 Y32P RTD input FP2 RTD Analog output FP2 DA4 Positioning 4 axis Multifunction Transistor FP2 PP41 Line driver FP2 PP42 Communication Block FP2 CB232 FP2 CB422 FP2 MCU MEWNET VE link FP2 VE FMU FP2 CAN M FNS FP2 FNS 1 2 High speed counter FP2 HSCT NPN FP2 HSCP PNP Positioning RTEX FP2 PN2AN 2 axis FP2 PN4AN 4 axis FP2 PN8AN 8 axis 64 point DC input FP2 X64D2 64 point transistor output NPN type FP2 Y64T 64 point transistor output PNP type FP2 Y64P 32 point input 32 point output NPN type FP2 XY64D2T 32 point input output NPN with on pulse catch input FP2 XY64D7T 32 point input 32 point output PNP type FP2 XY64D2P 32 point input output PNP with on pulse catch input FP2 XY64D7P Pulse I O FP2 PXYT NPN FP2 PXYP PNP Positioning 2 axis Interpolation Transistor FP2 PP2T Line driver FP2 PP2L Positioning 4 axis Interpolation Transistor FP2 PP4T Line driver FP2 PP4L Communication Block FP2 CB485 MEWNET VE2 link FP2 VE2 Communication Block ET LAN2 FP2 ET1 FP2 ET2 e ogogobeoy a hao at Communication Block Block Unit Types and Combinations Communication PROFIBUS DeviceNet CANopen AFPN AB6200 AFP
293. ntrol instruction such as MC or JP is used Check the settings of the I O allocation 8 2 5 lf a Communication Error Message Appears Procedure 1 Make sure the computer and PLC are properly connected Procedure 2 Check if the baud rate and data length settings of the PLC and the computer are the same Personal computer section setting 1 On the Option menu select Communication Settings 2 Select a baud rate 9600 or 19200 PLC section setting Use the SW1 of DIP switches operation condition switches to enter the setting for the PLC The SW1 off position is the system register setting Depending on the personal computer there are times when baud rate of 19 200bps or greater are not supported If problems occur set both the personal computer and PLC to 9 600bps If SW1 is on the baud rate for the FP2 FP2SH PLC is fixed to 9 600bps 8 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Self D iagnostic Function and Troubleshooting FP2 FP2SH 8 2 Troubleshooting 8 2 6 If a Protect Error Message Appears When Optional User ROM is Installed in the CPU The program of the internal RAM cannot be modified using the programming tool and a protect error occurs Operation 1 Turn off the power supply of the PLC remove the CPU and set the SW2 of DIP switches operation condition switches on CPU to the off internal RAM posi
294. o 240V AC FP2 PSA3 100 to 240V AC FP2 PSD2 24V DC Power supply voltage Voltage between terminals Within the specified range of each Section 2 9 for input output unit to 2 11 Ambient environment Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F Section 4 1 1 Ambient humidity 30 to 85 RH Operating condition No dust or corrosive gas Backup battery Battery for CPU Regular replacement Section 9 1 1 Battery for IC memory card 9 8 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 10 Specifications Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Specifications FP2 FP2SH 10 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Specifications 10 1 Specifications 10 1 Specifications General Specifications item Descriptions _ __ S Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F Storage temperature 20 to 70 C 4 to 158 F Ambient humidity 30 to 85 RH at 25 C non condensing Storage humidity 30 to 85 RH at 25 C non condensing Breakdown voltage 1 500V AC 1 minute between AC external terminal and frame ground terminal 500V AC 1 minute between DC external terminal and frame ground terminal Insulation resistance 100M or more measured with a 500V DC megger testing between external
295. o not dismantle or remodel the product It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not touch the terminal while turning on electricity It could lead to an electric shock Use the external devices to function the emergency stop and interlock circuit Connect the wires or connectors securely The loose connection could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Ground the protective earth PE terminal Class D grounding Failure to do so could lead to an electric shock Do not allow foreign matters such as liquid flammable materials metals to go into the inside of the product It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not undertake construction such as connection and disconnection while the power supply is on It could lead to an electric shock Copyright Trademarks This manual and its contents are copyrighted You may not copy this manual in whole or part without written consent of Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries All other company names and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners PLC_BATPE Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Table of Figures Table of Contents Before You Start La ot band Dots eeaaeeankcaek easement
296. ocess 0 is executing DT9072 DT90072 gt eP are gee cess Q A programming tool software can be DT9073 DT90073 a A used to write data Step ladder pro DT9074 DT90074 cess 224 to 239 Step ladder pro DT9075 DT90075 cess 240 to 255 Step ladder pro DT9076 DT90076 cess 256 to 271 Step ladder pro DT9077 DT90077 cess 272 to 287 Note Used by the system Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address ER Name Descriptions noar avrit FP3 FP2SH p ing ing FP10SH Step ladder pro DT9078 DT90078 cess 288 to 303 Step ladder pro DT9079 DT90079 cess 304 to 319 Step ladder pro DT9080 DT90080 cess 320 to 335 Step ladder pro DT9081 DT90081 cess 336 to 351 Step ladder pro DT9082 DT90082 cess 352 to 367 Step ladder pro DT9083 DT90083 cess 368 to 383 DT9084 DT90084 Step ladder pro Indicates the startup condition of the cess 384 to 399 step ladder process When the DT9085 pT90085 SteP adder pro process starts up the bit cess 400 to 415 _ corresponding to the process number Step ladder pro turns on 1 DT9086 DT90086 cess 416 to 431 Step ladder pro Monitor using binary display DT9087 DT90087 cess 432 to 447 DT9088 pT90088 Step ladder pro
297. ogram to the internal RAM of the CPU The target of automatic reading is the program named Autoexec spg Procedure 1 While the power is turned off set the DIP switches SW2 and SW4 on the back of the CPU to on and set the IC memory card access enable switch to on position f ereak 7 ERROR Oeae A Oatanm 7 Proa 2 Turn on the CPU 7 18 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 7 3 For Use as Program Memory Method 2 Use the programming tool to read the program of the IC memory card and directly transfer it into the internal RAM of the CPU With simple operation of the programming tool reads the program saved on the IC memory card and transfer it to the internal RAM of the CPU The target of automatic reading is the program named Autoexec spg Procedure 1 Booting the ROM amp RAM service function On the Tool menu select ROM amp RAM service The ROM amp RAM Service window opens ROM amp RAM Service UntitieZ Rol f 2 Executing the ROM gt RAM transfer function Select ROM RAM and click on the Execute but ton 7 19 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net IC Memory C
298. oints controlled but if using the FP2 backplane with the FP2 FP2SH only one expansion board can be used and a maximum of 1600 points controlled Different types of IC memory cards are used The only type of IC card that can be used with the Part number FP2 C2P and FP2 C3P FP2SH CPU is the IC memory card small PC card The IC memory card for the FP10SH cannot be used Software Compatibility With the FP2SH in comparison with the FP10SH there are no functions that cannot be used For other detailed specifications check the specifications comparison table on the previous page XV Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Table of Contents FP2 FP2SH Programming Tool Restrictions Restrictions on usable programming tools depending on the units Type of programming tool Type of unit Windows software FPWIN GR Ver 2 Used Note 1 FPWIN GR Ver 1 Used Note 1 Windows software FPWIN Pro Ver 6 Used Conforms to Note 2 IEC61131 3 FPWIN Pro Ver 5 Used Note 3 Handy programming AFP1113V2 Not used unit AFP1114V2 AFP1113 Not used AFP1114 AFP1111A Not used AFP1112A AFP1111 AFP1112 FP Memory Loader AFP8670 AFP8671 Note 1 FPWIN GR Ver 2 91 or later version is necessary to use the FP2SH CPU 32k type FPWIN GR Ver 2 40 or later version is necessary to use the multi communication unit FPWIN GR Ver 2 71 or later ve
299. olatile memory implemented memory unit Model number AFP2208 can be also used The FP2 ROM Part number AFP2204 and Part number AFP2205 cannot be used The backup battery types are different The backup battery for the FP2SH CPU is the Part number AFP8801 battery with a connector The Part number AFC8801 battery for the FP2 CPU cannot be used The calendar timer and comment memories have been installed in advance These have already been installed in the FP2SH CPU and no optional units are needed ROM operation functions in the FP2SH CPUs that support IC memory cards FP2 C2P and FP2 C3P have an internal FROM used as a program memory The internal FROM cannot be replaced Software Compatibility The FP2SH has a higher level of compatibility than the FP2 so there are no functions that cannot be used with the FP2SH Other factors such as the number of device points should be confirmed by checking the specifications comparison table on the previous page xiii Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Table of Contents FP2 FP2SH IC memory cards for the FP2SH The existing model number becomes the one to be discontinued because of the termination of manufacturing IC memory cards by the parts manufacturer When placing a new order specify the new product number Termination of Production Type Memory capacity Model No Battery type
300. old type memory is backed up by the backup battery eS Note If the internal relays and data registers are set to be non hold type then they will not be saved Battery less operation During ROM operation if it is not necessary to retain the internal relays and data regis ters then you can set them all to non hold type and perform operation without a backup battery 6 1 1 3 Setting the Battery Error Warnings Under normal conditions if an error occurs with the backup battery the BATT and ER ROR LEDs on the front of the CPU are on for battery error warning With ROM operation that does not require the backup battery for operation memory it is possible to set it so that this warning is not given With this setting the BATT and ERROR LEDs do not light Method The programming tool software is required in order for this setting to be effective Procedure 1 On the Option menu select PLC Configuration 2 Select Initial Switch tab SS fete om Erts Tim Link O irki Teal Port Goce Port Fermata VC Berry Mikesh iisi Gi j idn ia A Pi Girts M mbna e Coma iy iraha Evair pene E iera RayMi E DaanlepiDT F Fi Rega 1 ime E br Rali Fe Li Apie LO ha Rel Hre E Tear CY EW p Leste edge diesis dang HT had the pesia onda E Ciad d eke nii cies e ee 3 Check Alarm battery error off 6 4 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email i
301. on Description Part number points method DC input 16 points Terminal block 12 to 24V DC sink source input FP2 X16D2 type 32 points Connector 24V DC sink source input FP2 X32D2 64 points Connector 24V DC sink source input FP2 X64D2 Table of Output Unit Types Type Number of Connection Description Part number points method Relay output 6 points Terminal block 5A Without relay sockets FP2 Y6R type 16 points Terminal block 2A Without relay sockets FP2 Y16R Transistor 16 points Terminal block 5 to 24V DC 0 5A FP2 Y16T 32 points Connector 5 to 24V DC 0 1A FP2 Y32T NPN open collector output type 64 points Connector 5 to 24V DC 0 1A FP2 Y64T Transistor 16 points Terminal block 5 to 24V DC 0 5A FP2 Y16P PNP open collector 32 points Connector 5 to 24V DC 0 1A FP2 Y32P output type 64 points Connector 5 to 24V DC 0 1A FP2 Y64P IES Note The maximum load current for the transistor output type output unit will differ depending on the operating voltage Refer to the specifications pages for each unit 2 31 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 8 Input and Output Units Table of I O Mixed Unit Types Type Number of Connection Description Part number points method DC input transistor NPN 32 input Connector 24V DC sink source input FP2 XY64D2T open
302. on net Steps FPO FP e FPOR FP FP X FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Name Boolean Symbol Description End ED The operation of program is ended re ee ee ee ee ED gt i 1 10o0oilioiliololo Indicates the end of a main program Conditional CNDE The operation of program is ended when aalala fn LY on H 1 OoO o a olalio end the trigger turns on Eject EJECT Adds page break for use when printing 1 xlololololc 4 EJECT S D 1S UU D D Step ladder instructions subroutine The output in the 2 subroutine is maintained When the trigger is off Not execute the 3 O O O 0 0 C Start step SSTP ay The start of program n for process 3 alela ley lea lie control ee ee ee ee Next step NSTL Starts the specified process n and i tn clears the process currently started 3 QO O O0 0 0 0 Scan execution type NSTP Starts the specified process n and m ase Clears the process currently started 3 10 0lolojo Pulse execution type Clear step CSTP Ly csr w Resets the specified process n 3 lolololololo Clear multi SCLR a Resets multiple processes specified by Pe ene ee ee Harn n angi mi 5 210 0 0010 010 ple steps n1 and n2 1 Step end STPE pe End of step ladder area 1lolololololo Subroutine instructions Subroutine CALL When the trigger is on Executes the call H Hoarn subroutine 2 i HorHicr s 2
303. ontinued or stopped using programming tool software NPST GR FPWIN GR PLC Configuration System register Setting Menu of FPWIN GR Software 1 On the Option menu select PLC Configuration 2 Inthe PLC Configuration Screen select Action on Er ror tab arames Item Description DUPLICATE OUTPUT DISE ENAB 1 O UNIT ERROR STOP CONT INTELLIGENT UNIT ERROR STOP CONT 1 O VERIFY ERROR STOP CONT UNUSED UNUSED OPERATION ERROR STOP CONT REMOTE I O SLAVE LINK ERROR STOP CONT I O ERROR IN REMOTE I O SLAVE STOP CONT UNUSED BATTERY ERROR INDICATION ENAB DISA INDEX MODIFIER CHECK ENAB DISA Allowing duplicated output When you set the system register 20 to ENAB duplicated output is not regarded as an error and the PLC continues to operate Continuing after an operation error When you set the system register 26 to CONT even if the PLC continues to operate this is regarded as an error This applies to system registers 21 through 28 as well 8 4 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Self Diagnostic Function and Troubleshooting 8 2 Troubleshooting 8 2 Troubleshooting 8 2 1 If the ERROR LED Lights Condition The self diagnostic error occurs Procedure 1 Replace the backup battery of the CPU when the BATT LED is on section 9 1 1 Procedure 2 Check the error code using the prog
304. or less 16 point terminal PNP type FP2 Y16P 80 or less 32 point connector PNP type FP2 Y32P 130 or less 64 point connector PNP type FP2 Y64P 210 or less 1 0 mixed 32 point 24V DC input 32 point connector NPN output type FP2 XY64D2T FP2 XY64D7T 160 or less unit 32 point 24V DC input 32 point connector PNP output type FP2 XY64D2P FP2 XY64D7P 160 or less Intelligent Analog input unit Voltage current type FP2 AD8VI 400 or less unit Analog input unit Channel type FP2 AD8X 300 or less RTD input unit FP2 RTD 300 or less Analog output unit FP2 DA4 600 or less High speed NPN FP2 HSCT 450 or less counter unit Pulse I O NPN unit PNP Positioning 2 axis type unit 4 axis type 2 axis type 4 axis type 2 axis type 4 axis type 8 axis type 2 axis type 4 axis type Serial data unit Multi communication unit with Communication block 1 unit or 2 unit FP2 HSCP FP2 PXYT FP2 PXYP FP2 PP2 FP2 PP4 FP2 PP21 FP2 PP22 FP2 PP4 FP2 PP42 FP2 PN2AN FP2 PN4AN FP2 PN8AN FP2 PP2T FP2 PP2L FP2 PP4T FP2 PP4L FP2 SDU FP2 MCU 500 or less 500 or less 225 or less 400 or less 200 or less 200 or less 350 or less 350 or less 300 or less 300 or less 300 or less 300 or less 300 or less 300 or less 300 or less 60 or less 480 or less Positioning unit Multi function type Transistor output type Line driver output type Transistor output type Line driver output type Positioning un
305. ory FROM from the expansion memory unit and install it in the ROM writer 2 Copy the contents of the optional memory FROM to the ROM writer FROM 3 Remove the optional memory FROM and install the op tional memory EPROM and write the data to the EPROM EPROM 6 12 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 5 FP2SH Operation 6 5 FP2SH Operation 6 5 1 Comparison of RAM ROM and IC Memory Card Operation With the FP2SH the user can select RAM operation ROM operation or IC memory card operation as the method by which programs are to be executed RAM operation Programs written to the RAM in the CPU unit are executed ROM operation With the FP2 C2L or FP2 C2 programs written to the ROM in the expansion memory unit are sent once to the RAM and executed With the FP2 C2P or FP2 C3P programs written to the internal FROM are sent once to the RAM and executed IC memory card operation FP2 C2P and FP2 C3P are supported Programs written to the IC memory card are sent to the RAM and executed Items re quired for operation RAM operation SW2 off SW4 None in particular because the RAM provided as standard in the CPU is used ROM operation SW2 on SW4 off With the FP2 C2L and FP2 C2 an optional memory unit and ROM The FP2 C2P and FP2 C3P
306. ossibility of incorrect operation from syntax errors in the program When a syntax check error is detected ERROR turns on or flashes Operation will not begin even after switching to the RUN mode Remote operation cannot be used to change to RUN mode Clearing a syntax check error By changing to the PROG mode the error will clear and the ERROR will turn off Steps to take for syntax error Change to the PROG mode and then execute the total check function while online mode with the programming tool connected This will call up the content of error and the address where the error occurred Correct the program while referring to the content of error Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Self diagnostic Error This error occurs when the control unit CPU unit self diagnostic function detects the occurrence of an abnormality in the system The self diagnostic function monitors the memory abnormal detection I O abnormal detection and other devices When a self diagnostic error occurs The ERROR turns on or flashes The operation of the control unit CPU unit might stop depending on the content of error and the system register setting The error codes will be stored in the special data register DT9000 DT90000 In the case of operation error the error address will be stored in the DT9017 DT90017 and DT9018 DT90018 Clearing the self diagnostic error At
307. paisi os ron a rhe I bic Camia hi RS a o D A a Armia Dir I F Fie Fierkel Aa siha Siora ait MOTE Cece ee maiba ere reared Taisi ots a a hio io ha T aa be tee Li aa 2 Click Initialize button PLC Configuration Select PLC Configuration I O Unit Remote I O and Click OK button The content of system registers and I O allocations will be cleared 3 17 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 0 All ocation FP2 FP2SH 3 6 3 6 1 0 Numbers of Free Slots I O Numbers of Free Slots 3 6 1 1 O Numbers of Free Slots I O numbers are also assigned to modules slots where no units are installed Program ming and system construction can be made more efficient by using an appropriate manner of assigning I O numbers 3 6 2 Differences Due to Allocation Methods The manner of assigning I O numbers differs depending on the I O allocation method 3 6 2 1 When Arbitrary Allocation is Used I O point numbers can assigned as desired Advantage When designing a system with the intention of adding units in the future you can use arbitrary allocation to assign ahead of time the I O point numbers of the units to be add ed If no assignment is made 0 is assigned By using I O number assignments that take into account future expansion when creat ing the program no discrepancies will occur when the new units ar
308. pe DC input FP2 X64D2 64X 1 Output unit 16 point type relay output FP2 Y16R 16Y 1 6 point type relay output FP2 Y6R 16Y 1 16 point type transistor NPN FP2 Y16T 16Y 1 output 16 point type transistor PNP FP2 Y16P 16Y 1 output 32 point type transistor NPN FP2 Y32T output 32 point type transistor PNP FP2 Y32P 32Y 1 output 64 point type transistor NPN FP2 Y64T 64Y 1 output 64 point type transistor PNP FP2 Y64P 64Y 1 output I O mixed unit 32 point type DC input 32 point FP2 XY64D2T 32X 32Y 1 type transistor NPN output FP2 XY64D7T 32 point type DC input 32 point FP2 xXY64D2P 32X 32Y 1 type transistor PNP output FP2 XY64D7P w next page Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 5 I O Allocation FP2 FP2SH 3 1 Fundamentals of I O Allocation Nac ees Part number Occupied Number of I O point occupied slot Intelligent Analog input unit FP2 AD8VI FP2 AD8X FP2 RTD 128SX i Analog output unit FP2 DA4 64SY High speed counter unit FP2 HSCT 32SX 32SY FP2 HSCP Pulse I O unit FP2 PXYT 32SX 32SY FP2 PXYP Positioning unit 2 axis type FP2 PP2 32SX 32SY Positioning unit 4 axis type FP2 PP4 64SX 64SY Positioning unit Multifunction Transistor output type FP2 PP21 32SX 32SY typo 2 aXiEitype Line driver output
309. ption S amp d a m g BCD arithmetic instructions F40 4 digit BCD B S D D S D 5 lolololololo P40 data addition PB F41 8 digit BCD DB S D D 1 D S 1 S gt D 1 D 7 lolololololo P41 data addition PDB fo fp F42 4 digit BCD B 1 S2 D S1 S2 D 7 lolololololo P42 data addition PB F43 8 digit BCD DB 1 S2 D S1 1 S 1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D mialo es ae ay P43 data addition PDB F45 4 digit BCD data B S D D S gt D Tolol ola lalo P45 subtraction PB F46 8 digit BCD data DB S D D 1 D S 1 S gt D 1 D 7 a coe eo A P46 subtraction PDB fp a F47 4 digit BCD data B 1 S2 D S1 S2 gt D 7 lolololololo P47 subtraction PB ee ee ee ee F48 8 digit BCD data DB S1 S2 D S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D 1 lolololololc P48 subtraction PDB a ieee O F50 4 digit BCD data B S1 S2 D S1 X S2 gt D 1 D 7 lolalololole P50 multiplication PB 7 F51 8 digit BCD data DB 1 S2 D S1 1 S1 X S2 1 S2 gt D 3 D 2 1 lolololololc P51 multiplication PDB D 1 D ee ee ee A F52 4 digit BCD data B S1 S2 D S1 S2 gt quotient D 7 lolololololo P52 division PB remainder DT9015 F53 8 digit BCD data DB 1 S2 D S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt quotient P53 division PDB D 1 D 11 O 0 0 0 0 0 remainder DT9016 DT9015 F55 4 digit BCD data B 1 D D 1 D 3 lolololololo P55 increment PB 1 3 F56 8 digit BCD data DB 1 D D 1 D 1 gt D 1 D 3
310. put voltage and ambient temperature Input Outp 32 32 24V DC Number of points per com mon which are simultaneous 18 18 on 22 22 26 4V DC 38 47 55 100 4 116 6 131 Ambient temperature C F The load current will vary depending on the power supply for driving the internal circuit Adjust the load current referring to the following range 100 50 Max load current mA 475 102 264 Power supply for driving internal circuit V 2 65 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 11 1 O Mixed Units Specifications Internal Circuit Diagram Input Input indicator LED AA Input O O 5 6kQ 5602 siy 24V DC Internal circuit B N 5 to 24V DC Internal circuit Pin Layout Input XO to X1F Pin layout of first 32 points Left side connector 24V DC ie 5 i The COM pins of each connector are connected internally Output Y20 to Y3F Pin layout of last 32 points Right side connector 5 to 24V DC Although and terminals are connected internally with the same connector It is recommended that they also be connected externally 2 66 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 F
311. r Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net I Oo ojal Num Name Boolean PS Description Sle s ea A a E ber rand wle llela lels i a o ra F286 Upper and DLIMT S1 S2 When S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 S1 1 P286 lower limit PDLIMT S3 D 1 gt D 1 D control When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 S2 1 6 1 lolololol 32 bit data 2 D 1 D Akad aala ia When S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 lt or S2 1 S2 S3 1 S3 gt D 1 D F287 Deadband BAND S1 S2 When S1 gt S3 S3 S1 gt D f P287 control PBAND S3 D When S2 lt S3 S3 S2D 10 4 9 OQ 0 0 0 16 bit data When S1 lt or S3 lt or S2 0D F288 Deadband DBAND S1 S2 When S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 S3 1 P288 control PDBAND S3 D 3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D 32 bit data When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 S3 1 1e 2lololololc S 3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D a ee a aa aaa When S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 lt or 2 1 2 0 gt D 1 D F289 Zone control ZONE S1 S2 When S3 lt 0 S3 S1 gt D i P289 16 bit data PZONE S3 D When S3 0 0 gt D 10 4 O O 0 0 0 When S3 gt 0 S3 S2D F290 Zone control DZONE S1 S2 When S3 1 S3 lt 0 S3 1 P290 32 bit data PDZONE S3 D 3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D When 3 1 3 0 0 gt D 1 D w e lololololi When S3 1 S3 gt 0 S3 1 K 3 S2 1 2 D 1 D BCD type real number operation instructions
312. r MEWNET W system available PLC type FP2 FP2SH FP3 FP10SH For MEWNET P system available PLC type FP3 FP10SH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address APAI Name Descriptions aod vealiesdlls FP3 FP2SH ing ing FP10SH Operation An Operation error program block number error program is stored higher byte here when an No hold operation error is detected pre Available Program block number PLC FP2SH H1 In the first program block FP10SH H2 In the 2nd program block Operation The program block number for the latest error program operation error is stored here each time No non hold an operation error is detected D190258 Available Program block number PLC FP2SH H1 In the first program block FP10SH H2 In the 2nd program block Break occurrence The program block number where the program BRK instruction occurred is stored here DT90259 number Program block number Available H1 In the first program block PLC FP2SH H2 In the 2nd program block FP10SH Type of IC memory card is monitored here as H5 Flash EEPROM type IC memory card Hanne d H6 SRAM type IC memory card A NA H506 For FP10SH flash i DT90260 available EEPROM SRAM mixed type IC memory PLC FP2SH Sata PRIOSH H6 No archival information is stored H6 No data is wri
313. r less for XO to X1B 1 0 to 5 0ms X1C to X1F Common method Input points per common 32 points common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal Output specifica tions Insulation method Rated load voltage Optical coupler 5 to 24V DC Load voltage range 4 75 to 26 4V DC Maximum load current Maximum surge current 0 1A at 12 to 24V DC 50mA at 5V DC Note 0 3A Off state leakage current 1uA or less On state maximum voltage drop 1V or less at 6 to 26 4V DC 0 5V or less at 6V DC or less Response time off on 0 1ms or less on gt off 0 3ms or less Power supply for Voltage 4 75 to 26 4V DC driving internal circuit Current 120mA or less at 24V DC Surge absorber Zener diode Fuse ratings None Common method Output points per common 32 points common Common specifi cations Internal current consumption at 5V DC 150mA or less Operating indicator 32 dot LED display lit when on switching External connection method Connector two 40 pin Weight Approx 120g Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 61 Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 11 1 O Mixed Units Specifications Notes e With a periodical interrupt function 1 ms it is possible to rea
314. r memory as its contents are damaged and use it again When the ERROR does not turn off please tact dealer E26 Ron s Stops eave eee a alalalalalala error FP1 C24 C40 C56 C72 and FP M Probably an abnormality in the memory unit gt Program the memory unit again and try to operate If the same error is detected try to operate with another memory unit FP2 FP2SH FP10SH and FP3 There may be a problem with the installed ROM ROM is not installed ROM contents are damaged Program size stored on the ROM is larger than the capacity of the ROM gt Check the contents of the ROM Unit Units installed exceed the limitations i e 4 or E27 installation Stops Me link units alalalalala error Turn off the power and re configure units referring to the hardware manual System Probably an abnormality in the system register E28 register Stops Check the system register setting or i error TODE j initialize the system registers 1 This error occurs on FP X Ver2 0 or later A Available Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Error opera x Name tion Description and steps to take rion code status o S A gt lt N g 2 aojajajajajajajsa wile jeljesoe joey fe Configu ration A parameter error was detected in the E29 Stops MEWNET W2 configuration area Set a AJA parameter correct parameter error
315. ramming tool Using programming tool software FPWIN GR In the ONLINE mode select Status Display on the Online menu At the bottom of the STATUS DISPLAY window you can find the error code SLF DIAGN ERR CD 45 OPERATION ERROR Error code Comments Procedure 3 Error code is 1 to9 Condition There is a syntax error in the program Operation 1 Change to PROG mode and clear the error Operation 2 Execute a total check function using programming tool software FPWIN GR to deter mine the location of the syntax error mw next page 8 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Self Diagnostic Function and Troubleshooting FP2 FP2SH 8 2 Troubleshooting Error code is 20 or higher Condition A self diagnostic error other than a syntax error has occurred Operation Use the programming tool in PROG mode to clear the error Using programming tool software FPWIN GR Click Clear Error button in the Status Display menu described on the previous page Error code 43 and higher can be cleared In the PROG mode the power supply can be turned off and then on again to clear the error but all of the contents of the operation memory except hold type data are cleared An error can also be cleared by executing a self diagnostic error set instruction F148 ERR P148 PERR When an operation error error code 45 occurs the a
316. ration instructions F65 16 bit data WAN S1 S2 D S1 AND S2 D 7lolololololc P65 AND PWAN E J F66 16 bit data WOR S1 S2 D S1 OR S2 gt D 7 olololololo P66 OR PWOR 7 F67 16 bit data XOR 1 S2 D TO TEn pez exclusive PXOR S1 AND S2 OR 1 AND S2 gt D 1 ololololo o OR F68 16 bit data XNR S1 S2 D Teal TEDN P68 exclusive PXNR SAND S2 OR S1 AND 2 7 gt D 71 O0 0 0 0 0 C NOR F69 16 bit data WUNI S1 S2 S1 AND S3 OR S2 AND 53 gt D P69 unite PWUNI S3 D When S3 is HO S2 gt D a9 lxlolololole When S3 is HFFFF S1 D Data conversion instructions F70 Block check BCC S1 S2 Creates the code for checking the data P70 code PBCC 3 D specified by S2 and S3 and stores it in calculation D 9 lolololololo The calculation method is specified by ST F71 Hexadecima HEXA S1 S2 D Converts the hexadecimal data specified P71 I data gt PHEXA by S1 and S2 to ASCII code and stores ASCII code it in D 7 O O 0 0 0 0 Example HABCD gt H 42 41 44 43 BADC F72 ASCII code AHEX S1 S2 D Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 P72 Hexadeci PAHEX and S2 to hexadecimal data and stores mal data it in D 7 QO O0 0 0 0 C Example H 44 43 42 41 gt HCDAB DCBA F73 4 digit BCD BCDA 1 S2 D Converts the four digits of BCD data P73 data gt PBCDA specified by S1 and S2 to ASCII code ASCII code and stores i
317. rced I O function to check the output wiring Check input wiring Check the input wiring by using the input display LEDs or the monitor ing function of the programming tool Trial operation 1 Switch the mode selector from PROG to RUN mode check the RUN LED turns on 2 Check the operation of the program Edit the program debug if necessary 1 If there is an error in the operation check the program using the moni toring function of the programming tool 2 Correct the program Save the edited program We highly recommend to save the created program onto a floppy disk or hard disk Printing out is also possible The program can also be saved on the ROM 5 4 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Procedure Until Operation 5 2 Programming with Programming Tool Software 5 2 Programming with Programming Tool Software 5 2 1 Preparations FP2 FP2SH Setting the baud rate of CPU The baud rate setting switch is on the rear side of the CPU Perform the setting with the CPU removed from the backplane CPU rear side ali off 19200 bps on 9600 bps e o fo Set the baud rate of the computer to match that of the CPU Connecting the FP2 FP2SH to the computer Connect using the FP PC cable
318. rd I d Product name Product number AIC50020 Pa fore ie Dummy unit AFP2300 11 module type Basic Battery Lithium battery button AFC8801 FP2 BP11MH AFP25011MH Lithium battery AFP8801 aes i Battery for AFP2209 AFP2806 s i i L Terminal block for eh O unit AFP2800 SRAM type IC SRAM type IC ee Set of connector for wire pressed AFP2801 memory card memory card 10 module type Expansion terminal cable 2 pieces AIC52000 AFP2209 FP2 BP10EH AFP25010EH Set of flat cable connector 2 pieces AFP2802 Pa 1 8 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Overview Input Output and I O mixed units 16 point DC input FP2 X16D2 16 point transistor output NPN type FP2 Y16T 16 point transistor output PNP type FP2 Y16P 6 point relay output type FP2 Y6R 16 point relay output type FP2 Y16R E E Analog input FP2 AD8VI Analog output FP2 AD8X Positioning 2 axis FP2 PP2 Positioning 4 axis FP2 PP4 C C U FP2 CCU Serial data FP2 SDU fS amp Multi wire link FP2 MW FP2 RM FMU FMU Positioning 2 axis Multifunction Transistor FP2 PP21 Line driver FP2 PP22 FP2 DPV1 M FP2 DEV M 32 point DC input FP2 X32D2 32 point transistor out put NPN type FP2 Y32T 32 point tra
319. rd units Read data area RD Reads the contents of a data area Write data area WD Writes data to a data area Read timer counter set value area RS Reads the value set for a timer counter Write timer counter set value area WS Writes a timer counter setting value Read timer counter elapsed value area RK Reads the timer counter elapsed value Write timer counter elapsed value area WK Writes the timer counter elapsed value Register or Reset contacts monitored MC Registers the contact to be monitored Register or Reset data monitored MD Registers the data to be monitored oer Monitors a registered contact or data using the Monitoring start MG code MC or MD Preset contact area fill command sc Embeds the area of a specified range in a 16 point on and off pattern Preset data area fill command SD Writes the same contents to the data area of a specified range Read system register RR Reads the contents of a system register Write system register WR Specifies the contents of a system register Read the status of PLC RT Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs Rainote contrel RM Switches the operation mode of the programmable controller Abort AB Aborts communication Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 6 Hexadecimal Binary BCD 7 A BCD data Decimal Hexadecimal Binary data Binary Coded D
320. reated with the FPWIN GR directly to the IC memory card This can only be done with SRAM types Write programs in the RAM of the CPU to the IC memory card This can only be done with SRAM types When writing programs to the FROM type of card the program should be saved to a disk before using the Copy File to IC Card function of the FPWIN GR to write the program to the IC memory card 7 13 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH 7 3 For Use as Program Memory Method 1 Use the Copy File to IC Card function in the FPWIN GR directly write the program that is saved on the disk to the IC memory card For all types of IC memory card Procedure For FROM types See section 7 2 2 Procedure for Formatting the IC Memory Card For SRAM types 1 Boot the Copy File to IC Card function On the Tool menu select IC Card Service and then Select File Copy File gt iC Card SRAM next page 7 14 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 7 3 For Use as Program Memory 2 Selecting the file to be copied Select the file to be copied to the IC memory card and click on OK Writing of the file to the IC memory card begins and the List of File Copy Results is displayed Method 2 D
321. red Monitor using decimal display Work 1 for The number of data that match the F96 SRC searched data is stored here when F96 Binet DT90037 P96 PSRC SRC P96 PSRC instruction is instructions executed A A Work 2 for The position of the first matching data F96 SRC counting from the starting 16 bit area is Dig028 Pranese P96 PSRC stored here when an F96 SRC P96 instructions PSRC instruction is executed a a PERA The error code is stored here if F145 ahd SEND P145 PSEND or F146 RECV DT9039 DT90039 F146 RECV ee nstruction was executed A N A P146 PRECV E When the instruction was successfully instructions end HAR cod executed 0 is stored Note Used by the system Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address Ere Name Descriptions ids alleen FP3 FP2SH P ing ing FP10SH Hour and minute data of the Real Time Clock Clock Calendar are stored here i This data is read only data It cannot be e ee overwritten ock Calendar DT9053 DT90053 Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits A N A monitor hour minute Hour data Minute data H00 to H23 BCD H0O to H59 BCD Real Time Clock The year month day hour minute Clock Calendar second and day of the week data for the calendar timer is stored The b
322. rent 10mA or less Min on voltage Min on current 9 6V 4mA Max off voltage Max off current 2 5V 1MA Response time off on 0 2ms or less on gt off 0 2ms or less Internal current consumption at 5V DC 60mA or less Common method Input points per common 8 points common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal Operating indicator 16 dot LED display lit when on External connection method Terminal block M 3 screw Weight Approx 140g Internal Circuit Diagram LED aa 12to 24VDC Sasanean 2 33 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 9 Input Units Specifications Pin Layout Input XO to XF 12 to 24V DC For more information regarding the applicable pressure connection crimp terminals and wiring refer to section 4 5 1 2 34 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 9 Input Units Specifications 2 9 2 32 point Type DC Input Unit Specifications Item Description Cid Part number FP2 X32D2 Insulation method Optical coupler Rated input voltage 24V DC Rated input current Approx 4 3mA at 24V DC Input impedance Approx 5 6kQ Input voltage range 20 4 to 26 4V DC Min on voltage Min
323. rocessing test run and constant scan Memory backup time lithium battery storage time CPU only Min 3 500 hours or more typical approx 31 000 hours When installing memory unit AFP2207 or Min 3 500 hours AFP2208 typical approx 31 000 hours Memory backup time for IC memory card at 25 C ia Notes AIC52000 Rechargeable type 3 months or more After full charge AFP2209 Interchangeable type 3 years or more 1 The practical usable external input and output points are re stricted according to the number of the input and output units 2 Hold or non hold type can be set using the system registers 3 Can also be used as internal relays 4 Can also be used as data registers 5 Precision of calendar timer At 0 C 32 F less than 57 second error per month At 25 C 77 F less than 88 second error per month At 55 C 131 F less than 88 second error per month 6 For FP2 C2L and FP2 C2 the memory unit is required Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 9 Specifications FP2 FP2SH 10 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants 10 2 Relays Memory Areas and Constants External input relay Turn on or off based on external input Numbering FP2 2 048 points X0 to X127F 8 192 points X0 to X511F External output relay Externally outputs on or off state 2 048 points YO to Y127F
324. rom the rear 3 Holding the positive pole of the battery upwards press the new battery into the battery holder underneath the terminal 9 4 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Maintenance 9 1 Replacement of Spare Parts Procedure for FP2SH 1 Lift up the lead wire Make sure the lead wire next to the connector insertion area which is also the battery holder is lifted out of the hole that secures it in place 2 Lift up the battery 3 Pull the connector straight off so the terminals do not bend 4 Install the new battery by reversing the above proce dure Make sure the connector terminals are positioned in the correct directions 9 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Maintenance FP2 FP2SH 9 1 Replacement of Spare Parts Procedure for AFP2209 Preparation Backup the data saved in the IC memory card Note The saved data is overwritten when replacing the battery 1 Move to the lock switch to the RELEASE position to ward the battery holder RELEASE position Look switch 2 Remove the battery holder 3 Place the battery in the battery holder with the side with a sign facing up 1 sign S 4 Insert the battery holder with the battery all the way seated in the IC memory card The lock sw
325. rs to be used depend on each PLC 1 Allocation of user memory System registers 0 1 and 2 These registers set the size of the program area and file register area allowing the user memory area to be configured for the environment used The size of the memory area will vary depending on the type 2 Allocation of timers and counters System register 5 The number of timers and counters is set by specifying the starting counter number 3 Hold non hold type setting System registers 6 to 18 When these registers are set to hold type the values in the relays and data memory will be retained even if the system is switched to PROG mode or the power is turned off If set to non hold type the values will be cleared to 0 4 Operation mode setting on error System registers 4 20 to 28 Set the operation mode when errors such as battery error duplicated use of output I O verification error and operation error occur 5 Time settings System registers 29 to 34 Set time out error detection time and the constant scan time 6 Remote I O operation settings System registers 25 35 and 36 These registers are used to select whether or not to wait for a slave station connection when the remote I O is started and the remote I O update timing 7 MEWNET W PLC link settings System registers 40 to 47 50 to 55 and 57 These settings are for using link relays and link registers for MEWNET W PC PLC link communication Note
326. rsion is necessary to use the MEWNET VE Link Unit The FNS Unit and FMU Unit cannot use to FPWIN GR Note 2 FPWIN Pro Ver 6 3 or later version is necessary to use the FP2SH CPU 32k type Note 3 FPWIN Pro Ver 5 02 or later version is necessary to use the multi communication unit FPWIN Pro Ver 5 24 or later version is necessary to use the MEWNET VE Link Unit FPWIN Pro Ver 5 24 or later version is necessary to use the FNS Unit FPWIN Pro Ver 5 3 or later version is necessary to use the FMU Unit Note 4 FP Memory Loader Ver 2 1 or later version is necessary to use the FP2SH CPU 32k type When using FP2SH CPU 120k type only the 1st program and comments can be transferred Note Precautions concerning version upgrade e In case of using FPWIN GR Ver 1 please purchase upgrade model FPWIN GR Ver 2 e FPWIN GR Ver 2 0 can be upgraded to Ver 2 1 or later free of charge at our web site e FPWIN Pro Ver 6 0 can be upgraded to Ver 6 1 or later free of charge at our web site xvi Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Overview Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Overview FP2 FP2SH 1 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Overview 1 1 System Configuration 1 1 System Configuration 1 1 1 Basic
327. s common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal Output specifica tions Insulation method Optical coupler Rated load voltage 5 to 24V DC Load voltage range 4 75 to 26 4V DC Maximum load current 0 1A at 12 to 24V DC 50mA at 5V DC Note Maximum surge current 0 3A Off state leakage current 1uA or less On state maximum voltage drop 1V or less at 6 to 26 4V DC 0 5V or less at 6V DC or less Response time off on 0 1ms or less on off 0 3ms or less Power supply for Voltage 4 75 to 26 4V DC driving internal circuit Current 120mA or less at 24V DC Surge absorber Zener diode Fuse ratings None Common method Output points per common 32 points common Common specifi cations Internal current consumption at 5V DC 150mA or less Operating indicator 32 dot LED display lit when on switching External connection method Connector two 40 pin Weight Approx 120g 2 55 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 11 1 0 Mixed Units Specifications Notes Keep the number of input and output points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as de termined by the input voltage and ambient tempera
328. s given above When using the machine language program area A Area for machine language program B Area for machine language program 2 4 096 words 18 36 864 words 4 8 192 words 20 40 960 words 6 12 288 words 22 45 056 words 8 16 384 words 24 49 152 words 10 20 480 words 26 53 248 words 12 24 576 words 28 57 344 words 14 28 672 words 30 61 440 words 16 32 768 words For example for the FP2 16K step type when the area for the sequence program A is set to 10K words and the area for configuration C is set to OK words the area for the machine language program can be set up to 6K words Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Setting the number of timers and counter system register 5 Timers and counters share the same area If the method of dividing the area is changed the number of timers and counters will also change Total point Default value of z Type 4 Timer Counter numbers system register 5 1000 points 24 points iis KRAT PONI Hees No 0 to 999 No 1000 to 1023 F 3000 points 72 points FP2SH FP10SH 3 072 points 3000 No 0 to 2999 No 3000 to 3071 0 Set value lt n Counter size increases Set a ee Cee a Counter Set value gt n Timer size increases Last number For FP2 FP2SH set the system registers 5 and 6 to the same value This sets the timer to a non hold type and count
329. s stored in DT90000 R9001 Not used MEWNET TR master Turns on when a communication error occurs in the error flag MEWNET TR master unit or MEWNET TR network The Available PLC slot where the erroneous MEWNET TR master unit is R9002 FP10SH installed can be checked using DT90002 or DT90003 1 0 error flag Available PLC FP2 FP2SH Turns on when the error occurs in the I O unit The slot number of the unit where the error was occurred is stored in DT90002 DT90003 R9003 Intelligent unit error flag Turns on when an error occurs in an intelligent unit The slot number where the erroneous intelligent unit is installed is stored in DT90006 or DT90007 R9004 I O verification error flag Turns on when an I O verification error occurs The slot number of the I O unit where the verification error was occurred is stored in DT90010 or DT90011 R9005 Backup battery error flag non hold Turns on for an instant when a backup battery error occurs R9006 Backup battery error flag hold Turns on and keeps the on state when a backup battery error occurs To reset R9006 turn the power to off and then turn it on initialize after removing the cause of error R9007 Operation error flag hold Turns on and keeps the on state when an operation error occurs The address where the error occurred is stored in DT90017 Indicates the first operation error which occurred FP2SH FP10SH W
330. slots 3 18 FROM 6 10 7 3 G General specifications 10 3 Grounding 4 17 4 36 H Hexadecimal 11 96 I O allocation methods 3 3 I O mixed unit 2 32 I O mixed units specifications 2 55 I O mount allocation 3 3 3 13 IC memory card 2 23 7 3 7 8 IC memory card operation 6 13 6 29 Initialize test switch 2 9 Input and output units 2 30 Input unit 2 31 Input units specifications 2 33 Input wiring 4 18 Installation 4 3 Installation location 4 4 Interlock circuit 4 36 Internal circuit diagram 2 14 2 33 2 35 2 38 2 39 2 42 2 44 2 46 2 48 2 50 2 52 2 54 2 57 2 60 2 63 2 66 L Lifetime of backup battery 9 3 Limitations on current consumption 1 12 M Memory areas 10 10 Menus related to tool software 7 25 Mode selector 2 10 MODEM 1 17 Momentary power failures 4 37 Mounting hole dimensions 4 6 Mounting method 4 6 O Occupied I O points 3 5 On pulse catch input function 2 67 Operating environment viii Operation condition switches 2 10 2 21 Output unit 2 31 Output units specifications 2 39 Output wiring 4 21 P Password 8 10 Performance specifications 10 5 10 8 l 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Index Pin layout 2 14 2 34 2 36 2 38 2 40 2 42
331. specification according to the contents of the gt data table beginning at S F170 PWM output with PWM S n Performs PWM output from the channel specified output YO or Y1 5 lo specification according to the contents of the data table beginning at S High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FPOR High speed MV S Performs high speed counter counter and Pulse DT90052 and Pulse output controls output controls according to 5 the control code specified by S The control code is stored in DT90052 F1 Change and read DMV S Transfers S 1 S to high speed of the elapsed DT90300 counter and Pulse output 7 value of high elapsed value area DT90045 speed counter DT90044 and Pulse output DT90300 Transfers value in high speed D counter and Pulse output 7 elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 to D 1 D F165 Cam control CAMO S Controls cam operation on off patterns of each cam output 3 according to the elapsed value of the high speed counter F166 Target value much HC1S n S D Turns output Yn on when the on with channel elapsed value of the high speed specification counter or pulse output reaches High speed the target value of S 1 S 11 O counter control Pulse output control F167 Target value much HC1R n S D Turns output Yn off when the off with channel elapsed value of the high speed specification counter or pulse output reaches High speed the target value of S 1 S 11 oO counter con
332. struction executing executed flag on One of the above mentioned instructions can be executed Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the F145 SEND P145 execution of the F145 SEND P145 PSEND and F146 R9031 PSEND and F146 RECV P146 PRECV instructions as follows RECV P146 PRECV off No abnormality detected instruction end flag on An abnormality detected communication error The error code is stored in DT90039 Monitors the mode of the COM port as R9032 COM port mode flag on Serial data communication mode off Computer link mode R9033 F147 PR instruction Turns on while a F147 PR instruction is executed flag Turns off when a F147 PR instruction is not executed Editing in RUN mode fe F R9034 flag Turns on while editing a program in the RUN mode Monitors if FP3 FP10SH is in the F152 RMRD P152 F152 RMRD P152 PRMRD and F153 RMWT P153 PRMWT instructions PRMRD and F153 executable condition as follows R9035 RMWT P153 off None of the above mentioned instructions can be PRMWT instruction executed execution flag on One of the above mentioned instructions can be executed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Address Name Description Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the Fis BOE ee execution of the F152 RMRD P152 PRMRD and F15
333. t Download to PLC The program is transferred to the PLC programmable controller and the contents of allocation are simultaneously written to the PLC as part of its system register settings 3 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net I O Allocation FP2 FP2SH 3 2 Arbitrary Allocation 3 2 3 3 2 3 1 CPU backplane Backplane 7 module type Power supply unit 1 module CPU 1 module I O units 16 point type DC input unit 2 units 16 point type transistor output unit 3 units Expansion backplane Backplane 9 module type Power supply unit 1 module V O units 16 point type relay output unit 6 units 64 point type DC input unit 1 unit When Using FP2 Backplane Allocation Example of Expansion Backplane 16 point type transistor output unit XI Vist 16 point type CPU DC input unit backplane ooo Sor va f oon o pni D 16 point type relay output unit Free slot 64 point type DC input unit at 3 10 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH I O Allocation
334. t When using connector for wire pressed terminal cable supplied with the unit You can directly connect wires from AWG 22 0 3mm2 and AWG 24 0 2mm2 Eliminates the bother of wiring connections because the wires can be connected with out removing the covers from the wires Can correct wiring mistakes easy A tool exclusively designed for this purpose is necessary For detailed information section 4 4 2 When using connector and relay terminals Can be connected using exclusive cables With the RT 2 relay terminal you can control up to 2A For detailed information section 4 4 3 mw next page 4 23 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Installation and Wiring FP2 FP2SH 4 4 Wiring the Connector Type I O Units When using cable with pressure connection terminal The connector converted to a pressure connection terminal using the exclusive cable The I O numbers and corresponding pressure connection terminal pin numbers are the same as for connector terminals on section 4 4 3 When using flat cable There is a cable with a connector on only one end When using suitable connector you can use a commercially available flat cable For detailed information section 4 4 4 Table of Connector and Terminal Number or connector pins 40 pins Using con Housing Supplied with the unit nector for Conta
335. t Connects a Form A normally open contact in _p SF St S25 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the 5 O Q 0 O0 0 0 comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 S2 O Available X Not available A Not available partially Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps FPO FP e FPOR FPX FP X FP2 FP2SH FP10SH 32 bit data compare Start STD Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 S2 1 2 STD lt gt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 1 gt S2 1 2 STD gt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S 1 gt S2 1 S2 STD gt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 1 S2 1 2 STD lt D lt 1 825 Lf at Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 2 STD lt r D S1 25 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 1 S2 1 2 32 bit data compare AND AND D Si 2
336. t Then check the unit referring to its manual Selection of operation status using system register22 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 FP3 Check the contents of special data registers DT9006 DT9007 and locate the abnormal intelligent unit Then check the unit referring to its manual Selection of operation status using system register22 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function E42 1 O unit verify error Selec table I O unit Expansion unit wiring condition has changed compared to that at time of power up Check the contents of special data register FPO DT9010 FPZ FP X DT90010 DT90011 and locate the erroneous expansion unit It checks whether an expansion connector is in agreement Check the contents of special data register FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH DT90010 DT90011 FP3 DT9010 DT9011 Selection of operation status using system register23 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function A Available Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Opera Name tion Description and steps to take status Error code FP e FPO FPOR FPX FP X FP2 FP2SH FP10SH
337. t 1 4 p serially 2 Ea Ca Caj Eaj Ol AND Not AN XY R T C L P E Connects a Form B normally closed contact 1 e serially 2 UL ky EJ E 3 E OR XYRTCLPE Connects a Form A normally open contact 1 OR olololololo i in parallel 2 OR Not OR xyR zeLre Connects a Form B normally closed contact 1 in parallel 2 010 0 B 0 6B Leading xyrTCoLPE Begins a logic operation only for one scan AIA edge sTt when the leading edge of the trigger is 21xX O 2 2 0 0 start detected Trailing x RTCL Pe Begins a logic operation only for one scan AIA edge sTl aay __ when the trailing edge of the trigger is 2 xlo 2 2lolo start detected Leading IMEREGLEE Connects a Form A normally open contact AlA edge ANT _ N serially only for one scan when the leading 2 x o 2 2l lol lo AND edge of the trigger is detected Trailing WARE LEE Connects a Form A normally open contact AJA edge AN 1 serially only for one scan when the trailing 2 x oO 72 2 a o0 AND edge of the trigger is detected Leading Connects a Form A normally open contact AIA edge OR ORT A hr age in parallel only for one scan when the leading 2 x a 2 2 ala edge of the trigger is detected Trailing _ _ _ Connects a Form A normally open contact AJA edge OR OR A e aS in parallel only for one scan when the trailing 2 xlol 2 2lolo edge of the trigger is detected Leading p Outputs the operated result
338. t elapsed value of the built in high set with speed counter reaches the target 11 O channel value of S 1 S specification O Available X Not available A Not available partially 1 The instruction is available for FPO T32 V2 3 or later and FP e 2 The instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later and the pulse execution type can be specified FP10SH cannot be used 3 This instruction is available for FP2 Ver 2 0 or later 4 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 5 This instruction is available for FPZ Ver 3 10 or later Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net specification with the contents of the data table that starts with S x 72 2 Num Boo oe 2 Jaeja x a teh Name a Operand Description S a a m a a r F167 High speed HC1R n S Yn Turns output Yn off when the counter output elapsed value of the built in high reset with speed counter reaches the target 11 O channel value of S 1 S specification F168 Positioning SPD1 S n Outputs a positioning pulse from control with the specified output YO or Y1 5 lo channel according to the contents of the specification data table beginning at S F169 Pulse output with PLS S n Outputs a pulse from the channel specified output YO or Y1 5 lo
339. t in D 7 O O 0 0 0 0 Example H1234 gt H 32 31 34 33 2143 F74 ASCII code ABCD S1 S2 D Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 P74 4 digit PABCD and S2 to four digits of BCD data and BCD data stores it in D 9 0 0 0 0 0 C Example H 34 33 32 31 gt H3412 432 1 F75 16 bit binary BINA S1 S2 D Converts the 16 bits of binary data P75 data gt PBINA specified ASCII code by S1 to ASCII code and stores it in D zlolololo area of S2 bytes i a Example K 100 H 30 30 31 2D 20 20 001 O Available X Not available A Not available partially Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net T 72 9lia sa Num Name Boolean SS Description Sie ole T a ber rand llu ejej t F r Q F76 ASCII code gt ABIN S1 S2 Converts the ASCII code specified by P76 16 bit binary PABIN D S1 and S2 to 16 bits of binary data data and stores it in D 7 10 0 0jo oljoc Example H 30 30 31 2D 20 20 K 100 001 F77 32 bit binary DBIA S1 S2 Converts the 32 bits of binary data P77 data gt ASCII PDBIA D S1 1 111olololololo code S1 to ASCII code and stores it in D 7 area of S2 bytes F78 ASCII code gt DABI S1 S2 Converts the ASCII code specified by P78 32 bit binary PDABI
340. ta DXOR S1 S2 P217 XOR PDXOR D S1 1 S1 AND S2 1 S2 OR wlxlololololo S1 1 S1 AND S2 1 2 D 1 D F218 32 bit data DXNR S1 S2 S1 1 S1 AND S2 1 S2 OR P218 XNR PDXNR D S1 1 S1 AND S2 1 12 x O O O 0 0 S2 D 1 D F219 Double word DUNI S1 S2 S1 1 S1 AND S3 1 S3 OR P219 32 bit data PDUNI S3 D S2 1 S2 AND S3 1 6 x oj olojojo unites 3 gt D 1 D Data conversion instructions F230 Time data gt TMSEC S D The specified time data a date P230 second PTMSEC and time is changed to the second 6 x O 5 6 7 7 conversion data F231 Second SECTM S D The specified second data is P231 data gt time PSECTM changed into time data a date and 6 X O 5 6 7 7 conversion time O Available X Not available Z Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e only 2 This instruction is available for FPX Ver 3 10 or later 3 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 4 This instruction is available for FP10SH Ver 3 10 or later 5 This instruction is available for FP 32k type 6 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 1 13 or later 7 This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net
341. tachable With the memory unit FP2 EM7 the master memory AFP5208 or memory AFP2509 is required FP2 C2 FP2 C2L FP2 C2P FP2 C3P Internal RAM Internal RAM la Program Data comment User ROM Expansion memory unit FP2 EM7 Internal FROM Q The Download to PLC function in the FPWIN GR can be used to write programs and comments In both cases programs are stored in the internal RAM of the FP2SH If the FP2 C2 or FP2 C2L is being used comments are stored in the internal SRAM They are not written to the memory unit AFP2208 or FP2 EM7 If the FP2 C2P or FP2 C8P is being used comments are stored in the comment memory of internal F ROM 2 Programs and data in the internal RAM of the FP2SH are transferred to the user ROM with the RAM ROM transfer function in the FPWIN GR 3 Programs and data in the user ROM are transferred to the internal RAM of the FP2SH with the ROM RAM transfer function in the FPWIN GR 4 If the power supply is turned on with DIP switch SW2 set to on SW4 off pro grams and data stored in the user ROM are automatically sent to the internal RAM in the FP2SH 6 19 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation 6 7 2 ROM Operation Method Preparation
342. ted internally For more information regarding the applicable connectors and terminals refer to sec tion 4 4 1 2 38 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 10 Output Units Specifications 2 10 Output Units Specifications 2 10 1 16 point Type Relay Output Unit Specifications tem Cd Deseription S y Part number FP2 Y16R Insulation method Optical coupler Rated control capacity 2A 250V AC 5A common 2A 30V DC 5A common Min load 100uA 100mV resistor load Response time off on 10ms or less on gt off 8ms or less Life time Mechanical 20 000 000 operations or more Electrical 100 000 operations or more Internal current consumption 120mA or less at 5V DC Power supply for driving Voltage 24V DC 10 21 6 to 26 4V DC internal circuit Current 160mA or less Surge absorber None Relay socket None Common method Output points per 8 points common common Operating indicator 16 dot LED display lit when on External connection method Terminal block M 3 screw Weight Approx 190g Internal Circuit Diagram Max i 250V AC 2A Output ventundenees 30V DC 2A 24V DC 2 39 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 10 Output Units Speci
343. ter9 Maintenance 9 1 9 2 Replacement of Spare Parts 0 c cece eee ees 9 3 9 1 1 Backup Battery cis2 en Sante weet ta teeter whe hee 9 3 9 1 2 Removable Terminal Block for Input and Output Units 9 7 Preventive Maintenance 000 eee eee eee 9 8 Chapter 10 Specifications 101 Specifications serada ska CE ea eee CE tao ee tele OF 10 3 10 2 Relays Memory Areas and Constants 00 0 cece eee eee 10 10 10 3 Cable Adapter Specifications 0 0 cece ee 10 13 10 3 1 AFC8503 AFC8503S 0 0 c cee 10 13 10 3 2 AFC85305 AFC8531 AFC8532 For extending for the tool port eee eee eee 10 13 Chapter 11 Appendix 11 1 System Registers Special Internal Relays Special Data Registers 11 2 11 1 1 Table of System Registers for FP2 FP2SH FP10SH 11 4 11 1 2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP2 FP2SH FP10SH 11 18 11 1 3 Special Data Registers for FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 11 29 11 2 Table of Basic Instructions 2 000 c eee eee eee 11 54 11 3 Table of High level Instructions 0 0 11 62 11 4 Fable of Error codes bs 224 saciks ee Pees Red eo eed Gey oe a eee oes 11 82 11 4 1 Table of Syntax Check Error 0 0 cece eee eee 11 84 11 4 2 Table of Self Diagnostic Error 0 0 cece eee eee 11 86 11 4 3 Table of MEWTOCOL COM Communication Error 11 93 11 5 MEWTOCOL COM Co
344. terminal and frame ground terminal Vibration resistance 10 to 55Hz 1 cycle min double amplitude of 0 75mm 0 030 in 10 min on 3 axes Shock resistance 98m s2 4 times on 3 axes Noise immunity 1 500 Vp p with pulse widths 50ns and 1us based on in house measurements Operating conditions Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust Dimensions DIN rail mounting groove DIN EN50022 width 35 1 378 100 3 937 15 3 0 602 unit mm in FP2 backplane tem Description Number of module 5 modules 7 modules 9 modules 12 modules 14 modules L mm in 140 5 512 209 8 228 265 10 433 349 13 740 405 15 945 FP2 backplane H type PENE pip a Number of module Basic backplane Expansion backplane 11 modules 10 modules L mm in 349 13 740 349 13 740 The illustration above shows the 7 module type The 5 module type does not have an expansion connector 10 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Specifications FP2 FP2SH 10 1 Specifications Table of Weight Type Part number Weight Approx FP2 CPU FP2 C1 FP2 C1D FP2 C1SL FP2SH CPU FP2 C2L FP2 C2 FP2 C2P FP2 C3P Backplane FP2 BP05 FP2 BP07 FP2 BP09 FP2 BP12 FP2 BP14 FP2 BP11MH FP2 BP10EH FP2 Power supply unit FP2 PSA1 FP2 PSA2 FP2 PSA3 FP2 PSD2 Input unit DC input 16 point terminal type 12 to 24V DC FP2 X16D2
345. the check box in front of the data type speci fies whether or not that data can be sent Data marked with a check mark can be sent To specify the range double click on the list Storage Capacity of User ROM The potential storage capacity of user ROM is Number of program step Fixed value 2k words Data capacity Total number of words The largest total value of the above is 128k words Precautions for Comment Storage Editing of the program cannot be done during ROM operation Transfer the data after set the DIP switches SW2 to off 6 24 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation 6 7 6 Writing Data to the ROM AFP5209 only the FP2 C2 can be installed The master memory is a flash ROM and data can be written to it when it is installed in the CPU However data can only be written when the memory is an EPROM and when a commercially available ROM writer is used Master memory AFP5208 gt Memory AFP5209 Commercially available ROM writer Procedure of Writing to Memory AFP5209 Using Master Memory AFP5208 1 Turn the power off and install the expansion memory unit FP2 EM7 installed with the master memory AFP5208 to CPU Turn off the DIP switches SW2 of CPU Verify that t
346. the register x 2 5 ms DT9152 DT90152 PC PLC The number of times the sending operation is Note1 EI performed counted using ring counter DT9153 The current interval between two sending Note1 DT30133 Note2 3 operations value in the register x 2 5 ms DT9154 DT90154 The minimum interval between two sending Note1 operations value in the register x 2 5 ms DT9155 The maximum interval between two sending Note1 DT90153 operations value in the register x 2 5 ms N A N A DT9156 MEWNET Area used for measurement of receiving Note1 DT90156 Me interval PC PLC link status PC PLC A DT90157 l Brats nada for measurement of sending W P Note2 3 DT9158 MEWNET Area used for measurement of receiving Note1 DT90158 WEP interval PC PLC link status DT9159 P CAPES Area used for measurement of sending Note1 DT90159 link 1 eval W P Note2 3 Note1 Used by the system Note2 When the system register 46 KO First PC PLC link 0 second PC PLC link 1 When the system register 46 K1 First PC PLC link 1 second PC PLC link 0 Note3 For MEWNET W system available PLC type FP2 FP2SH FP3 FP10SH For MEWNET P system available PLC type FP3 FP10SH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address FP3 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Name Descriptio
347. tion Operation 2 Modify the program of the internal RAM using the programming tool Operation 3 Save the modified program to the memory or master memory and start operation again If the Program Memory is Protected Operation Turn off the power of the PLC remove the CPU and set the SW3 of DIP switches opera tion condition switches on CPU to off write enabled position When a Password Function is Used Operation 1 Onthe Online menu select Online Edit Mode 2 On the Tool menu select Set PLC Password 3 Enter the password and select unprotect 8 10 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 9 Maintenance Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Maintenance FP2 FP2SH 9 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Maintenance 9 1 Replacement of Spare Parts 9 1 Replacement of Spare Parts 9 1 1 Backup Battery Lifetime of Backup Battery The life of the backup battery will eventually expire and therefore it is important to re place it with a new battery periodically The battery lifetime will differ depending on the operating conditions i e ambient temperature and the type of expansion memory unit Refer to the table below for a guide as to when to replac
348. tion the number of steps is shown in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a relay number has an index modifier the number of steps is shown in parentheses 6 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when timer 256 or higher or counter 255 or lower is used the number of steps is the number in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a timer number or counter number has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses For the FP and FP X the number of steps varies according to the specified timer number or counter number Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net I 72 a Aaj Ej x a Name Boolean Symbol Description EJ 5 Eleja a N AE hyo je z iL 2 N ra UP DOWN F118 UP DOWN FIIBUDC Increments or decrements from the counter UDC rem R preset value S based on up down i s b input 5 GIOI OIOI GO O Reset j D Shift SR Deta ce wea 4 Shifts one bit of 16 bit word internal register ip relay WR data to the left a E Rese p 4 g Left right F119 YR renses Shifts one bit of 16 bit data range shift LRSR Cote specified by D1 and D2 to the left or register rhe f tothe right 5 lolololololo H H 3 Reset Control instructions Master MC Starts the master control program control 2 lolololololo H MO nH relay
349. tion you chose E200 by F148 to S 48 Conti Pear ae a ce E299 PERR ore instruction A Available Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 4 3 Table of MEWTOCOL COM Communication Error Emer Name Description code 121 NACK error Link system error 122 WACK error Link system error 123 Unit No overlap Link system error 124 Transmission format Link system ero error 125 Hins unit hardware Link system error error 126 Unit No setting error Link system error 127 No support error Link system error 128 No response error Link system error 129 Buffer closed error Link system error 30 Time out error Link system error 132 Transm FRON Link system error impossible error 133 Communication stop Link system error 36 No destination error Link system error 138 Other communication ink svetem oro error 140 BCC error A transfer error occurred in the received data 141 Format error A command was received that does not fit the format 142 No support error A command was received that is not supported 143 Multiple frames A different command was received when processing multiple procedure error frames 150 Link setting error A route number that does not exist was specified Verify the route number by designating the transmission station 51 Transmission Transmission to another d
350. ton The contents of the ROM are sent to the internal RAM 6 22 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP2 FP2SH Operation 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation 6 7 5 Sending Data from the RAM to the FROM The RAM ROM Transfer function in the FPWIN GR is used to send programs and data in the CPU to the ROM The data range can be specified as any of the following fields WL WR DT FL SV EV and LD CPU rear side Preparation Set the CPU in the PROG mode Procedure 1 Select Online Edit Mode on the Online menu bdder Symbol View Online The system goes online and online monitoring begins automatically The icon on the tool bar can also be used to do this w next page 6 23 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 7 FP2SH ROM Operation The ROM amp RAM Service window opens ROM amp RAM Service Untitle2 Fa C ROM lt RAM ies transfer the program system register oean ha PON ar IC od inio Help 3 Select ROM lt RAM and press the Data button ROM amp RAM Service Untitle2 FA C ROM gt RAM DTE ransfer the system register fe stored in the intemal RAM of PLE Data the ROM orl Heb 4 Select the data and specify the range Clicking on
351. topped when an No 13 P error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Unit Turns on when unit No 14 is communicating properly in the R908D PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an No 14 f error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Turns on when unit No 15 is communicating properly in the R908E gnit PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an No 15 error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Unit Turns on when unit No 16 is communicating properly in the R908F PC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an No 16 error occurs or when not in the PC link mode Note When the system registers 46 KO PC link 0 for the link unit with a smaller slot No and PC link 1 for one with a larger slot No When the system registers 46 K1 PC link 1 for the link unit with a smaller slot No and PC link 0 for one with a larger slot No Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Address Name Description R9090 Unit Turns on when unit No 1 is in the RUN mode No 1 Turns off when unit No 1 is in the PROG mode R9091 Unit Turns on when unit No 2 is in the RUN mode No 2 Turns off when unit No 2 is in the PROG mode R9092 Unit Turns on when unit No 3 is in the RUN mode
352. trol Pulse output control F171 Pulse output JOG SPDH S n Positioning pulses are output positioning type from the specified channel in 5 0 1 Trapezoidal accordance with the contents of control the data table that starts with S F172 Pulse output JOG PLSH S n Pulse strings are output from the operation 0 and 1 specified output in accordance 5 o with the contents of the data table that starts with S F173 PWM output with PWMH S n PWM output is output from the channel specified output in accordance 5 os Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net x 7 2 Num ee 62 2 E wlxia o N Bool D eieljoa a alse amp Ber ame oolean Operand escription 2 S aE aiit gt L wn N a ra F174 Pulse output SPOH S n Outputs the pulses from the Selectable data specified channel according to 5 5 table control the operation data table specified by S F175 Pulse output SPSH S n Pulses are output from channel Linear in accordance with the interpolation designated data table so that 5 O the path to the target position forms a straight line F176 Pulse output SPCH S n Pulses are output from channel Circular in accordance with the interpolation designated data table so that 5 x the path to the target position forms an arc F177 Pulse output HOME S n Performs the home return Home return according to the specified data 7 Q table F178 Input
353. tten Other than above Erroneous condition self diagnostic error code E56 PAPER The capacity of IC memory card is stored i DT90261 Available in units of KB If Flash EEPROM SRAM mixed type IC memory card is used PEC FEZSH SRAM capacity is stored FP10SH i Capacity of IC memory card 2 If Flash EEPROM SRAM mixed type IC DT90262 Available memory card is used flash EEPROM PLC FP2SH capacity is stored in units of KB FP10SH File register 3 DT90263 a egies The current value of file register bank is stored here Available PLC FP2SH Note For MEWNET W system available PLC type FP2 FP2SH FP3 FP10SH For MEWNET P system available PLC type FP3 FP10SH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address PPA Name Descriptions Rope pyrit FP3 FP2SH ing ing FP10SH File register DT90264 tata The shelter number of the file register Available bank is stored here PLC FP2SH Free compile memory Free capacity of compile memory is DT90265 capacity stored here If the program memory is Available 120K steps the capacity of 1st program PLC FP2SH block is stored A N A FP10SH Free compile memory capacity k If the program memory is 120K steps free DT90266 Beret oc capacity of program block 2 compile Available memory is stored here PLC FP
354. ture Input Output 32 32 24V DC 26 4V DC Number of 25 points per com mon which are 20 20 simultaneous on 25 43 51 55 109 4 123 8 131 Ambient temperature C F The load current will vary depending on the power supply for driving the internal circuit Adjust the load current referring to the following range 100 50 Max load current mA 4 75 10 2 26 4 Power supply for driving internal circuit V 2 56 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Parts and Functions 2 11 I O Mixed Units Specifications Internal Circuit Diagram Input Input indicator LED AA Input 5 6kQ eal SO 5602 5 2eavpc 44K 3 mer c COM Output l Output indicator 9 1kQ 5 to 24V DC CN2 gt AB O 1 O OAD O O BHO i 0a AO 24V DC 0 0 OO eta 5 to 24v oc J O 2 OO 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 amp 13 2 4 14 i 15 15 oe O 7 OO 17 amp 7 ae OO Oi O 19 D 19 20 20 9O The COM pins of each connector are Although and terminals are connected internally connected internally with the same connector It is recommended that they also be connected externally 2 57 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiauto
355. type FP2 PP22 Positioning unit Multifunction Transistor output type FP2 PP41 64SX 64SY type 4 axis type Line driver output type FP2 PP42 Positioning unit RTEX 2 axis FP2 PN2AN 128SX 128SY type Positioning unit RTEX 4 axis FP2 PN4AN type Positioning unit RTEX 8 axis FP2 PN8AN type Positioning Unit Interpolation Transistor output type FP2 PP2T 32SX 32SY Wye coe Line driver output type FP2 PP2L Positioning Unit Interpolation Transistor output type FP2 PP4T 64SX 64SY type 4 axis type Line driver output type FP2 PP4L Multi communication unit FP2 MCU 16SX 16SY Serial data unit FP2 SDU 16SX 16SY C C U FP2 CCU 16SE OSE Note 3 S LINK unit FP2 SL2 Note 1 Multi wire link unit FP2 MW 16SE OSE Note 3 ET LAN unit FP2 ET1 32SX 32SY OSE MEWNET VE Link unit FP2 VE 32SX 32SY OSE FNS Unit FP2 FNS 16SE OSE Note 3 FMU Unit PROFIBUS FP2 DPV1 M 16SE OSE Device Net Fp2 pEv m Note 3 CAN open FP2 CAN M i Notes 1 The occupied I O point of S LINK unit and CPU with S LINK will vary depending on the unit settings For details refer to FP2 S LINK Manual 2 When using a CPU with S LINK the functionality of the slots are increased and slot numbers can be allocated as if two S LINK units were installed For more details refer to FP2 S LINK Manual 3 The occupied point can be set to 0 with arbitrary allocation 4 When the handshake by I O is not used the number of occ
356. type the ROM amp RAM service menu and IC Card Service menu can also be used 6 29 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Operation FP2 FP2SH 6 8 FP2SH IC Memory Card Operation for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P Executing Programs There are two ways to execute programs written on IC memory cards described below Q Programs are automatically transferred when the power supply is turned on If the power supply is turned on when the DIP switches on the back of the CPU are set so that both SW2 and SW4 are on the Autoexec spg file stored in the IC memory card is sent to the internal RAM When the mode is switched to RUN operation begins in accordance with the contents of that file FP2SH FP2 C2P FP2 C3P Internal RAM Dx Internal FROM Autoexec spg IC memory card 2 Sending programs from the ROM amp RAM service menu If the power supply is turned on when the DIP switches on the back of the CPU are set so that SW2 is off and SW4 is on executing the ROM gt RAM operation causes the Autoexec spg file stored in the IC memory card to be sent to the in ternal RAM When the mode is switched to RUN operation begins in accordance with the contents of that file Before the ROM gt RAM menu is executed any contents loaded with the tool become the contents of the internal RAM
357. u pied points can be set to 0 by allocating arbitrarily 3 6 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH I O Allocation 3 2 Arbitrary Allocation 3 2 Arbitrary Allocation 3 2 1 Using Arbitrary Allocation In the case of arbitrary allocation I O allocations are decided at the time of system de sign and the allocations are registered in the PLC using a programming tool such as NPST GR FPWIN GR software At this time registration can be performed even if the I O units are not yet installed on the backplane according to the allocations However before operation the I O units must be installed and set as required by the system design 3 2 2 Allocation Example of CPU Backplane Backplane 7 module type J e Gd ed Power supply unit 1 module CPU 1 module E I O units used ml 16 point type DC input unit 2 units x 16 point type transistor output unit 3 units gt SE Q J Power CPU 16 point type 16 point type tran supply unit DC input unit sistor output unit 2 modules 5 modules 3 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 0 Allocation FP2 FP2SH 3 2 Arbitrary Allocation Registering with programming tool software Preparations
358. uilt in PONSA ads montor and Real Time Clock Clock Calendar setting A will operate correctly through the year minute second Real Time Clock 2099 and supports leap years iio Pope fe The Real Time Clock pT9055 DT90055 Qe a ns ar Clock Calendar can be set the time monitor an set by writing a value using a rigs programming tool software or a program ay nour lock that uses the FO MV transfer A A eal Time Clock instruction Clock Calendar Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits DT9056 DT90056 monitor and i setting year month DT9054 Minute data Second data 3 DT90054 HOO to H59 BCD H0O to H59 BCD Real Time Clock DT9055 Day data Hour data Clock Calendar DT90055 _ H01 to H31 BCD H00 to H23 BCD DT9056 Year dat Month dat DT9057 DT90057 monitor and DT90056 _ HOO to H99 BCD H01 to H12 BOD setting day of DT9057 Day of the week data the week DT90057 H00 to H06 BCD Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH FP3 A Available N A Not available Address FP3 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Name Descriptions Read ing Writ ing DT9058 DT90058 Real Time Clock Clock Calendar setting and 30 seconds correction The Real Time Clock Clock Calendar is adjusted as follows When setting the Real Time Clock Clock Calendar by program By setting the highest bit of DT9058 DT90058 to 1
359. ulti wire link unit eS Notes A Available N A Not available 1 When Mode B Unit with interrupt function has been speci fied the unit will be treated as interrupt unit and 8 interrupts per unit will be available for use However when Mode B has been set for the unit 2 units can be used with 1 CPU unit When Mode C Intelligent unit that generate interrupts has been specified and 1 interrupt per unit will be available for use However when Mode C has been set for the unit 8 units can be used with 1 CPU unit 2 Check the limitations on combining link units given below 3 In the MEWNET F mode up to four units can be used counting the CPU and expansion sides 4 With the backplane H type the total expansion cable length can be arranged within 3 2 m 5 The unit cannot be installed on the 31st slot last slot when using the H type backplane 6 The interrupt function is not available for the backplane on the slave station system 7 With the backplane on the slave station system the time taken from the startup until the completion of positioning should be longer than a scan time 8 With the backplane on the slave station system I O points cannot be set including 96 input points and 96 output points 1 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Overview
360. unctions Write protect switch a ON right Read only of the data 7_ _ OFF left Write enable of the data Lock switch It fixes the battery holder 22 _ LOCK right Lock position Lia RELEASE left Release position Note The lock switch is automatically back to the LOCK position from the RELEASE position when removing the battery holder Battery holder A battery for memory backup is installed A battery is supplied with the product Product number for purchasing separately AFP2806 Role of IC Memory Card The IC memory card can be used as a memory to which programs can be saved and cop ied or as an expanded memory to which data can be read and written in the program The IC memory card can be divided into two areas a format field in which various pro grams are stored and an expanded memory field used as a data memory 2 23 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Parts and Functions FP2 FP2SH 2 6 M i Example IC Memory Card for FP2 C2P FP2 C3P A 2MB card can be formatted as 1 MB with 1 MB being used as a format field and the remaining 1 MB being used as an expanded memory field The entire field can be used as a format field or as an ex panded memory field and the card used exclusively as a memory card for saving programs or data memory If the FROM section is spec
361. ure 1 Check wiring of power supply unit Procedure 2 Check if the output of the power supply unit is in the range of the rating If the capacity of internally supplied power 5V is insufficient investigate different unit combinations Procedure 3 Disconnect the power supply wiring to the other devices if the power supplied to the power supply unit is shared with them If the LED on the power supply unit turn on at this moment prepare another power sup ply for other devices 8 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Self Diagnostic Function and Troubleshooting FP2 FP2SH 8 2 Troubleshooting 8 2 4 If Outputting Does Not Occur as Desired Proceed from the check of the output side to the check of the input side Check of output condition 1 Output indicator LEDs are on Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the loads Procedure 2 Check if the power is properly supplied to the loads If the power is properly supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the load Check the load again If the power is not supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the output section Please contact your dealer Check of output condition 2 Output indicator LEDs are off Procedure 1 Monitor the output condition using a programming tool If the output monitored is turned on there is probably a duplicated output error Procedure 2 Forcing on the
362. ured to which the program will be saved This section explains how this is done using the FPWIN GR Procedure 1 Booting the Format IC Card function On the Tool menu select IC Card Service and then Format IC Card The Format IC Card window next page 7 10 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH IC Memory Card 7 2 Formatting and Erasing 2 Specifying and running the format size Press the button next to Format Size to select the size Next click on the Execute button to format the card at the specified size 7 2 3 Procedure for Erasing the IC Memory Card For both the SRAM type and the FROM type before the IC memory card can be used as an expanded memory any data already on the card must be erased and an area must be assured as the expanded memory field The procedure is described here us ing the FPWIN GR Procedure 1 Booting the Erase IC Card function On the Tool menu select IC Card Service and then Erase IC Card The Erase IC Card window opens 7 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net IC Memory Card FP2 FP2SH 7 2 Formatting and Erasing 2 Erasing the card Clicking on the Execute button starts erasing the data from the card It takes approximately 1
363. used for send area Unit number setting for 410 pera Bins poi 1 1 to 99 unit No 1 to 99 FP2SH Commu Tool port Mao Character bits 7 bits 8bits setting Communication format Modem communication character 411 setting for tool port bit 8 bits Enabled Disabled Available PLC FP2 gt When connecting a modem set the FP2SH Nodem unit number to 1 with system register communi eee 410 cation Disabled Note Available PLC MEWNET W FP10SH FP2 FP2SH MEWNET P FP10SH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Item Sda Name ere Descriptions ress value In the FP10SH when the dip switch SW 1 on the CPU is off the baud rate setting is effective In the FP2 FP2SH when the dip switch SW1 on the rear of the CPU is Ce a 414 eae setting for the 19200 bps off the baud rate setting is effective 19200 bps 19200 bps 1200 bps 38400 bps 2400 bps 57600 bps 4800 bps 115200 bps 9600 bps a Nol UNUSED COM port is not used Communication method FP2SH COMPUTER EINK computer link 412 setting for COM port EP10SH mode when connecting C NET f GENERAL serial data communication Computer ede link Communication format Character setting Common setting bit 8 bits for both computer link Parity chk and sortal cata yain Character bit 7 bits 8 bits communication odd Parity chk hain odd wit
364. using the TOOL port an FP PC cable M5 C NET adapter AFP8536 AFP8532 x 1 piece type AFC8513 and a self made cable are nec essary C NET adapter S2 type AFP15402 x number of PLC Two core cable VCTF 0 75mm 1 18 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Overview 1 4 Programming Tools 1 4 Programming Tools 1 4 1 Tools Needed for Programming Necessary tools FP2 FP2SH y So ooo 3 Commercially available computer Programming tool software 1 Programming tool software This is a program editing debugging and document creating software package that can be used with all programmable controllers in the FP series 2 FP PC cable This cable needed for connection between the FP2 FP2SH and the computer When connecting to a computer IBM PC AT or 100 compatible use a com mercially available adapter section 1 4 2 For the following use commercially available products 3 Commercially available computer 1 19 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Overview FP2 FP2SH 1 4 Programming Tools 1 4 2 Software Environment and Suitable Cable Standard ladder diagram tool software FPWIN GR Ver 2 Type of software os Hard disk capacity Product No Operating system FPWIN GR Ver 2 Full type Windows 98
365. utomatic Allocation Automatic allocation is executed when the power is turned on If I O allocations have previously been registered using arbitrary allocation or I O mount allocation automatic allocation is not executed Clear the registered allocations and then turn on the power once again section 3 5 The result of the automatic allocation will be the same as for I O mount allocation 3 16 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH I O Allocation 3 5 Procedure for Clearing Registered Content 3 5 Procedure for Clearing Registered Content 3 5 1 Meaning of Clearing Registered Content To repeat the I O allocation it is necessary to clear registered content Registered con tent is cleared by initializing the system registers i Note System registers not related to I O allocations are also initialized If you only want to change the registered I O allocations do not initialize the system registers Instead use arbitrary allocation section 3 2 3 5 2 Clearing Content Using Programming Tool Software Preparations Set the FPWIN GR tool software to online monitor Procedure 1 On the Option menu select PLC Configuration SE E rien Era Tew aD brad T OO Po Peete O Baso Miia pia Sait HokgeTine haied l Haiti a ij m Lin Dt akana Pi ee le z Rad Fy Dima Hai SH ne biud Bee Lee oes Lee fi ite 1 oe
366. vailable partially 1 The instruction is available for FPO T32 V2 3 or later and FP e 2 This instruction is available for FPO V1 20 or later and FP e 4 This instruction is available for FP X V2 50 or later and FP V3 20 or later s 3 This instruction is available for FP X V1 20 or later and FP 32k type Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net x 72 9 oja x Non Name Boolean epe Description lelg R A a i ber rand mlale lelel E Iz i a a ra F150 Data read from READ S1 S2 Reads the data from the lxlxl lxlolo P150 intelligent unit PREAD n D intelligent unit 3 N es F151 Data write into WRT S1 S2 Writes the data into the intelligent lxlx Aly lolo P151 intelligent unit PWRT n D unit ea el ee F152 Data read from RMRD S1 S2 Reads the data from the P152 MEWNET F PRMRD n D intelligent unit at the MEWNET F 9 x x I x x a slave station remote I O slave station F153 Data write into RMWT S1 S2 Writes the data into the intelligent P153 MEWNET F PRMWT n D unit at the MEWNET F remote 91x x x x O o slave station I O slave station F155 Sampling SMPL Starts sampling data 1 xlol4l4lalo P155 PSMPL gt sa F156 Sampling STRG When the trigger of this P156 trigger PSTRG instruction turns on the sampling 1 x O 45 4
367. ve fragments adhering to the unit e Verify that the power supply wiring I O wiring and power supply voltage are all correct e Sufficiently tighten the installation screws and terminal screws e Set the mode selector to PROG mode Before Entering a Program Chapter 5 Be sure to perform a program clear operation before entering a program When using FPWIN GR software Procedure 1 Execute FPWIN GR 2 ON the Online menu select Online Edit Mode 3 ON the Edit menu select Clear Program Battery Do not install the battery when it is not used There is a possibility of leak if the battery remains discharged viii Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Table of Figures Special Precautions With the FP2 The FP2 uses the term module when express the size of the unit or backplane The unit installation sizes come in two sizes the basic 1 module size and the 2 module size that is twice as wide The 1 module unit is the size that physically takes up the space of one guide on the backplane The 2 module unit is the size that physically takes up the space of two guides on the backplane 1 module unit 2 module unit Backplane Selection Following two kinds of backplanes are available 1 FP2 backplane AFP25 Color of letters on the printed board White 2 FP2 backp
368. viii Special Precautions 0 0 x Compatibility with CPU Unit and Precautions xiii Compatibility of FP2SH and FP2 and Precautions xiv IC memory cards for the FP2SH 45 xv Compatibility of FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH and Precautions xvi Programming Tool Restrictions 0 xvii Chapter1 Overview 1 1 System Configuration 2 244 Lacdwiks We een dh Gael ee hea ee te eete a ky 1 3 1 1 1 Basic Configuration by Number of Slots 0 1 3 1 1 2 Expansion of Backplane 0 eee 1 5 1 2 Unit Types and Combinations 0 0 cece eee 1 8 1 2 1 Line Up of Backplanes and Units 0 00 eee eee eee 1 8 1 2 2 Combinations That Can be Used and Restrictions 1 10 1 2 2 1 Restrictions on Unit Types 2 0000 1 10 1 2 2 2 Limitations on Current Consumption 1 12 1 3 Expansion Function 22 Oeendsie sean eieeewa tes 24 ea ee eres 1 15 1 3 1 Computer Link 2 02ctsecsnee eine late saaer eile teres 1 15 1 3 2 Connection of MODEM 0 e eee eee 1 17 1 4 Programming Tools 3 2 205 seed eee eee ka aie eee Raney wed 1 19 1 4 1 Tools Needed for Programming eee eee eee 1 19 1 4 2 Software Environment and Suitable Cable 1 20 1 4 3 Tools Needed for ROM Creating 00 cece eee 1 21 Chapter 2 Parts and Functions
369. y available for FP e Ver 1 2 or later 2 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later and FPO V2 1 or later Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net exceeding the floating point type data floating point data and the converted data is stored in D 1 D 4 x 3 oja Num Name Boo Ope Description gle S A a amp ber lean rand a el rj s el z re a F314 Floating point type SIN S D SIN S 1 S gt D 1 D 7ol 2lololololc P314 data sine operation PSIN 4 f F315 Floating point type cos S D COS S 1 S gt D 1 D l P315 data cosine PCOS 10 a JOJC O operation F316 Floating point type TAN S D TAN S 1 S gt D 1 D P316 data tangent PTAN 10 a ojojololo operation F317 Floating point type ASIN S D SIN S 1 S gt D 1 D P317 data arcsine PASIN 10 i4 O O 0 O0 0 operation F318 Floating point type ACOS S D Cos S 1 S gt D 1 D P318 data arccosine PACOS 10 4 O O O0 O 0 operation F319 Floating point type ATAN s D TAN S 1 S gt D 1 D P319 data arctangent PATAN 10 4 olojojolo operation F320 Floating point type LN S D LN S 1 S gt D 1 D P320 data natural PLN 10 4 O O0 0 O0 0 logarithm F321 Floating point type EXP S D EXP S 1 S gt D 1 D P321 data exponent PEXP 10 4 O Q O0 oO 0 F322 Floating point
370. ying the contents of a floppy disk or hard disk to the card With the FROM type of IC memory card it is not possible to update only partial sections of data or to change file names or delete files These functions should be carried out on the disk before the data is copied to the IC memory card 7 26 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Self Diagnostic Function and Troubleshoot ing Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Self Diagnostic Function and Troubleshooting FP2 FP2SH 8 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2 FP2SH Self Diagnostic Function and Troubleshooting 8 1 Self Diagnostic Function 8 1 Self Diagnostic Function 8 1 1 LED Display for Status Condition Status Indicator LEDs on CPU Condition LED status Description Operation Program execution status Normal on off off off off off Normal operation Operation condition of Jon varies off off off PROG mode Stop Flashes off Varies off off off Forcing on off in RUN mode Operation off on on Varies Varies off TEST operation mode break condition Stop on off on off Varies off TEST operation mode operating Operation condition Abnormal off on Varies Varies on Varies When a self diagnostic error o

Panasonic FP2/FP2SH Series PLCs User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents